Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Msa5m2107b Stis Opt
Msa5m2107b Stis Opt
Msa5m2107b Stis Opt
Foreword
Foreword
SFWAA
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in
excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control
system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read this
manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and its
operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual, such
as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact the
SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the
nearest SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and illustrations found in this
manual are those in effect at the time of printing. SUBARU
CORPORATION reserves the right to change specifications and
designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any
obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles
previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and
covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some
explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your
vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The next
owner will need the information found herein.
SUBARU CORPORATION, TOKYO, JAPAN
“SUBARU” and the six-star cluster design are registered trademarks of SUBARU CORPORATION.
*
C Copyright 2020 SUBARU CORPORATION
Vehicle types
SFWAB
This manual describes the following vehicle type.
1
S00
Warranties & Warranties except for U.S.A. How to use this Owner’s 0
S00AA and Canada Manual
& Warranties for U.S.A. S00AA06
All warranty information, including details S00AB
S00AA01
SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru of of coverage and exclusions, is in the & Using your Owner’s Manual
S00AB01
America, Inc. and sold at retail by an “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Before you operate your vehicle, carefully
authorized SUBARU dealer in the United Read these warranties carefully. read this manual. To protect yourself and
States come with the following warranties: extend the service life of your vehicle,
. SUBARU Limited Warranties follow the instructions in this manual.
. Federal Emission Control Systems Failure to observe these instructions may
Warranties result in serious injury and damage to your
. California Emissions Control Sys- vehicle.
tems Warranties This manual is composed of fourteen
All warranty information, including applic- chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief
ability, details of coverage and exclusions, table of contents, so you can usually tell at
is in the “Warranty and Maintenance a glance if that chapter contains the
Booklet”. Read these warranties carefully. information you want.
Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS air-
& Warranties for Canada bags
S00AA05
SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru This chapter informs you how to use the
Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by an seat and seatbelt and contains precau-
authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada tions for the SRS airbags.
come with the following warranties: Chapter 2: Keys and doors
. SUBARU Limited Warranty This chapter informs you how to operate
. Emission Control System Warranty the keys, locks and windows.
Chapter 3: Instruments and controls
All warranty information, including applic-
This chapter informs you about the opera-
ability, details of coverage and exclusions,
tion of instrument panel indicators and how
is in the “Warranty and Service Booklet”.
to use the instruments and other switches.
Read these warranties carefully.
– CONTINUED –
Vehicle symbols Safety precautions when . The SRS airbags deploy with
S00AC driving considerable speed and force.
There are some of the symbols you may S00AD
Occupants who are out of proper
see on your vehicle. & Seatbelt and SRS airbag position when the SRS airbag
S00AD01 deploys could suffer very serious
For warning and indicator lights, refer to injuries. Because the SRS airbag
“Warning and indicator lights” F23. WARNING
needs enough space for deploy-
Mark Name . All persons in the vehicle must ment, the driver should always sit
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE upright and well back in the seat
WARNING the vehicle starts to move. Other- as far from the steering wheel as
wise, the possibility of serious practical while still maintaining
injury becomes greater in the full vehicle control and the front
CAUTION event of a sudden stop or acci- passenger should move the seat
dent. as far back as possible and sit
upright and well back in the seat.
Read these instructions care- . To obtain maximum protection in
fully the event of an accident, the For instructions and precautions, carefully
driver and all passengers must read the following sections.
Wear eye protection always wear seatbelts when in
the vehicle. The SRS (Supple- . For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-
mental Restraint System) airbag belts” F1-12.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric does not do away with the need to . For the SRS airbag system, refer to
acid “SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint Sys-
fasten seatbelts. In combination
with the seatbelts, it offers the tem airbag)” F1-40.
Keep children away best combined protection in case
of a serious accident.
Keep flames away Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
Prevent explosions vehicle has the SRS airbag.
& Child safety with considerable speed and themselves or others through 0
S00AD02
force and can injure or even kill inadvertent operation of the ve-
WARNING children, especially if they are not hicle. Also, on hot or sunny days,
restrained or improperly re- temperature in a closed vehicle
. Never hold a child on your lap or strained. Because children are could quickly become high en-
in your arms while the vehicle is lighter and weaker than adults, ough to cause severe or possibly
moving. The passenger cannot their risk of being injured from fatal injuries to them.
protect the child from injury in a deployment is greater. . When leaving the vehicle, close
collision, because the child will . NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT all windows and lock all doors.
be caught between the passen- IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO
ger and objects inside the vehi- RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR For instructions and precautions, carefully
cle. DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA- read the following sections.
. While riding in the vehicle, infants CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO . For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-
and small children should always CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG. belts” F1-12.
be seated in the REAR seat in an . Always turn the child safety locks . For the child restraint system, refer to
infant or child restraint system to the “LOCK” position when “Child restraint systems” F1-25.
which is appropriate for the children sit in the rear seat. . For the SRS airbag system, refer to
child’s age, height and weight. If Serious injury could result if a “SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint Sys-
a child is too big for a child child accidentally opens the door tem airbag)” F1-40.
restraint system, the child should and falls out. Refer to “Child
sit in the REAR seat and be safety locks” F2-28.
restrained using the seatbelts.
According to accident statistics, . Always lock the passenger’s win-
children are safer when properly dows using the lock switch when
restrained in the rear seating children are riding in the vehicle.
positions than in the front seating Failure to follow this procedure
positions. Never allow a child to could result in injury to a child
stand up or kneel on the seat. operating the power window. Re-
fer to “Windows” F2-28.
. Place children in the REAR seat
properly restrained at all times in . Never leave unattended children,
a child restraint device or in a adults or animals in the vehicle.
seatbelt. The SRS airbag deploys They could accidentally injure
– CONTINUED –
& Engine exhaust gas (carbon vehicle, have the problem sumed too much alcohol to drive safely
monoxide) checked and corrected as soon even if the level of alcohol in your blood is
S00AD03 as possible. If you must drive below the legal limit. The safest thing you
WARNING under these conditions, drive can do is never drink and drive. However if
only with all windows fully open. you have no choice but to drive, stop
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas. . Keep the rear gate closed while drinking and sober up completely before
Engine exhaust gas contains driving to prevent exhaust gas getting behind the wheel.
carbon monoxide, a colorless from entering the vehicle.
and odorless gas which is dan- & Drugs and driving
S00AD05
gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the en- & Drinking and driving WARNING
S00AD04
gine exhaust system to prevent
engine exhaust gas from entering There are some drugs (over the
WARNING counter and prescription) that can
the vehicle.
Drinking and then driving is very delay your reaction time and impair
. Never run the engine in a closed your perception, judgment and at-
space, such as a garage, except dangerous. Alcohol in the blood-
stream delays your reaction time tentiveness. If you drive after taking
for the brief time needed to drive them, it may increase your, your
the vehicle in or out of it. and impairs your perception, judg-
ment and attentiveness. If you drive passengers’ and other persons’ risk
. Avoid remaining in a parked ve- after drinking – even if you drink just of being involved in a serious or fatal
hicle for a lengthy time while the a little – it will increase the risk of accident.
engine is running. If that is un- being involved in a serious or fatal
avoidable, then use the ventila- accident, injuring or killing yourself, If you are taking any drugs, check with
tion fan to force fresh air into the your passengers and others. In your doctor or pharmacist or read the
vehicle. addition, if you are injured in the literature that accompanies the medication
. Always keep the front ventilator accident, alcohol may increase the to determine if the drug you are taking can
inlet grille free from snow, leaves severity of that injury. impair your driving ability. Do not drive
or other obstructions to ensure after taking any medications that can make
Please don’t drink and drive. you drowsy or otherwise affect your ability
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly. to safely operate a motor vehicle. If you
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent have a medical condition that requires you
. If at any time you suspect that causes of accidents. Since alcohol affects to take drugs, please consult with your
exhaust fumes are entering the all people differently, you may have con- doctor.
Never drive if you are under the influence & Modification of your vehicle regulations. In addition, damage or 0
of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your S00AD07
performance problems resulting
own health and well-being, we urge you WARNING from modification may not be cov-
not to take illegal drugs in the first place ered under warranties.
and to seek treatment if you are addicted . Do not remove the SUBARU gen-
to those drugs. uine navigation and/or audio sys-
tem. If the SUBARU genuine & Use of cell phones/texting
& Driving when tired or sleepy navigation and/or audio system and driving
S00AD06
is removed, the rear view camera S00AD16
lead to an accident. If you wish to Check the tire pressure when the tires are . If it is necessary to attach an
operate the controls of the naviga- cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the accessory (such as an electronic
tion system, first take the vehicle off tire pressures to the values shown on the toll collection (ETC) device or
the road and stop it in a safe tire inflation pressure label. For detailed security pass) to the windshield,
location. information, refer to “Tires and wheels” consult your SUBARU dealer for
F11-21. details on the proper location.
General information deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition
that will assist in understanding how a to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
0
S00AK
& California Perchlorate Advi- vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is such as law enforcement, that have the
sory designed to record data related to vehicle special equipment, can read the informa-
S00AK03 dynamics and safety systems for a short tion if they have access to the vehicle or
Certain vehicle components such as air- period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. the EDR.
bag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
keyless entry transmitter batteries may record such data as:
contain perchlorate material. Special
. How various systems in your vehicle
handling may apply for service or vehicle
were operating;
end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/
hazardouswaste/perchlorate. . Whether or not the driver and passen-
ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
& Noise from under the vehicle . How far (if at all) the driver was
S00AK01 depressing the accelerator and/or brake
NOTE pedal; and,
You may hear a noise from under the . How fast the vehicle was traveling.
vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours
after the ignition switch is turned to the These data can help provide a better
“LOCK”/“OFF” position. However, this understanding of the circumstances in
does not indicate a malfunction. This which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:
noise is caused by the operation of the EDR data are recorded by your vehicle
fuel evaporation leakage checking sys- only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;
tem and the operation is normal. The no data are recorded by the EDR under
noise will stop after approximately 15 normal driving conditions and no personal
minutes. data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) are recorded. However, other
parties, such as law enforcement, could
& Event data recorder combine the EDR data with the type of
S00AK04
This vehicle is equipped with an event data personally identifying data routinely ac-
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an quired during a crash investigation.
EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
(1,1)
Table of contents
12
1) Engine hood (page 11-5)
Illustrated index 2) Windshield wipers (page 3-79)
S00AE 3) Headlights (page 3-69)
& Exterior 4) Replacing bulbs (page 11-38)
S00AE01
5) Moonroof (page 2-32)
6) Roof rails (page 8-14)
7) Outside mirrors (page 3-90)
8) Door locks (page 2-21)
9) Tire pressure (page 11-23)
10) Flat tires (page 9-5)
11) Snow tires (page 8-10)
12) Fog lights (page 3-76)
13) Tie-down hooks (page 9-13)
14) Towing hook (page 9-13)
13
1) Rear window defogger (page 3-91)
2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-5) 0
3) Child safety locks (page 2-28)
4) Tie-down hole (page 9-13)
5) Replacing bulbs (page 11-38)
6) Rear gate (page 2-31)
7) Towing hook (page 9-13)
8) Rear window wiper (page 3-81)
– CONTINUED –
14
1) Lower anchorages for child restraint
& Interior system (page 1-35)
S00AE02
2) Seatbelt (page 1-12)
! Passenger compartment area
S00AE0201 3) Front seat (page 1-2)
4) Rear seat (page 1-2)
5) Buttons for SUBARU STARLINK
NOTE
For models with SUBARU STARLINK:
Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-
ment for SUBARU STARLINK.
15
1) Power window switches (page 2-28)
2) Door locks (page 2-21) 0
3) Remote control mirror switch (page 3-90)
4) Glove box (page 6-6)
5) Front power supply socket (page 6-7)
6) Shift lever (MT models) (page 7-23)/
Select lever (CVT models) (page 7-25)
7) Seat heater switches (page 1-10)
8) Cup holder (page 6-6)
9) X-MODE switch (page 7-43)
10) Center console (page 6-6)
11) Parking brake lever (page 7-47)
– CONTINUED –
16
1) Steering Responsive Headlight off switch
& Instrument panel (page 3-75)
S00AE03
2) Illumination brightness control dial (page
3-12)
3) Combination meter (page 3-8)
4) Multi-function display (black and white)
(page 3-43)/Multi-function display (color
LCD) (page 3-49)
5) Audio and navigation system*
6) Hazard warning flasher switch (page 3-8)
7) Climate control (page 4-2)
8) USB power supply (page 6-9)
9) Tilt/Telescopic steering (page 3-93)
10) BSD/RCTA OFF switch (page 7-69)
11) Fuse box (page 11-36)
12) Auto Start Stop OFF switch (page 7-57)
13) Hood release knob (page 11-5)
14) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch
(page 7-40)
*: For details about how to use the audio and
navigation system, refer to the separate
navigation/audio Owner’s Manual.
NOTE
For models with the EyeSight system:
Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-
ment for the EyeSight system.
17
1) Audio control switches*
2) INFO button for multi-function display 0
(black and white) (page 3-43)/INFO
button for multi-function display (color
LCD) (page 3-49)
3) Cruise control switches (page 7-52)
4) Shift paddle (page 7-28)
5) SI-DRIVE switches (page 7-33)
6) VIEW monitor switch (page 6-17)
7) Heated Steering Wheel switch (page 3-
93)
8) SRS airbag (page 1-40)
9) Horn (page 3-94)
10) Combination meter display (color LCD)
control switches (page 3-35)
11) Talk switch for voice command system*/
Hands-free phone switches*
*: For details about how to use the switches,
refer to the separate navigation/audio
Owner’s Manual.
– CONTINUED –
18
1) Windshield wiper (page 3-78)
& Light control and wiper control levers/switches 2) Mist (page 3-79)
S00AE04
3) Windshield washer (page 3-80)
4) Rear window wiper and washer switch
(page 3-81)
5) Wiper intermittent time control switch
(page 3-80)
6) Wiper control lever (page 3-78)
7) Light control switch (page 3-68)
8) Fog light switch (page 3-76)
9) Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 3-69)
10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam change
(page 3-71)
11) Turn signal lever (page 3-77)
19
1) Tachometer (page 3-8)
& Combination meter 2) Select lever/gear position indicator (page 0
S00AE05
3-30)
! U.S.-spec. models (type A)
S00AE0538 3) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-9)
4) Speedometer (page 3-8)
5) ECO gauge (page 3-10)
6) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)
The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter may
be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.
– CONTINUED –
20
1) Tachometer (page 3-8)
! U.S.-spec. models (type B) 2) Select lever/gear position indicator (page
S00AE0549
3-30)
3) Combination meter display (color LCD)
(page 3-35)
4) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-9)
5) Speedometer (page 3-8)
6) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)
The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter may
be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.
21
1) Tachometer (page 3-8)
! Except U.S.-spec. models (type A) 2) Select lever/gear position indicator (page 0
S00AE0531
3-30)
3) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-9)
4) Speedometer (page 3-8)
5) ECO gauge (page 3-10)
6) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)
The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter may
be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.
– CONTINUED –
22
1) Tachometer (page 3-8)
! Except U.S.-spec. models (type B) 2) Select lever/gear position indicator (page
S00AE0519
3-30)
3) Combination meter display (color LCD)
(page 3-35)
4) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-9)
5) Speedometer (page 3-8)
6) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)
The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter may
be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.
23
& Warning and indicator lights Mark Name Page Mark Name Page
0
S00AE06
AT OIL TEMP warning LED headlight warning
Mark Name Page light (CVT models) 3-18 light (models with LED 3-32
headlights)
Seatbelt warning light 3-13 High beam indicator
ABS warning light 3-20 3-31
light
Front passenger’s 3-13
seatbelt warning light Brake system warning 3-20 High beam assist indi-
light (red) cator light (if equipped) 3-31
– CONTINUED –
24
Cruise control set indi- 3-31 Intelligent (I) mode in- 3-30
cator light (if equipped) dicator (if equipped)
25
Function settings 0
S00AF
& Function settings and adjustments on the combination meter display (color LCD)
S00AF01
If your vehicle is equipped with a combination meter display (color LCD), setting adjustments to the following items can be manually
changed within the display to meet your personal requirements.
NOTE
If your vehicle is not equipped with a combination meter display (color LCD), setting changes to the following items will need
to be performed by a SUBARU dealer. Refer to “Function settings and adjustments performed by a dealer” F28.
– CONTINUED –
26
27
Rear Gate/Trunk Unlock Rear Gate/Trunk Only/ Rear Gate/Trunk Only 3-42
(if equipped) All
Defogger — 15 minutes/Continuous 15 minutes 3-91
– CONTINUED –
28
& Individual settings and adjustments excluding combination meter display (color LCD)
S00AF02
Auto dimmer cancel (if equipped) Sensitivity of the operation of the OFF/Min/Low/Mid/Hi/Max Mid
auto dimmer cancel
Seatbelt warning Sounds a chime while driving Operation/Non-operation Operation
29
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
– CONTINUED –
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Also, never install
the head restraints the opposite
way round. Doing so will prevent
the head restraints from function-
ing as intended. Therefore, when
WARNING WARNING you remove the head restraints,
you must reinstall all head re-
Seatbelts provide maximum re- Never stack luggage or other cargo straints correctly to protect vehi-
straint when the occupant sits well higher than the top of the seatback cle occupants.
back and upright in the seat. Do not because it could tumble forward and
. All occupants, including the dri-
put cushions or any other materials injure passengers in the event of a
ver, should not operate a vehicle
between occupants and seatbacks sudden stop or accident.
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
or seat cushions. If you do so, the
head restraints are placed in their
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
proper positions in order to mini-
of the lap belt sliding up over the
mize the risk of neck injury in the
abdomen will increase, and both can
event of a crash.
result in serious internal injury or
death.
& Front seats ! Reclining the seatback ! Seat height adjustment (driver’s 1
S01AQ02 S01AQ020102
seat)
! Manual seat (if equipped) S01AQ020103
S01AQ0201
– CONTINUED –
! Power seat (driver’s seat – if & Rear seats ! Folding down the rear seatback
S01AQ03 S01AQ0302
equipped)
S01AQ0202 ! Armrest (if equipped) WARNING
S01AQ0301
WARNING 1
When returning the seatback to its
original position, observe the fol-
lowing precaution.
Failure to observe the precaution
may damage the seatbelt, impairing
its effectiveness, and possibly re-
sult in a serious injury.
. When returning the seatback to
its original position, pull the
seatbelt out towards the vehicle
Unlock the seatback by pulling the lock exterior so that it will not be Lock release knob
release knob and then fold the seatback caught between the seatback 1) Unlocked
down. and the trim. 2) Locked
A) Unlocking marker in red
! Return the rear seatback
S01AQ0303 To return the seatback to its original
position, raise the seatback until it locks
into place and make sure that the unlock-
ing marker on the lock release knob is no
longer visible.
WARNING
When you return the seatback to its
original position, check that the
unlocking marker on the lock re-
lease knob is not visible. Also, move
the seatback back and forth to
confirm that it is securely fixed in
place. If the seatback is not securely
fixed in place, the seatback may
– CONTINUED –
WARNING
The front seat head restraints are
designed to be installed into the
front seats only. The rear seat head
restraints are designed to be in-
stalled into the rear seats only. Do
not attempt to install the front seat
head restraints into the rear seats, or
the rear seat head restraints into the
front seats.
Each head restraint should be adjusted so
1) Head restraint that the center of the head restraint is
NOTE 2) Release button closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.
It is possible to adjust the angle of the
To raise:
front seat head restraints only. When NOTE
installing the front seat head restraints, Pull the head restraint up.
When the head restraint cannot be
make sure that the angle of the head To lower: pulled out or installed due to insuffi-
restraints can be adjusted. Push the head restraint down while press- cient clearance between the head re-
ing the release button on the top of the straint and the roof, tilt the seat and
seatback. then perform the installation and re-
To remove: moval tasks.
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
! Angle adjustment ! Rear seats After installing the head restraint, make
S01AQ040102 S01AQ0402
sure it is securely locked.
1
Both the rear window side seats and the
rear center seat are equipped with head ! Rear center seating position
restraints. S01AQ040202
– CONTINUED –
CAUTION
1) Head restraint . People with delicate skin may
2) Release button suffer slight burns even at low
To raise: temperatures if they use the seat
heater for a long period of time.
Pull the head restraint up.
When using the heater, always be
To lower: sure to warn the persons con-
Push the head restraint down while press- cerned.
ing the release button on the top of the
. Do not put anything on the seat
seatback.
which insulates against heat,
To remove: such as a blanket, cushion, or
While pressing the release button, pull out similar items. This may cause the
the head restraint. seat heater to overheat.
To install: . When the seat is warmed enough
Install the head restraint into the holes that or before you leave the vehicle,
are located on the top of the seatback until be sure to turn off the seat heater.
the head restraint locks. Press and hold
the release button to lower the head
restraint.
NOTE & Operation To turn on the seat heater, push the “LO” or
1
S01AB04 “HI” position on the switch, as desired,
Use of the seat heater for a long period depending on the temperature.
of time while the engine is not running Selecting the “HI” position will cause the
can cause battery discharge. seat to heat up quicker.
To turn off the seat heater, lightly press the
opposite side of the current position.
The indicator located on the switch illumi-
nates when the seat heater is in operation.
1) HI – Rapid heating
2) LO – Normal heating
3) Off
A) Left-hand side
B) Right-hand side
passenger when any of the SRS frontal, times. cannot be properly positioned, a child
side and curtain airbags deploy. restraint system should be used. Never
1
NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT IN
THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS place the shoulder belt under the child’s
! Infants or small children
S01AE0101
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO arm or behind the child’s back.
Use a child restraint system that is suitable
for your vehicle. Refer to “Child restraint THE CHILD BY PLACING THE ! Expectant mothers
S01AE0103
systems” F1-25. CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
! Children
S01AE0102 According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
WARNING restrained in the rear seating posi-
Place children in the rear seat prop- tions than in the front seating posi-
erly restrained at all times. The SRS tions. For instructions and precau-
airbag deploys with considerable tions concerning the child restraint
speed and force and can injure or system, refer to “Child restraint
even kill children, especially if they systems” F1-25.
are not restrained or improperly
restrained. Because children are If a child is too big for a child restraint
lighter and weaker than adults, their system, the child should sit in the rear seat
risk of being injured from deploy- and be restrained using the seatbelts. Expectant mothers also need to use the
ment is greater. For that reason, we According to accident statistics, children seatbelts. They should consult their doctor
strongly recommend that ALL chil- are safer when properly restrained in the for specific recommendations. The lap belt
dren (including those in child seats rear seating positions than in the front should be worn securely and as low as
and those that have outgrown child seating positions. Never allow a child to possible over the hips, not over the waist.
restraint devices) sit in the REAR stand up or kneel on the seat.
seat properly restrained at all times If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses
in a child restraint device or in a the face or neck, move the child closer to
seatbelt, whichever is appropriate the belt buckle to help provide a good
for the child’s height and weight. shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to
Secure ALL types of child restraint securely place the lap belt as low as
devices (including forward facing possible on the hips and not on the child’s
child seats) in the REAR seats at all waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt
– CONTINUED –
& Emergency Locking Retrac- the rear seats by the use of the seatbelt, 2. Sit well back in the seat.
tor (ELR) the seatbelt must be changed over to the 3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
S01AE02 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode. belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.
The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency
Locking Retractor (ELR). When the child restraint system is re- . If the belt stops before reaching the
moved, make sure that the seatbelt re- buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it
The emergency locking retractor allows
tracts fully and the retractor returned to the out more slowly.
normal body movement but the retractor
locks automatically during a sudden stop, Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) . If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let
impact or if you pull the belt very quickly mode. the belt retract slightly after giving it a
out of the retractor. For instructions on how to convert the strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
retractor to the ALR mode and restore it to
& Automatic Locking Retractor/ the ELR mode, refer to “Installing child
Emergency Locking Retrac- restraint systems with ALR/ELR seatbelt”
tor (ALR/ELR) F1-30.
S01AE03
Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto- & Seatbelt warning light
matic Locking Retractor/Emergency Lock-
ing Retractor (ALR/ELR). The Automatic and chime S01AE04
– CONTINUED –
– CONTINUED –
1. Raise the head restraint to the ex- 3. After drawing out the seatbelt, pass it 4. After confirming that the webbing is not
tended position. Do not remove the head through the belt guide as follows: First twisted, insert the anchor tongue plate
restraint. insert one edge of the belt into the open attached at the webbing end into the
gap in the belt guide; then slide the rest of buckle on the right-hand side until a click
the belt in, so that the whole belt fits inside. sounds.
. If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it
out more slowly.
. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
give it a strong pull and let it retract
slightly, then pull it out slowly again.
5. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate 2. Insert a tongue plate or another hard
into the center seatbelt buckle marked pointed object into the slot in the anchor
“CENTER” on the left-hand side until it buckle on the right-hand side and push it
clicks. in. The anchor tongue plate will then
1) Button disconnect from the buckle.
1. Push the release button of the center
seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to
unfasten the seatbelt.
NOTE
When the seatback is folded down for
greater cargo area, it is necessary to
disconnect the connector.
CAUTION
CAUTION
. Keep the belts free of polishes,
. Do not allow the retractor to roll oils, chemicals and particularly
up the seatbelt too quickly. Other- battery acid.
wise, the metal tongue plates . Never attempt to make modifica-
may hit against the trim, resulting tions or changes that will prevent
in damaged trim. the seatbelt from operating prop-
. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up erly.
so that the tongue plates are
neatly stored. A hanging tongue
plate can swing and hit against
the trim during driving, causing
3. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt. damage to the trim.
You should hold the webbing end and
guide it back into the retractor while it is
rolling up. Insert the tongue plate into the
belt holder.
. Side impact sensor ! In cases of rollover accident, frontal On the front passenger’s side, the
. Front door impact sensor collisions or side collisions, the shoulder belt pretensioner is supplemen-
. Rollover sensor following components will operate ted by a lap belt pretensioner, which is
simultaneously located at the base of the center pillar. Like
If the sensor detects a certain predeter- S01AF0101
For details, refer to “In cases of rollover the shoulder belt pretensioner, the lap belt
mined amount of force during frontal or accident, frontal collisions or side colli- pretensioner instantaneously pulls in the
side collisions or rollover accidents, any sions, the following components will oper- belt to eliminate slack if a certain level of
seatbelt that has a seatbelt pretensioner is ate simultaneously” F1-23. frontal collision force is detected. As a
quickly drawn back in by the retractor to result, the seatbelt restrains the front seat
take up the slack so that the belt more occupant more effectively.
effectively restrains the seat occupant.
& Seatbelt with shoulder belt
The front passenger’s seatbelt preten-
and lap belt pretensioners sioner includes a tension reducing device
S01AF02
The driver’s seatbelt pretensioner includes
a tension reducing device which limits the
NOTE which limits the peak forces exerted by the
peak forces exerted by the seatbelt on the This section is applicable to the front seatbelt on the occupant in the event of a
occupant in the event of a collision. passenger’s side seatbelt. collision.
The adaptive force limiter will select a
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated, reducing load to the suit body size of
an operating noise will be heard and a occupant as detected by the occupant
small amount of smoke will be released. detection sensor.
These occurrences are normal and not
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,
fire in the vehicle. an operating noise will be heard and a
small amount of smoke will be released.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been These occurrences are normal and not
activated, the seatbelt retractor remains harmful. This smoke does not indicate a
locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can not fire in the vehicle.
be pulled out and retracted and therefore
must be replaced. Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been
activated, the seatbelt pretensioner re-
1) Seatbelt retractor assembly (shoulder mains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt
belt pretensioner and adaptive force cannot be pulled out and retracted and
limiter) therefore must be replaced.
2) Lap belt pretensioner
! In cases of rollover accident, frontal collisions or side collisions, the following components will operate simultaneously 1
S01AF0201
Driver’s side Front passen- Front passen- SRS frontal SRS frontal
seatbelt pre- ger’s side ger’s side lap airbag for dri- airbag for front SRS curtain SRS side air-
tensioner shoulder belt belt preten- ver passenger airbags bags
pretensioner sioner
Rollover accidents * * — — — * —
both sides
Frontal collisions * * * * **1 — —
Offset frontal * * * * **1 * —
collisions both sides
*: Activated
—: Not activated
*1: This does not operate if the occupant detection system deactivates airbag operation.
*2: When both the satellite safing sensor and any of the center pillar impact sensors/front door impact sensors sense an impact force.
*3: When both the satellite safing sensor and the driver’s side front door impact sensor sense an impact force.
However, when a center pillar impact sensor detects a signal faster than the front door impact sensor, or both sensors detect signals simultaneously,
the seatbelt pretensioner does not activate.
*4: When both the satellite safing sensor and the front passenger’s side front door impact sensor sense an impact force.
However, when a center pillar impact sensor detects a signal faster than the front door impact sensor, or both sensors detect signals simultaneously,
the seatbelt pretensioner does not activate.
– CONTINUED –
& System monitors the seatbelt pretensioner, con- operate, contact your SUBARU dealer
A diagnostic system continually monitors
S01AF03
sult your nearest SUBARU deal- as soon as possible.
the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner er.
with the ignition switch in the “ON” position. & Precautions against vehicle
The seatbelt pretensioners share the
CAUTION modification
control module with the SRS airbag S01AF05
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you
system. Therefore, if any malfunction The sensors and SRS airbag control want to install any accessory parts to your
occurs in a seatbelt pretensioner, the modules are located in the following vehicle.
SRS airbag system warning light will locations.
illuminate. For details, refer to “SRS airbag CAUTION
system monitors” F1-68. . Front sub sensors: on both the
right and left side at the front of
Do not perform any of the following
the vehicle
& System servicing modifications. Such modifications
S01AF04 . Front door impact sensors: on can interfere with proper operation
WARNING both front doors of the seatbelt pretensioners.
. Satellite safing sensor: under the . Attachment of any equipment
. When discarding a seatbelt re- rear center seat (bush bar, winches, snow plow,
tractor assembly or scrapping . SRS airbag control module (in- skid plate, etc.) other than genu-
the entire vehicle damaged by a cluding the impact sensors): un- ine SUBARU accessory parts to
collision, consult your SUBARU der the center of the instrument the front end.
dealer. panel . Modification of the suspension
. Tampering with or disconnecting If you need service or repair in those system or front end structure.
the system’s wiring could result areas or near the front seatbelt
in accidental activation of the . Installation of a tire of different
retractors, have the work performed size and construction from the
seatbelt pretensioner and/or by your authorized SUBARU dealer.
SRS airbag or could make the tires specified on the vehicle
system inoperative, which may placard attached to the driver’s
result in serious injury. Do not door pillar or specified for indivi-
NOTE dual vehicle models in this Own-
use electrical test equipment on If the front or side part of the vehicle is
any circuit related to the seatbelt er’s Manual.
damaged in an accident to the extent
pretensioner and SRS airbag sys- that the seatbelt pretensioner does not
tems. For required servicing of
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear Seat Reminder (models with combination meter display (color LCD)) 1-25
Rear Seat Reminder (models . This function detects the opening Child restraint systems
and closing of the rear doors. In this
1
with combination meter dis- situation, there is the possibility that
S01AG
– CONTINUED –
& Where to place a child re- Some types of child restraint systems not
straint system be able to be secured firmly due to
S01AG01 projection of the seat cushion.
The following are SUBARU’s recommen-
dations on where to place a child restraint In this seating position, you should use
system in your vehicle. only a child restraint system that has a
bottom base that fits snugly against the
WARNING contours of the seat cushion and can be
securely retained using the seatbelt.
. Several types of child restraint
C: Rear seat, center seating position
systems may conceal the buckle
of the neighboring seat. If the The ALR/ELR seatbelt and an upper
occupant of the neighboring seat anchorage (tether anchorage) are pro-
cannot correctly fasten the seat- vided in this position.
belt, that person must move to a A: Front passenger’s seat Some types of child restraint systems not
different seat. If the seatbelt can- You should not install a child restraint be able to be secured firmly due to
not be correctly fastened, there is system (including a booster seat) due to projection of the seat cushion.
the risk of serious injury or death the hazard to children posed by the In this seating position, you should use
in the event of sudden braking or passenger’s airbag. only a child restraint system that has a
a collision. bottom base that fits snugly against the
B: Rear seat, window-side seating contours of the seat cushion and can be
. If the child restraint system can- positions
not be correctly installed be- securely retained using the seatbelt.
Recommended positions for all types of When you install a child restraint system in
cause it contacts the driver’s
child restraint systems. the rear seat’s center seating position,
seat, move the child restraint
system to a different seat. If it In these positions, the following equipment raise the center head restraint.
cannot be installed in a different is provided for installing a child restraint Lower anchorages (bars) for window-side
seat (other than the driver’s seat), system. seating positions may be used for a seat in
adjust the front seat so that . Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer- the center seating position if a child
contact does not occur. gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat- restraint system manufacturer’s instruc-
belts tions permit and specify using anchors as
. Lower anchorages (bars) far apart as those in this vehicle.
. Upper anchorages (tether anchorages) If a child restraint system is not correctly
fixed in place (for example, if a child
restraint system can be moved more than . Do not use lower anchorages SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SER-
1 inch (2.5 cm) from side to side), you (bars) for a seat in the center IOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
1
should install the child restraint system in a seating position unless a child THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
rear seat, window-side seating position. restraint system manufacturer’s CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
instructions permit and specify THE SRS AIRBAG.
WARNING using anchors spaced as far . Do not allow children to lean their
apart as those in this vehicle. heads or other body parts against
. Even with advanced airbags, chil-
dren can be seriously injured by . Do not connect two or more lower the door of the vehicle, or the
the airbag. Place children in the hooks onto the same anchorage areas around the door. Deploy-
rear seat properly restrained at (bar). ment of the SRS side and curtain
all times. The SRS airbag deploys airbags could impact the child
with considerable speed and resulting in death or serious
force and can injure or even kill injury.
children, especially if they are not . To secure the child restraint sys-
restrained or improperly re- tem, be sure to comply with all
strained. Because children are installation instructions provided
lighter and weaker than adults, by the child restraint manufac-
their risk of being injured from turer. Not doing so could result in
deployment is greater. death or serious injury to chil-
For that reason, be sure to secure dren in a sudden stop or acci-
ALL types of child restraint de- dent.
vices (including forward facing
child seats) in the REAR seats at
all times. You should choose a
restraint device which is appro- WARNING
priate for the child’s age, height
and weight. According to acci- . SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS
dent statistics, children are safer EQUIPPED WITH A PASSEN-
when properly restrained in the GER’S SRS AIRBAG, NEVER IN-
rear seating positions than in the STALL A CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN
front seating positions. THE FRONT PASSENGER’S
– CONTINUED –
CAUTION
When installing a child restraint
system in the rear center seating
position, set both seatbacks to the
original position. Otherwise, the
child restraint system cannot be
securely restrained, which may re-
sult in death or serious injuries in
the event of sudden stop, sudden
steering maneuver or an accident. 1. Move the seatback back and forth to
confirm that it is securely locked into place.
Choose a child restraint system that is ! Installing a rearward facing child – Check that the red colored unlock-
appropriate for the child’s age and size restraint system ing marker which is attached to the
(weight and height) in order to provide the
S01AG0401 bottom of the lock release knob is
child with proper protection. The child WARNING invisible. For details, refer to “Folding
restraint system should meet all applicable down the rear seatback” F1-6.
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle . NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT 2. Place the child restraint system in the
Safety Standards for the United States or IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO rear seating position.
of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR
for Canada. It can be identified by looking DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA- WARNING
for the label on the child restraint system or CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG. When you intend to install a child
the manufacturer’s statement of compli-
restraint system in the rear center
ance in the document attached to the . Before installing a child restraint
seating position, if the child restraint
system. system, be sure to confirm that
system does not fit snugly against
Also it is important for you to make sure the seatback is securely locked
the contours of the rear center seat
that the child restraint system is compa- into place. Otherwise, in an acci-
cushion, install the child restraint
tible with the vehicle in which it will be dent, serious injury or death
system in the window-side seating
used. could result.
! Installing forward facing child re- restraint. For details, refer to “Rear
straint seats” F1-9.
S01AG0402
Store the head restraint in the cargo
WARNING area. Avoid placing the head restraint
in the passenger compartment to pre-
. NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT vent it from being thrown around in the
IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO passenger compartment in a sudden
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR stop or a sharp turn.
DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-
CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO – When a child restraint system is
CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG. installed on the rear center seating
position, raise the rear seat head
. Before installing a child restraint restraint to the extended position. Do
system, be sure to confirm that not remove the head restraint. For
the seatback is securely locked details, refer to “Rear seats” F1-9. 4. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
into place. Otherwise, in an acci- 3. Place the child restraint system in the or around the child restraint system follow-
dent, serious injury or death rear seating position. ing the instructions provided by its manu-
could result. facturer.
WARNING – When a child restraint system is
1. Move the seatback back and forth to installed on the rear center seating
confirm that it is securely locked into place. When you intend to install a child position, pass the rear center seatbelt
– Check that the red colored unlock- restraint system on the rear center through the belt guide properly. For
ing marker which is attached to the seating position, if the child restraint details, refer to “Rear center seatbelt”
bottom of the lock release knob is system does not fit snugly against F1-17.
invisible. For details, refer to “Folding the contours of the rear center seat 5. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
down the rear seatback” F1-6. cushion, install the child restraint until you hear a click.
2. Prepare the rear seat head restraint system on the window-side seating
where a child restraint system is intended position to be safe. For details, refer
to be installed in the following way. to “Where to place a child restraint
system” F1-28.
– When a child restraint system is
installed on the window-side seating
position, remove the rear seat head
6. Take up the slack in the lap belt. 8. Before having a child sit in the child 10. Latch the top tether hook onto the
7. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the restraint system, try to move it back and tether anchorage that is located behind the
retractor to change the retractor over from forth and right and left to check if it is firmly rear seat and tighten the top tether firmly.
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to secured. Sometimes a child restraint For additional instructions, refer to “Top
the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) system can be more firmly secured by tether anchorages” F1-38.
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into pushing it down into the seat cushion and
the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, then tightening the seatbelt.
clicks will be heard which indicate the 9. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
retractor functions as ALR. to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
properly functioning).
press the release button on the seatbelt & Installing a booster seat
buckle and allow the belt to retract S01AG05
plied by the child restraint system manu- & Top tether anchorages
facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the S01AG09
Your vehicle is equipped with three top
lower anchorages located at “ ” marks on tether anchorages so that a child restraint
the bottom of the rear seatback. When the system having a top tether can be installed
hooks are connected, make sure the in the rear seat. When installing a child
adjacent seatbelts are not caught. restraint system using top tether, proceed
as follows, while observing the instructions
by the child restraint system manufacturer.
Since a top tether can provide additional
stability by offering another connection
between a child restraint system and the
vehicle, we recommend that you use a top
7. Before seating a child in the child tether whenever one is required or avail-
restraint system, try to move it back and able.
forth and right and left to verify that it is held
securely in position.
8. To remove the child restraint system,
follow the reverse procedures of installa-
5. If your child restraint system is a tion.
flexible attachment type, (which uses
tether belts). If you have any question concerning this
type of child restraint system, ask your
Push the child restraint into the seat
SUBARU dealer.
cushion and pull both left and right lower
tether belts up to secure the child restraint
system by taking up the slack in the belt.
6. Latch the top tether hook onto the
tether anchorage that is located behind the
rear seat and tighten the top tether firmly.
For additional instructions, refer to “Top
tether anchorages” F1-38.
CAUTION
. Except for the center seating
position, remove the head re-
straint when mounting a child
restraint system. Otherwise, it
might be possible that the top
tether cannot be fastened tightly.
. For the center seating position,
raise the center head restraint to
the extended position when
mounting a child restraint sys- 1. Attach the top tether hook to the
tem. Otherwise, it will be impos- appropriate upper anchorage.
sible to use the seatbelt guide
For the center seating position, route
that is attached to the head
the top tether under the head restraint as
restraint correctly.
illustrated below.
The seatbelt guide is essential for
routing the belt webbing at the
center seating position. For in-
formation about using the seat-
belt guide, refer to “Rear center
seatbelt” F1-17.
1-40 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-41
help avoid injuries that can result as possible and sit upright and well sit or lean close to the front or 1
when an occupant is not seated back in the seat. rear door on either side. Do not
in a proper upright position. put body parts out of the window.
The SRS curtain airbags on both
sides of the cabin are stored in
the roof side (between the front
pillar and a point behind the rear
quarter glass), and they provide
protection by deploying rapidly
in the event of a side impact,
rollover or an offset frontal colli-
sion. However, the force of its
deployment can injure an occu-
pant whose body is too close to
an SRS airbag.
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the SRS airbag. Because
WARNING the SRS airbag deploys with
WARNING considerable speed and force to
. Do not sit or lean close to either
The SRS airbags deploy with con- front door. The SRS side airbags protect in high speed collisions,
siderable speed and force. Occu- are stored in both front seat the force of an airbag can injure
pants who are not seated in proper seatbacks next to the door, and an occupant whose body is too
upright position when the SRS air- they provide protection by de- close to the SRS airbag.
bag deploys could suffer serious ploying rapidly in the event of a It is also important to wear seat-
injury. Because the SRS airbag side impact. However, the force belt to help avoid injuries that can
needs enough space for deploy- of SRS side airbag deployment result when the SRS airbag con-
ment, the driver should always sit can injure an occupant whose tacts an occupant not in their
upright and back in the seat as far body is too close to an SRS proper position.
from the steering wheel as practical airbag. Even when properly positioned,
while still maintaining full vehicle . Since your vehicle is equipped there remains a possibility that
control, and the front passenger with SRS curtain airbags, do not an occupant may suffer minor
should move the seat as far back injury, such as abrasions and
– CONTINUED –
1-42 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
NOTE
WARNING . When you sell your vehicle, we urge
. Keep arms away from either front you to inform the buyer that the vehicle
door or its internal trim. They is equipped with SRS airbags. Also,
could be injured in the event of notify the buyer of the applicable sec-
SRS side airbag deployment. tion in this Owner’s Manual.
. If the SRS airbag deploys, fuel
. Do not place any objects over or supply will be cut off to reduce the risk
near the SRS airbag cover or of fire caused by leaking fuel. For
between you and the SRS airbag. details about restarting of the engine,
If the SRS airbag deploys, these refer to “If your vehicle is involved in an
objects could interfere with its accident” F9-20.
proper operation and could be
propelled inside the vehicle,
causing injury.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-43
WARNING 1
. Do not put any objects (including
straps or cords) over the steering
wheel pad, column cover, or
dashboard.
– These objects could be en-
tangled with the steering
wheel, preventing the SRS
frontal airbag, etc. from oper-
ating properly.
– If the SRS frontal airbag de-
ploys, these objects could be
propelled inside the vehicle, WARNING WARNING
causing injury.
Do not attach accessories to the . Do not attach accessories to the
. Do not put any objects under the
windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir- door trim or near either SRS side
driver’s side of the instrument
ror over the inside rear view mirror. If airbags and do not place objects
panel. If the SRS knee airbag
the SRS airbag deploys, those ob- near the SRS side airbags. In the
deploys, those objects could in-
jects could become projectiles that event of SRS side airbag deploy-
terfere with its proper operation
could seriously injure vehicle occu- ment, they could be propelled
and could be propelled inside the
pants. dangerously toward the vehicle’s
vehicle, causing injury.
occupants and cause injuries.
. The key must not be attached to
. Do not attach a hands-free micro-
heavy, sharp or hard acces-
phone or any other accessory to
sories, or another key. If the SRS
a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear
knee airbag deploys, those ob-
pillar, the windshield, a side win-
jects could interfere with its
dow, an assist grip, or any other
proper operation and could be
cabin surface that would be near
propelled inside the vehicle and
a deploying SRS curtain airbag. A
cause injury.
hands-free microphone or other
– CONTINUED –
1-44 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
accessory in such a location tain airbags. . Do not install a seat cover unless
could be propelled through the Before hanging clothing on the coat it is a genuine SUBARU seat
cabin with great force by the hooks, make sure there are no sharp cover exclusively designed for
curtain airbag, or it could prevent objects in the pockets. Hang cloth- use with the SRS airbag. Even
correct deployment of the curtain ing directly on the coat hooks with- when using a genuine SUBARU
airbag. In either case, the result out using hangers. seat cover, the SRS side airbag
could be serious injuries. system may not function nor-
mally if the seat cover is not
installed correctly.
WARNING
WARNING
. Do not put any kind of clothes or
Do not hang coat hangers or other other objects over either front
hard or pointed objects on the coat seatback and do not attach labels
hooks. If such items were hanging or stickers to the front seat sur-
on the coat hooks during deploy- face on or near the SRS side
ment of the SRS curtain airbags, airbag. They could prevent prop-
they could cause serious injuries by er deployment of the SRS side WARNING
coming off the coat hooks and being airbag, reducing protection avail-
thrown through the cabin or by Place children in the rear seat prop-
able to the front seat’s occupant. erly restrained at all times. The SRS
preventing deployment of the cur-
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-45
– CONTINUED –
1-46 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
WARNING
. Never allow a child to do the
following.
– Kneel on any passenger’s seat
facing the side window.
– Wrap his/her arms around the
front seat seatback.
– Put his/her head, arms or
other parts of the body out of
the window.
In the event of an accident, the
force of SRS side airbag and/or
WARNING
SRS curtain airbag deployment
Never hold a child on your lap or in could injure the child seriously
your arms. The SRS airbag deploys because his/her head, arms or
with considerable force and can other parts of the body are too
injure or even kill the child. close to the SRS side airbag and/
or SRS curtain airbag.
. Since your vehicle is also
equipped with a front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag, children
should be placed in the rear seat
anyway and should be properly
restrained at all times.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-47
– CONTINUED –
1-48 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
1) Airbag control module (including impact 6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)
sensor and rollover sensor) 7) Side airbag module (front passenger’s
2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side) side)
3) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s 8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand
side) side)
4) Front sub sensor (left-hand side) 9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-
5) Front sub sensor (right-hand side) hand side)
10) Airbag wiring
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-49
& SUBARU advanced frontal ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag at- of impact.
1
airbag system tached to the glove box lid beginning with
S01AH02 the phrase “Even with Advanced Air
Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read
advanced frontal airbag system that com- the instructions on the warning labels and
plies with the new advanced frontal airbag tag.
requirements in the amended Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU
No. 208. advanced frontal airbag system is a
supplemental restraint system and must
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag be used in combination with a seatbelt. All
system automatically determines the de- occupants should wear a seatbelt or be
ployment force of the driver’s SRS frontal seated in an appropriate child restraint
airbag at the time of deployment as well as system.
whether or not to activate the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if For the locations of the SRS airbags, refer
to “Components” F1-47. SRS airbag system warning light
activated, the deployment force of the SRS
frontal airbag at the time of deployment. Have the system inspected by your
In a moderate to severe frontal collision,
SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS
the following components deploy.
airbag system warning light illuminates.
. SRS frontal airbag for driver
. SRS frontal airbag for front passenger NOTE
. SRS knee airbag for driver The driver’s SRS side airbag and SRS
. SRS curtain airbag*1 curtain airbag are not controlled by the
*1: When an offset frontal collision that is severe SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys-
enough to deploy the front airbag occurs. tem.
1-50 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
! Front passenger’s SRS frontal air- airbag deploys. This is normal. In this seat.
bag case, although the front passenger’s SRS . Do not place anything (shoes,
S01AH0202
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag frontal airbag does not operate, the front umbrella, etc.) under the front
uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator passenger’s seatbelt pretensioner oper- passenger’s seat.
operates in different ways depending on ates with the driver’s seatbelt preten-
sioner. For details about the seatbelt . Do not place any objects (books,
the severity of impact. etc.) around the front passen-
pretensioner, refer to “Seatbelt preten-
sioners” F1-21. ger’s seat.
. Do not use the front passenger’s
CAUTION seat with the head restraint re-
moved.
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the . Do not leave any articles on the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag front passenger’s seat or the
system from functioning correctly seatbelt tongue and buckle en-
or cause the system to fail. gaged when you leave your vehi-
cle.
. Do not apply any strong impact to
the front passenger’s seat such . Do not put sharp object(s) on the
as by kicking. seat or pierce the seat uphols-
tery.
1) Occupant detection sensors . Do not let rear passengers rest
their feet between the front seat- . Do not place a magnet near the
The occupant detection system sensors back and seat cushion. seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt
are installed between the seat and seat retractor.
. Do not spill liquid on the front
rails, and monitor the physique and pos- . Do not use front seats with their
passenger’s seat. If liquid is
ture of the front passenger. Using this forward-backward position and
spilled, wipe it off immediately.
information, the occupant detection sys- seatback not being locked into
tem determines whether the front passen- . Do not remove or disassemble place securely. If any of them are
ger’s SRS frontal airbag should be de- the front passenger’s seat. not locked securely, adjust them
ployed or not. . Do not install any accessory again. For adjusting procedure,
(such as an audio amplifier) other refer to “Forward and backward
The occupant detection system may not
than a genuine SUBARU acces- adjustment” F1-5 and “Reclining
inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal
sory under the front passenger’s the seatback” F1-5.
airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-51
1-52 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
CAUTION
Electrical devices, such as cell
phones, laptops, portable music
players, or electronic games, espe-
cially when connected to the acces-
sory power outlet and placed on the
front passenger’s seat or used by
the person sitting in the front pas-
senger’s seat, may affect the opera- SRS airbag system warning light : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
tion of the occupant detection sys- indicator
If the front passenger’s seat cushion is
tem. If either of the following situa- : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
wet, this may adversely affect the ability of indicator
tions occurs when using an electro-
the system to determine deployment.
nic device in the vehicle, at first try If the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
Wipe off liquid from the seat, let the seat
to relocate that device to avoid it and OFF indicators do not work properly
dry naturally and then check the SRS
creating any interference. even when the front passenger’s seat is
airbag system warning light.
. The SRS airbag system warning dry, do not allow anyone to sit on the front
light illuminates. passenger’s seat and have the occupant
. The front passenger’s frontal air- detection system checked by your
bag ON and OFF indicators oper- SUBARU dealer.
ate erratically.
If the device continues to cause
interference, the use of that device
in the vehicle should be discontin-
ued.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-53
1-54 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-55
! Conditions in which front passen- ! If the passenger’s frontal airbag 3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
OFF indicator illuminates and the position.
1
ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated
S01AH0205
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag ON indicator turns off even when
the front passenger’s seat is If the OFF indicator remains illuminated
will be activated for deployment upon while the ON indicator remains off, take the
impact when any of the following condi- occupied by an adult
S01AH020501 following actions.
tions are met regarding the front passen- 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
ger’s seat. “OFF” position.
. When the seat is occupied by an adult. 2. Make sure that the front passenger
. When certain items (e.g. jug of water) does not use a blanket, seat cushion, seat
are placed on the seat. cover, seat heater or massager, etc.
3. If wearing excessive layers of clothing,
the front passenger should remove any
unnecessary items before sitting in the
front passenger’s seat, or should sit in a
rear seat.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and wait 6 seconds to allow the
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON system to complete self-checking. Follow-
indicator ing the system check, both indicators turn
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON indicator
indicator should illuminate while the OFF indicator
This can be caused by the adult incorrectly remains off.
sitting in the front passenger’s seat.
If the OFF indicator still remains illumi-
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/ nated while the ON indicator remains off,
“OFF” position. ask the occupant to move to the rear seat
2. Ask the front passenger to set the and immediately contact your SUBARU
seatback to the upright position, sit up dealer for an inspection.
straight in the center of the seat cushion,
correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/
her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to
the rearmost position.
– CONTINUED –
1-56 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-57
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS CAUTION would not protect the occupant in those
frontal airbags use dual stage inflators. situations.
1
The two inflators of each airbag are Do not touch the SRS airbag system
triggered either sequentially or simulta- SRS airbag deployment depends on the
components around the steering
neously, depending on the severity of level of force experienced in the passen-
wheel and dashboard with bare
impact, in the case of the driver’s SRS ger compartment during a collision. That
hands right after deployment. Doing
frontal airbag and depending on the level differs from one type of collision to
so can cause burns because the
severity of impact and the characteristic another, and it may have no bearing on the
components can be very hot as a
of item(s) or person on the seat in the case visible damage done to the vehicle itself.
result of deployment.
of the front passenger’s SRS frontal air- ! Example of accident in which the
bag. driver’s/driver’s and front pas-
! Example of the type of accident
! After deployment S01AH0211 senger’s SRS frontal airbag(s)
S01AH0210 The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
After deployment, the SRS airbag imme- will most likely deploy
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de- S01AH021101
diately starts to deflate so that the driver’s signed as follows.
vision is not obstructed and the driver’s . To deploy in the event of an accident
ability to maintain control of the vehicle is involving a moderate to severe frontal
not impaired. The time required from collision
detecting impact to the deflation of the . To function on a one-time-only basis
SRS airbag after deployment is shorter
than the blink of an eye. The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are not
airbag deploys and the driver’s and front designed as follows.
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy, . To deploy in most lesser frontal im-
the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt pacts*1
pretensioners operate at the same time. . To deploy in most side or rear impacts
or in most rollover accidents*2
When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, A head-on collision against a thick con-
*1: Because the necessary protection can be
fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19
achieved by the seatbelt alone. mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates
some smoke will be released. These
occurrences are a normal result of the *2: Because deployment of only the driver’s only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
deployment. This smoke does not indicate SRS frontal airbag or both the driver’s and driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
a fire in the vehicle. front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-
– CONTINUED –
1-58 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
vated when the vehicle is exposed to a ! Examples of the types of acci- Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
frontal impact similar in fashion and dents in which it is possible that driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
magnitude to the collision described the driver’s/driver’s and front airbags may be activated when the vehicle
above. passenger’s SRS frontal sustains a hard impact in the undercar-
airbag(s) will deploy riage area from the road surface (such as
S01AH021102 when the vehicle plunges into a deep ditch,
is severely impacted or knocked hard
against an obstacle on the road such as
a curb).
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-59
1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a
! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/ telephone pole or sign pole. 1
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur 2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of a
truck.
S01AH021103
3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset
frontal impact.
4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal
collision.
5) The vehicle strikes an object that can
move or deform, such as a parked
vehicle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require deployment
of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of
accidents like those illustrated, the dri-
ver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend-
ing on the level of accident forces involved.
– CONTINUED –
1-60 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
! Examples of the types of acci- frontal airbags are not designed to deploy once either or both of the driver’s and front
dents in which the driver’s/dri- in most of the following cases. passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are
ver’s and front passenger’s SRS . If the vehicle is struck from the side or activated on the first impact, it/they will
frontal airbag(s) are not de- from behind. not be activated on the second impact.
signed to deploy in most cases . If the vehicle rolls onto its side or roof. & SRS side airbag and SRS
S01AH021104
. If the vehicle is involved in a low-speed curtain airbag
frontal collision. S01AH03
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-61
– CONTINUED –
1-62 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
! In cases of rollover accident or side collisions, the following components will operate simultaneously
S01AH0306
*: Activated
—: Not activated
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-63
! After deployment After deployment, do not touch any experienced in the passenger compart-
S01AH0304
part of the SRS curtain airbag sys- ment during a side impact collision. That
1
After the deployment, the SRS side airbag
immediately starts to deflate. The time tem (from the front pillar to the part level differs from one type of collision to
required from detection of an impact to of the roof side over the rear seat). another, and it may have no bearing on the
deflation of an SRS side airbag after Doing so can cause burns because visible damage done to the vehicle itself.
deployment is shorter than the blink of an the components can be very hot as a
! Example of the type of accident in
eye. result of deployment.
which the SRS side airbag will
The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated most likely deploy
! Example of the type of accident S01AH030501
for a while following deployment then S01AH0305
slowly deflates. The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag are designed as follows:
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain . To deploy in the event of an accident
airbag deploy even when no one occupies involving a moderate to severe side impact
the seat on the side on which an impact is collision
applied. . To function on a one-time-only basis.
When the SRS side airbag and SRS The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud airbag are not designed to deploy in the
inflation noise will be heard and some following cases:
smoke will be released. These occur-
rences are a normal result of the deploy- . In most lesser side impact
ment. This smoke does not indicate a fire . In most frontal or most rear impacts
in the vehicle. (because the SRS side airbag and SRS 1) A severe side impact near the front seat.
curtain airbag deployment would not pro-
CAUTION tect the occupant in those situations)
Do not touch the SRS side airbag The SRS curtain airbags are also de-
system components around the signed to deploy when the vehicle is in an
front seat seatback with bare hands extremely inclined state such as during a
right after deployment. Doing so can rollover. They are not designed to deploy in
cause burns because the compo- most lesser inclined state.
nents can be very hot as a result of SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
deployment. deployment depend on the level of force
– CONTINUED –
1-64 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-65
1) Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS side surface 1
airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy 2) Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
S01AH030503
3) Landing hard or vehicle falling
It is possible that the SRS side and curtain
airbags will deploy if a serious impact
occurs to the underside of your vehicle.
Some examples are shown in the illustra-
tion.
– CONTINUED –
1-66 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-67
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is unlikely on impact. 1
to deploy 2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
S01AH030505
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS curtain
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.
– CONTINUED –
1-68 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
! Examples of the types of acci- ary). same direction, once the SRS side airbag
2) The vehicle is struck from behind. and SRS curtain airbag are activated on
dents in which the SRS side
3) The vehicle pitches end over end. the first impact, they will not be activated
airbag and SRS curtain airbag
are not designed to deploy in In the event of accidents like those on the second.
most cases illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS
S01AH030506
curtain airbag are not designed to deploy & SRS airbag system monitors
S01AH04
in most cases.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-69
The following components are monitored WARNING & SRS airbag system servicing 1
by the indicator: S01AH05
1-70 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
. Under the center of the instru- NOTE & Precautions against vehicle
ment panel
In the following cases, contact your
modification
S01AH06
. On both the right and left sides at SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
the front of the vehicle
. The front part of the vehicle was WARNING
. Steering wheel and column and involved in an accident in which only To avoid accidental activation of the
nearby areas the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both system or rendering the system
. Bottom of the steering column driver’s and front passenger’s SRS inoperative, which may result in
and nearby areas frontal airbags did not deploy. serious injury, no modifications
. Top of the dashboard on front . The pad of the steering wheel, the should be made to any components
passenger’s side and nearby cover over the front passenger’s SRS or wiring of the SRS airbag system.
areas frontal airbag, or either roof side (from
the front pillar to a point over the rear This includes following modifica-
. Each front seat and nearby area seat) is scratched, cracked, or other- tions.
. Inside each center pillar wise damaged. . Installation of custom steering
. Inside each front door . The center pillar, front door, rear wheels
wheel house or rear sub frame, or an . Attachment of additional trim ma-
. In each roof side (from the front
area near these parts, was involved in terials to the dashboard
pillar to a point over the rear seat)
an accident in which the SRS side
. Between the rear seat cushion . Installation of custom seats
airbag and SRS curtain airbag did not
and rear wheel house on each deploy. . Replacement of seat fabric or
side . The fabric or leather of either front leather
. Under the rear center seat seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise . Installation of additional fabric or
damaged. leather on the front seat
In the event that the SRS airbag is . The rear part of the vehicle was . Attachment of a hands-free mi-
deployed, replacement of the system involved in an accident in which no crophone or any other accessory
should be performed only by an author- SRS airbag was deployed. to a front pillar, a center pillar, a
ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo- rear pillar, the windshield, a side
nents of the SRS airbag system are window, an assist grip, or any
replaced, use only genuine SUBARU other cabin surface that would be
parts. near a deploying SRS curtain
airbag.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-71
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
push-button start system”, refer to detailed information, refer to “Remote The following access key fobs are pro-
“Keyless access with push-button start keyless entry system” F2-17. vided with the vehicle.
system” F2-2.
The following keys are provided with the CAUTION
vehicle.
Do not attach a large key holder or
key case to either key. If it bangs
against your knees while you are
driving, it could turn the ignition
switch from the “ON” position to
the “ACC” or “LOCK” position,
thereby stopping the engine.
may damage the battery or the operation of the airplane. and power transmission lines
cause circuit malfunctions. When carrying the access key – When products that transmit
– Do not wash the access key fob in a bag, take measures to radio waves are used, such as an
prevent the buttons from being access key fob or a remote trans- 2
fob in an ultrasonic washer.
pressed accidentally. mitter key of another vehicle
– Do not leave the access key
– When carrying the access key fob
fob in humid or dusty loca-
of your vehicle together with the
tions. Doing so may cause NOTE access key fob or the remote trans-
malfunctions. . The operational/non-operational mitter of another vehicle
– Keep the access key fob away setting for the keyless access function – When the access key fob is
from magnetic sources. can be changed. For the setting proce- placed near wireless communica-
– Do not leave the access key dure, refer to “Disabling keyless ac- tion equipment such as a cell phone
fob near a personal computer cess function” F2-12. – When the access key fob is
or home electrical appliance. . For detailed information about the placed near a metallic object
operation method for the push-button – When metallic accessories are
– Do not leave the access key
ignition switch while the keyless ac- attached to the access key fob
fob near a battery charger or
cess function is switched to the non-
any electrical accessories. – When carrying the access key fob
operational mode, refer to “Access key
– Do not apply metallic window with electronic appliances such as a
fob – if access key fob does not operate
tint or attach metallic objects laptop computer
properly” F9-17.
to the windows. . The keyless access with push-but- – When the battery of the access
ton start system uses weak radio key fob is discharged
– Do not fit non genuine acces-
sories or parts. waves. The status of the access key . The access key fob is always com-
fob and environmental conditions may municating with the vehicle and is
. If the access key fob is dropped, continuously using the battery.
the integrated emergency key in- interfere with the communication be-
tween the access key fob and the Although the life of the battery varies
side may become loose. Be care- depending on the operating conditions,
ful not to lose the emergency key. vehicle under the following conditions,
and it may not be possible to lock or it is approximately 1 to 2 years. If the
. When traveling in an airplane, do unlock the doors or start the engine. battery becomes fully discharged, re-
not press the button of the ac- – When operating near a facility place it with a new one.
cess key fob. If any button of the where strong radio waves are trans- . If an access key fob is lost, it is
access key fob is pressed, radio mitted, such as a broadcast station recommended that all of the remaining
waves are emitted and may affect access key fobs be reregistered. For
– CONTINUED –
. For a spare access key fob, contact a – Inside the glove box
SUBARU dealer. – Inside the door trim pocket
. Up to 7 access key fobs can be – On the rear seat
registered for one vehicle. – In the cargo area
. Do not leave the access key fob in
the storage spaces inside the vehicle, If you do, the following situations
such as the door pocket, dashboard, may occur.
inside the corner of the cargo area. – The access key fob is mistakenly
Vibrations may damage the key fob or locked inside the vehicle.
turn on the switch, possibly resulting in – A false warning issues although
a lockout. no malfunction actually occurs.
. After the vehicle battery is dis- – No warning issues even when
charged or replaced, initialization of any malfunction occurs. 1) Antennas
the steering lock system may be re- 2) Operating range (approximately 16 to 32
quired to start the engine. In this case, in (40 to 80 cm))
perform the following procedure to & Locking and unlocking by
initialize the steering lock. holding the access key fob
S02AP20
(1) Turn the push-button ignition When the access key fob is carried within
switch to the “OFF” position. For the operating range, the doors and the rear
details, refer to “Switching power gate can be locked/unlocked just by
status” F3-7. touching the door handle.
(2) Open and close the driver’s
door. NOTE
(3) Wait for approximately 10 sec- The vehicle can also be locked/un-
onds. locked with the remote keyless entry
system. For details, refer to “Remote
When the steering is locked, the initi- keyless entry system” F2-17.
alization is completed.
. Do not leave the access key fob in 1) LED indicator
the following places.
When the access key fob is within either of function when the access key fob is . Unlock and lock the rear gate.
the operating ranges of the front doors, the inside the vehicle. However, depending
LED indicator on the access key fob on the status of the access key fob and NOTE
flashes. When the keyless access func- the environmental conditions, the ac- . It is not possible to lock the doors 2
tions are disabled, the LED indicator does cess key fob may be locked inside the and rear gate using the keyless access
not flash unless a button on the access key vehicle. Before locking the vehicle, function when the push-button ignition
fob is pressed. make sure that you have the access switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
key fob. Refer to “Switching power status” F3-
NOTE . When the battery of the access key 7.
. If the access key fob is placed too fob is discharged, or when operating it . If the door handle is gripped with a
close to the vehicle body, the keyless in a location with strong radio waves or gloved hand, the door lock may not be
access functions may not operate noise (e.g., near a radio tower, power released.
properly. If they do not operate prop- plant, broadcast station or an area . If the door lock sensor is touched
erly, repeat the operation from further where wireless equipment is used), or three times or more repeatedly, the
away. while talking on a cell phone, the system will ignore the sensor opera-
. If the access key fob is placed near operating ranges may be reduced, or tion.
the ground or in an elevated location the keyless access function may not . When performing the locking proce-
from the ground, even if it is in the operate. dure too quickly, locking may not have
indicated operating range, the keyless In such a case, perform the procedure been completed. After performing the
access function may not operate prop- described in “Locking and unlocking” locking procedure, it is recommended
erly. F9-18. to pull the REAR door handle to confirm
. When the access key fob is within . The doors may lock or unlock when that the doors have been locked.
the operating range, it is possible for the car is being washed or exposed to a . If any of the doors (or the rear gate)
anyone, even someone who is not significant amount of water that con- are not fully closed, the following will
carrying the access key fob, to operate tacts the door handle while the key fob occur to alert you that the doors (or the
the keyless access function. Note that is still in the operating range. rear gate) are not properly closed.
the keyless access function can be – An electronic chirp sounds five
operated only by the door handle, door ! How to lock and unlock times.
S02AP2002
lock sensor, rear gate opener button or It is possible to perform the following – The hazard warning flashers
rear lock button in the operating range operations when you are carrying the flash five times.
in which the access key fob is detected. access key fob. . It is possible to lock the doors even
. It is not possible to lock the doors . Lock and unlock the doors. when one of the doors is open. After
and rear gate using the keyless access
– CONTINUED –
performing the locking procedure, ! Locking with the door lock sensor ! Locking with the rear lock button
close the opened door or rear gate to S02AP200201 S02AP200202
lock it.
. Within 3 seconds after locking the
doors and the rear gate by using the
keyless access function, it is not pos-
sible to unlock doors and/or the rear
gate by using the keyless access func-
tion.
. When locking, be sure to carry the
access key fob to prevent locking the
access key fob in the vehicle.
. The setting of the hazard warning
flasher operation and the volume of the
audible signal can be changed by your 1) Door lock sensor 1) Rear lock button
SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
dealer for details. Also, for models with Carry the access key fob, close all doors Carry the access key fob, close all doors
the combination meter display (color including the rear gate, and touch the door including the rear gate and press the rear
LCD), the setting of the hazard warning lock sensor on the door handle. All doors lock button. The rear gate and all doors will
flasher operation can be changed by including the rear gate will be locked. Also, be locked. Also, an electronic chirp will
operating the combination meter dis- an electronic chirp will sound once and the sound once and the hazard warning
play (color LCD). For details, refer to hazard warning flashers will flash once. flashers will flash once.
“Keyless Entry System” F3-42.
Carry the access key fob, and grip the 1) Rear gate opener button
following door handle. Carry the access key fob, and press the
. The driver’s door handle: rear gate opener button. Either only the
Either only the driver’s door will unlock, or rear gate will unlock, or all doors will
all doors will unlock. unlock. Also, an electronic chirp will sound
. The front passenger’s door handle: twice and the hazard warning flashers will
All doors and rear gate will be unlocked. flash twice.
– CONTINUED –
& Unlock using PIN Code Ac- ! Preparation for registering a PIN ! Registration for a PIN code
S02AP2102
cess code
S02AP2101
For example, to register “32468” as the
S02AP21
When all doors including the rear gate are 1. Turn off the ignition switch. PIN code, perform the following proce-
locked, you can unlock the doors (includ- 2. Close all doors (including rear gate). dure.
ing rear gate) without a key by pressing the 3. Press and hold the “ ” button on the 1. Press the rear lock button three times.
rear lock button. access key fob. Then all doors (including 2. After a chirp sounds once, press the
rear gate) will be locked. rear lock button twice.
4. Keep the “ ” button pressed, and 3. After a chirp sounds once, press the
press the rear lock button within 5 seconds rear lock button four times.
after step 3. 4. After a chirp (ding) sounds once, press
5. Press and hold the rear lock button for the rear lock button six times.
more than 5 seconds. Confirm a chirp 5. After a chirp (ding) sounds once, press
sound. the rear lock button eight times.
6. Release the “ ” button and rear lock 6. Perform steps 1 to 5 again within
button. approximately 30 seconds after the chirp
7. Press the “ ” button on the access key starts sounding intermittently.
fob while the chirp sounds. 7. All doors will be unlocked and locked.
Then the chirp will stop and the prepara- Then the PIN code will be registered.
1) Rear lock button tion is complete.
NOTE
NOTE NOTE . Press the rear lock button ten times
PIN Code Access will be helpful if the Press the “ ” button within 30 seconds to enter “0”.
key fob is accidentally left in the of step 6 to end the preparation mode . Change the PIN code frequently to
vehicle. It is recommended that a 5- and move on to the registration stage. protect your vehicle from theft.
digit security code (PIN code) be regis- Unless the “ ” button is pressed within . If you have lent your vehicle to
tered. 30 seconds after step 6, the PIN code another person, confirm that the PIN
registration will be canceled. code has not been changed or deleted.
If the PIN code has been changed or
deleted, reregister a new PIN code.
. If you make an error during the
registration procedure, press the “ ”
or “ ” button on the access key fob. ! Unlocking Operate one of the following items to
Then, start over from the procedure S02AP2103
Perform steps 1 to 5 described in “Regis- recover the keyless access function:
described in “Preparation for register- tration for a PIN code”. – Unlock the doors by operating any
ing a PIN code”. procedure other than gripping the front 2
. To protect your vehicle from theft, NOTE passenger’s door handle.
you cannot register a string of the same . You cannot unlock by PIN Code – Lock the doors.
five numbers together, such as Access in the following cases. – Open a door and then close it.
“00000”, nor “12345” as a PIN code. – The access key fob is within the
. Do not register your vehicle license operating ranges. . Case 2: When the access key fob has
plate number or simple numbers such been left in the operating range for 10
– The ignition switch is in the
as “11122” or “12121” as a PIN code. minutes or longer while all doors are
“ACC” or “ON” position.
Doing so will increase the risk of locked.
vehicle theft. . If you make an operation error dur-
. When you try to register “22222”, the ing the unlocking procedure, start over Operate one of the following items to
registered PIN code will be deleted. You with the unlocking procedure after recover the keyless access function:
cannot unlock the doors by PIN Code waiting for 5 seconds or longer. – Unlock the doors by gripping the
Access until a new code is registered. . To protect your vehicle from theft, a door handle.
. After registering a new PIN code, buzzer will sound if incorrect PIN codes – Unlock the doors by pressing the
make sure that you can unlock the are entered five times continuously. If rear gate opener button.
doors using the PIN code. this occurs, you cannot unlock the – Lock the doors by touching the door
. The PIN code cannot be deleted doors by PIN Code Access for 5 lock sensor.
while the keyless access function is minutes. – Lock or unlock the doors by using
disabled by operating the access key the remote keyless entry system.
& Power saving function
fob. S02AP23 – Lock or unlock the doors by using
. Reregister the PIN code in the fol- The keyless access function will be dis- the power door locking switch.
lowing case. abled in the following cases to protect the – Open either of the front doors.
– When you forget the PIN code access key fob battery and the vehicle
– When you want to change the PIN battery.
code . Case 1: When the keyless access
function and the remote keyless entry
system have not been used for 2 weeks
or longer while all doors are locked.
– CONTINUED –
& Power saving function of ac- & Disabling keyless access ! Disabling functions
S02AP0701
cess key fob function
S02AP22 S02AP07 ! By operating the access key fob
This function stops the access key fob S02AP070102
from receiving signals and helps minimize WARNING If you have registered a PIN code for PIN
the battery consumption of the access key Code Access, you can disable the keyless
fob. If you wear an implanted pacemaker access function by operating the access
or an implanted defibrillator, per- key fob. For details about registering a PIN
1. Press the “ ” button twice while hold- code, refer to “Preparation for registering a
form the procedure described in
ing the “ ” button. PIN code” F2-10.
“By operating the driver’s door”
F2-13 to disable the keyless access 1. Open the driver’s door.
function. If you perform the proce- 2. Rotate the lock lever toward the lock
dure described in “By operating the position.
access key fob” F2-12, the opera-
tion of an implanted pacemaker or
implanted defibrillator may be af-
fected by the radio waves from the
transmitter antenna.
! By operating the driver’s door door once. – When disabling by operating the
S02AP070101
8. Within 5 seconds after step 7 is access key fob: A chirp will be
1. Sit in the driver’s seat, and close the heard.
performed, close the door.
door. 2
A chirp sound will be heard, and the & Selecting audible signal op-
functions will be disabled. eration
S02AP12
NOTE Using an electronic chirp, the system will
In steps 4 and 6, press the power door give you an audible signal when the doors
locking switch slowly. If the switch is lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn
pressed quickly, the functions may not the audible signal off. For more details,
be disabled. contact a SUBARU dealer.
& When access key fob does the user’s authority to operate the . Canada-spec. models
not operate properly equipment.
S02AP08
Refer to “Access key fob – if access key
fob does not operate properly” F9-17. NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the
& Replacing battery of access FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
key fob following two conditions: (1) This de-
S02AP09
Refer to “Replacing battery of access key vice may not cause harmful interfer-
fob” F11-46. ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
& Replacing access key fob interference that may cause undesired
Access key fobs can be replaced at
S02AP13 operation.
SUBARU dealers. For more details, con-
tact a SUBARU dealer.
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
– CONTINUED –
CAUTION 2
. Do not expose the remote trans-
mitter to severe shocks, such as
those experienced as a result of
dropping or throwing.
. Do not take the remote transmit-
ter apart except when replacing
the battery.
. Do not get the remote transmitter
Access key fob
wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with
1) Lock/arm button
a cloth immediately.
2) Unlock/disarm button
. When you carry the remote trans- 3) Rear gate unlock button
mitter on an airplane, do not 4) PANIC button
press the button of the remote
transmitter while in the airplane.
When any button of the remote
transmitter is pressed, radio
waves are sent and may affect
the operation of the airplane.
When you carry the remote trans-
mitter in a bag on an airplane,
take measures to prevent the
buttons of the remote transmitter
from being pressed.
– CONTINUED –
tions. The system’s operable distance will & Locking the doors
be shorter in areas near a facility or S02AQ01
Press the lock/arm button to lock all doors
electronic equipment emitting strong radio and rear gate. An electronic chirp will
waves such as a power plant, broadcast sound once and the hazard warning
station, TV tower, or remote controller of flashers will flash once.
home electronic appliances.
If any of the doors (or the rear gate) are not
NOTE fully closed, the following will occur to alert
. For models with “keyless access you that the doors (or the rear gate) are not
with push-button start system”, the properly closed.
remote keyless entry system will not . An electronic chirp sounds five times.
be activated when the push-button . The hazard warning flashers flash five
ignition switch is in any position other times.
Transmitter than the “OFF” position.
1) Lock/arm button . For models without “keyless access When you close the door, it will automati-
2) Unlock/disarm button with push-button start system”, the cally lock and then the following will occur.
3) Rear gate unlock button remote keyless entry system will not . An electronic chirp sounds once.
4) PANIC button be activated when the key is inserted in . The hazard warning flashers flash
The remote keyless entry system has the the ignition switch. once.
following functions. . The hazard warning flashers will
. Locking and unlocking the doors (and flash once or twice when the access & Unlocking the doors
rear gate) key fob/transmitter button is pressed in S02AQ02
button (for unlocking of all of the doors & Sounding a panic alarm
and the rear gate) is extremely short, S02AQ08
To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC”
the system may not respond. button once. 2
The horn will sound and the hazard
& Unlocking the rear gate warning flashers will flash.
S02AQ05
Press the rear gate unlock button to unlock To deactivate the panic alarm, press any
the rear gate. button on the remote transmitter. Unless a
An electronic chirp will sound twice and the button on the remote transmitter is
hazard warning flashers will flash twice. pressed, the alarm will be deactivated
after approximately 30 seconds.
& Vehicle finder function
Use this function to find your vehicle
S02AQ07 & Setting audible signal opera-
parked among many vehicles in a large tion (models without “keyless 2. Hold down “ ” of the power door
parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet access with push-button start locking switch.
(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the system”) 3. While holding down “ ” of the power
S02AQ09
lock/arm button three times in a 5-second Using an electronic chirp, the system will door locking switch, pull the key out and re-
period will cause your vehicle’s horn to give you an audible signal when the doors insert it into the ignition switch at least 6
sound once and its hazard warning lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn times within 10 seconds after Step 2.
flashers to flash three times. the audible signal off. 4. Open and close the driver’s door once
within 10 seconds after Step 3.
NOTE Perform the following steps to deactivate
the audible signal. You can also use the 5. The hazard warning flashers flash 3
If the interval between presses is too
same steps to restore the function. times to indicate completion of the setting.
short when you press the lock/arm
button three times, the system may 1. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all Your SUBARU dealer can perform the
not respond to the signals from the doors and the rear gate. above procedure for you. Also, for models
remote transmitter. with a combination meter display (color
LCD), the setting can be changed using
the display. For details, refer to “Vehicle
Setting” F3-42.
– CONTINUED –
! U.S.-spec. models
S02AQ1801
FCC ID: CWTB1G077
FCC ID: CWTD1G141
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
! Mexico-spec. models Door locks – Insert the key into the ignition
S02AQ1803
S02AC
switch and turn the ignition switch
& Locking and unlocking from to “ON”.
the outside
2
S02AC01 For details about the alarm system,
NOTE refer to “Alarm system” F2-25.
If you unlock the driver’s door with a ! How to lock and unlock the vehicle
key (including an emergency key) and by using the key
open the door while the alarm system is S02AC0101
armed, the alarm system is triggered
and the vehicle’s horn sounds. In this
case, perform any of the following
operations:
. Models with “keyless access with
IFETEL RLVSUTB15-1814 push-button start system”:
SUBARU – Press any button on the access
MODEL: TB1G077 key fob (except when the access
key fob battery is discharged).
IFETEL RLVSUTD18-0302 – Press the push-button ignition
SUBARU switch to “ACC”.
MODEL: TD1G141 – Carry the access key fob and
perform either of the following pro- 1) Rotate the key toward the front to lock.
cedures. 2) Rotate the key toward the rear to unlock.
– Grip the front door handle. In this case, only the driver’s side door is
– Press the rear gate opener locked.
button.
. Models without “keyless access
NOTE
with push-button start system”: Models with “keyless access with
– Press any button on the remote push-button start system”:
transmitter (except when the trans- The emergency key is directional. If the
mitter battery is discharged). key cannot be inserted, change the
– CONTINUED –
direction that the grooved side is facing ! Locking using power door lock- & Locking and unlocking from
and insert it again. ing switch the inside
S02AC010202 S02AC02
! How to lock the vehicle without ! How to use the lock lever
using the key S02AC0202
S02AC0102
To lock the door from outside without the
key, the following methods are available.
! Locking using lock lever
S02AC010201
seatbelts and child restraints, – When the select lever is shifted into
locking the doors reduces the a position other than the “P” position
chance of being thrown out of (CVT models).
the vehicle in an accident. . For automatic door unlocking 2
It also helps prevent passengers – When the driver’s door is open
from falling out if a door is (factory default setting).
accidentally opened, and intru- – When the ignition switch is turned to
ders from unexpectedly opening the “OFF” position.
doors and entering your vehicle. – When the select lever is shifted into
. Do not pull the front door handle the “P” position (CVT models).
from inside while driving. The NOTE
door could open even if it is
locked. . The automatic door locking/unlock-
Example ing function can be changed by a
1) Press to lock. SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU
! How to operate the power door 2) Press to unlock.
dealer for details. Also, for models with
locking switches a combination meter display (color
S02AC0203
All doors and the rear gate can be locked NOTE LCD), the setting can be changed using
and unlocked using the power door locking Make sure that you do not leave the key the display. For details, refer to “Auto
switches located at the driver’s side and inside the vehicle before locking the Door Lock and Unlock” F3-42.
the front passenger’s side doors. doors from the outside using the power . When locking the door by operating
door locking switches. the power door locking switches, auto-
matic door locking will not operate.
. When unlocking the door by operat-
& Automatic door locking/un- ing the power door locking switches,
locking automatic door unlocking will not oper-
S02AC08
All doors are automatically locked or ate.
unlocked under the following conditions. . When getting out of the vehicle from
. For automatic door locking a rear door, make sure to unlock all the
– When the vehicle speed reaches 12 doors by pushing the unlock side of the
mph (20 km/h) or higher (factory power door locking switch. If a rear
default setting). door is unlocked from the inside door
– CONTINUED –
lever then the door is opened and ! Non-operation of key lock-in pre- Item Switch Automatically turning
closed, the Key lock-in prevention vention function position off
function will be triggered. All doors will S02AC0602
When the system is set so that it does not Ignition Approximately 20
switch light — minutes later
be unlocked, the Key lock-in prevention operate, the doors are locked by the
warning indicator “ ” will appear and following operation. Cargo area Approximately 20
DOOR
the warning chime will also sound. light minutes later
. If the lock lever is turned to the front
(“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door Rear gate Approximately 20
& Key lock-in prevention func- light (if DOOR minutes later
open and the driver’s door is then closed equipped)
tion with the lock lever in that position, the
S02AC06
Under the following conditions, all the driver’s door is locked.
NOTE
doors will not lock when the power door . If the spare key is used to lock the
driver’s door from the outside of the . The default setting for this function
locking switch is pushed with the front door is set as “operational”. The operational/
open. vehicle, the door is locked.
non-operational setting of this function
. The key is still in the ignition switch can be changed by a SUBARU dealer.
(models without “keyless access with & Battery drainage prevention Contact your SUBARU dealer to
push-button start system”). function change the setting.
S02AC03
. The ignition switch is in the “ACC” or If a door or the rear gate is not completely . When leaving the vehicle, please
“ON” position (models with “keyless ac- closed, the interior lights will remain make sure that all doors and the rear
cess with push-button start system”). illuminated as a result. However, several gate are completely closed.
lights are automatically turned off by the . The battery drainage prevention
NOTE battery drainage prevention function to function does not operate while the
. When leaving the vehicle, make sure prevent the battery from discharging. The key is in the ignition switch.
you are holding the key before locking following interior lights are affected by this
the doors. function.
. The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as “operational”. Item Switch Automatically turning
This function’s operational/non-opera- position off
tional setting can be changed by a Map lights DOOR Approximately 20
SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU minutes later
dealer for details. Approximately 20
Dome light DOOR minutes later
Alarm system & Alarm system operation The notifications regarding the map
S02AF When the alarm system is armed, it is
S02AF01 lights, dome light and cargo area light
triggered by opening any of the doors, rear are deactivated as the factory setting. A
The alarm system helps to protect your 2
gate or engine hood. SUBARU dealer can activate the sys-
vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn
tem. Contact your SUBARU dealer for
sounds and the hazard warning flashers The alarm system will activate the follow- details.
flash if someone attempts to break into ing alarms when triggered.
your vehicle. . The vehicle’s horn will sound for 30
seconds. & Arming the system
For models with “keyless access with S02AF04
push-button start system”: . The hazard warning flashers will flash The alarm system becomes armed when
for 30 seconds. the following operation is performed.
The system can be armed or disarmed
with the keyless access function or access 1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if
If any of the doors, rear gate or engine equipped) and turn the ignition switch to
key fob. hood remains open after the 30-second the “OFF” position.
The system will not be activated when the period, the horn will continue to sound for a
push-button ignition switch is in the “ACC” 2. Carry the key and get out of the
maximum of 3 minutes. If the door, rear
or “ON” position. vehicle.
gate or engine hood is closed while the
horn is sounding, the horn will stop 3. Make sure that the engine hood is
For models without “keyless access closed.
with push-button start system”: sounding with a delay of up to 30 seconds.
4. Lock the doors using any of the
The system can be armed or disarmed NOTE following methods.
with the remote transmitter. The alarm system can be set to trigger . Locking using the remote keyless
The system will not be activated when the the illumination of the following interior entry system. For details, refer to
key is inserted into the ignition switch. lights. “Remote keyless entry system” F2-17.
Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set . Map lights (illuminates only when . Locking using the keyless access
for activation at the time of shipment from the door interlock switch is in the function (if equipped). For details, refer
the factory. You can set the system for “DOOR” position) to “Locking with the door lock sensor”
deactivation yourself or have it done by . Dome light (illuminates only when F2-8.
your SUBARU dealer. the dome light switch is in the “DOOR” . Locking using the power door lock-
position) ing switch. For details, refer to “Locking
. Cargo area light (illuminates only using power door locking switch” F2-
when the cargo area light switch is in 22.
the “DOOR” position)
– CONTINUED –
& Alarm system setting To enter the valet mode, change the
S02AF11
NOTE setting of your vehicle’s alarm system for
To change the setting of your vehicle’s You may have the above setting change deactivation mode. Refer to “Alarm system
alarm system for activation or deactiva- done by your SUBARU dealer. setting” F2-27. The security indicator light
tion, do the following. will continue to flash once every 3 seconds
1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to & If you have accidentally trig- indicating that the system is in the valet
“Disarming the system” F2-26. gered the alarm system mode.
S02AF03
2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all ! To stop the alarm
doors, rear gate and engine hood. S02AF0301
To exit valet mode, change the setting of
Do any of the following operations: your vehicle’s alarm system for activation
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
. Press any button on the access key fob/ mode. Refer to “Alarm system setting” F2-
position.
remote transmitter. 27.
4. Hold down “ ” of the driver’s power
door locking switch, open the driver’s door . Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
within the following 1 second, and wait 10 position (models without “keyless access
seconds without releasing the switch. The with push-button start system”).
setting will then be changed as follows. . Turn the push-button ignition to the
“ACC” position (models with “keyless
access with push-button start system”).
& Power window operation . Passenger’s side power window ! Operating the window
S02AH07 switches: S02AH0702
. With one-touch auto up and down
! Power window switches
S02AH0701 feature: 2
. Driver’s side power window switches:
– CONTINUED –
. Without one-touch auto up and down not initialized, the one-touch auto up/ a deep pothole), the anti-entrapment
feature: down function will not operate. Refer to function may operate.
“Initialization of power window with . The window cannot be operated for a
one-touch auto up/down function” few seconds after the anti-entrapment
F2-31. function operates.
! Anti-entrapment function (windows ! Off delay function (windows with
with one-touch auto up/down func- one-touch auto up/down function)
S02AH0705
tion) The windows can be operated for approxi-
S02AH0703
While closing the window automatically, if mately 40 seconds even after the ignition
the window senses a substantial enough switch is turned to the “ACC” or “OFF”
object trapped between the window and position. If a front door is opened within 40
the window frame, it automatically moves seconds, the off delay function is can-
down slightly and stops. celed.
If a foreign object is caught while the ! Locking the passengers’ windows
1) Close window is opening automatically, the S02AH0704
NOTE CAUTION
Avoid the following. . Never attempt to test the power
. Continuously operating a switch in window operation using body
the same direction after the window is parts.
fully closed or fully opened.
. The anti-entrapment function
. Continuously operating three or
may not operate properly if some
more switches all at once in the same
object gets trapped just before
direction after the windows are fully
the window fully closes.
closed or fully opened.
Either of the operations described
above may cause the power window NOTE 1) Lock
breaker to operate making it impossible 2) Unlock
. If a window detects an impact similar
to open or close the window. Be sure to to that caused by trapping an object (for When the lock switch is in the lock position,
initialize the power windows. If they are example, when the vehicle encounters the rear windows cannot be operated by
the driver’s side switches. The passen- Rear gate & Lock/unlock
ger’s side switches and the rear seat side S02AJ
S02AJ02
The rear gate can be locked and unlocked
switches are not operational either. using any of the following systems.
When the indicator on the window WARNING 2
. Power door locking switch: Refer to
switches does not illuminate, the window “How to operate the power door locking
switch cannot be operated. . To prevent dangerous exhaust
gas from entering the vehicle, switches” F2-23.
always keep the rear gate closed . Keyless access with the push-button
& Initialization of power window start system (if equipped): Refer to “Key-
while the engine is running.
with one-touch auto up/down less access with push-button start system”
function . Do not attempt to shut the rear
S02AH06 gate while holding the recessed F2-2.
If the power window automatic function grip. Also avoid closing the rear . Remote keyless entry system: Refer to
(one-touch auto up and down function) gate by pulling on the recessed “Remote keyless entry system” F2-17.
does not operate properly, operate each grip from inside the cargo space. . Automatic door locking/unlocking: Re-
window according to the following proce- There is a danger of your hand fer to “Automatic door locking/unlocking”
dure in order to initialize the power window being caught and injured. F2-23.
system.
1. Close the door. & Open/close
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” NOTE S02AJ03
– CONTINUED –
CAUTION
. Do not sit on the edge of the open
moonroof.
. Do not operate the moonroof if 1) Open
falling snow or extremely cold 2) Close
conditions have caused it to 1) Up
2) Down To open or close the moonroof using the
freeze shut.
automatic function, press and hold the
. The anti-entrapment function To raise the moonroof, press and hold the switch toward the open/close side and
does not operate when the moon- switch in the up side and release. To lower release.
roof is being tilted down. Be sure the moonroof, press and hold the switch in
To stop the moonroof halfway, press a
to confirm that it is safe to do so the down side. switch on the moonroof switch.
before tilting the moonroof down.
NOTE NOTE
. If the moonroof does not close,
Release the switch after the moonroof
have the system checked by a . After washing the vehicle or after it
has been raised or has been lowered
SUBARU dealer. rains, wipe away water on the roof prior
completely. Pressing the switch con-
to opening the moonroof to prevent
tinuously may cause damage to the
The moonroof has both tilting and sliding drops of water from falling into the
moonroof.
functions. passenger compartment.
The moonroof operates only when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
– CONTINUED –
CAUTION
The sunshade can be slid forward or
Never attempt to test this function backward by hand while the moonroof is
using fingers, hands or other parts closed.
of your body. If the moonroof is opened, the sunshade
also moves back.
Cruise control set indicator light (if equipped) ....... 3-31 Multi-function display (black and white)............. 3-43
Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light Driving information display ................................... 3-43
(models with LED headlights).............................. 3-32 Outside temperature indicator............................... 3-48
LED headlight warning light (models with LED X-MODE indicator (if equipped) ............................. 3-48
headlights).......................................................... 3-32 Clock.................................................................... 3-48
Steering Responsive Headlight warning light/ Climate control screen.......................................... 3-49
Steering Responsive Headlight OFF indicator
light (if equipped)................................................ 3-32 Multi-function display (color LCD)
Front fog light indicator light (if equipped) ............ 3-32 (if equipped) ....................................................... 3-49
Headlight indicator light (if equipped).................... 3-32 Features ............................................................... 3-49
Auto Start Stop warning light/Auto Start Stop Welcome screen ................................................... 3-50
OFF indicator light (yellow) (if equipped) ............. 3-32 Self-check screen ................................................. 3-50
Auto Start Stop indicator light (green) Interruption screen ............................................... 3-51
(if equipped) ....................................................... 3-33 Basic operation .................................................... 3-51
Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected indicator Basic screens....................................................... 3-51
light (if equipped)................................................ 3-33 Setting screen ...................................................... 3-58
X-MODE indicator (if equipped) ............................. 3-33 How to get the source code using the open
Hill descent control indicator (if equipped) ............ 3-34 source............................................................... 3-65
BSD/RCTA warning indicator (if equipped)............. 3-34 Clock...................................................................... 3-66
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (if equipped) .................. 3-34 Setting the clock manually.................................... 3-66
RAB warning indicator (if equipped) ...................... 3-34 Setting the clock automatically ............................. 3-67
RAB OFF indicator (if equipped)............................ 3-34 Regulatory information ......................................... 3-68
Icy road surface warning indicator (if equipped) .... 3-34 Light control switch ............................................. 3-68
Combination meter display (color LCD) Precautions and tips............................................. 3-68
(if equipped) ....................................................... 3-35 Headlights ............................................................ 3-69
Basic operation..................................................... 3-36 High/low beam change (dimmer) ........................... 3-71
Welcome screen (opening animation) and Headlight flasher .................................................. 3-71
Good-bye screen (ending animation) ................... 3-36 High beam assist function (if equipped) ................ 3-72
Warning screen..................................................... 3-37 Daytime running light system ............................... 3-74
Telltale screen....................................................... 3-37 Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)
Basic screens ....................................................... 3-38 (if equipped) ....................................................... 3-75
Menu screens ....................................................... 3-41
3-4 Instruments and controls/Ignition switch (models without “keyless access with push-button start system”)
Instruments and controls/Ignition switch (models without “keyless access with push-button start system”) 3-5
3-6 Instruments and controls/Push-button ignition switch (models with “keyless access with push-button start system”)
The light turns off immediately under the Push-button ignition switch cannot be operated.
following conditions. . Even when the access key fob is
(models with “keyless access outside the vehicle, if it is placed too
. The ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
with push-button start sys- close to the glass, it may be possible to
. All doors and the rear gate are locked tem”) switch the power or to start the engine.
using the remote keyless entry transmitter. S03BG . Do not leave the access key fob in
& Safety precautions the following places. It may become
S03BG04
Refer to “Safety precautions” F2-3. impossible to operate the push-button
ignition switch and the engine start. It
& Operating range for push- may also cause a false warning to issue
button start system although no malfunction actually oc-
S03BG01 curs, or not to issue a warning when
any malfunction occurs.
– On the instrument panel
– On the floor
– Inside the glove box
– Inside the door trim pocket
– On the rear seat
– In the cargo area
. When operating the push-button
ignition switch or starting the engine,
if the access key fob battery is dis-
charged, perform the procedure de-
scribed in “Access key fob – if access
1) Antennas key fob does not operate properly” F9-
2) Operating range 17. In such a case, replace the battery
immediately. Refer to “Replacing bat-
NOTE tery of access key fob” F11-46.
. If the access key fob is not detected
within the operating range of the anten-
nas inside the vehicle, the push-button
ignition switch and the engine start
Instruments and controls/Push-button ignition switch (models with “keyless access with push-button start system”) 3-7
& Switching power status illuminates in orange. with oil or other contaminants. It
S03BG02
may cause a malfunction.
Power . If the push-button ignition switch
status Indicator color Operation
does not operate smoothly, stop
Power is turned the operation. Contact a SUBARU
OFF Turned off off. dealer immediately. 3
The following . If the push-button ignition switch
systems can be does not illuminate even when
ACC Orange used:
audio and ac- the instrument panel illumination
cessory power is turned on, have the vehicle
outlet. inspected at a SUBARU dealer.
Orange . If the vehicle was left in the hot
(while engine is sun for a long time, the surface of
stopped) All electrical
1) Operation indicator ON systems can be the push-button ignition switch
Turned off used. may get hot. Be careful not to
2) Push-button ignition switch (while engine is
running) burn yourself.
The power is switched every time the
push-button ignition switch is pressed.
1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the CAUTION NOTE
driver’s seat. . When operating the push-button
. When the push-button ignition ignition switch, firmly press it all the
2. Shift the select lever (CVT models)/the switch is left in “ON” (while the way.
shift lever (MT models) into the “P”/“N” engine is not running) or “ACC” . If the push-button ignition switch is
position. for a long time, it may result in pressed quickly, the power may not
3. Press the push-button ignition switch vehicle battery discharge. turn on or off.
without depressing the brake pedal. Every . Do not spill drinks or other liquids
time the button is pressed, the power is on the push-button ignition
switched in the sequence of “OFF”, “ACC”, switch. It may cause a malfunc-
“ON” and “OFF”. When the engine is tion.
stopped and the push-button ignition
switch is in “ACC” or “ON”, the operation . Do not touch the push-button
indicator on the push-button ignition switch ignition switch with a hand soiled
– CONTINUED –
. If the indicator light on the push- Hazard warning flasher Meters and gauges
button ignition switch flashes in green S03AB S03AD
when the push-button ignition switch is NOTE
pressed, steering is locked. When this
occurs, press the push-button ignition Some of the meters and gauges on the
switch while turning the steering wheel combination meter use liquid-crystal
left and right. displays. You will find their indications
hard to see if you wear polarized
! Battery drainage prevention func- glasses.
tion
S03BG0201
When the push-button ignition switch is left & Speedometer
in the “ACC” or “ON” position for approxi- S03AD03
The speedometer shows the vehicle
mately 1 hour, the push-button ignition
speed.
switch will be automatically switched to
“OFF” to prevent the battery from going
dead. & Tachometer
The hazard warning flasher is used to warn S03AD06
other drivers when you have to park your The tachometer shows the engine speed
& When access key fob does in thousands of revolutions per minute.
not operate properly vehicle under emergency conditions. The
S03BG03 hazard warning flasher works regardless
Refer to “Access key fob – if access key of the position of the ignition switch.
CAUTION
fob does not operate properly” F9-17.
To turn on the hazard warning flasher, Do not operate the engine with the
push the hazard warning flasher switch on pointer of the tachometer in the red
the instrument panel. All the turn signal zone. In this range, fuel injection will
lights and the turn signal indicator lights be cut by the engine control module
will flash. To turn off the flasher, push the to protect the engine from overrev-
switch again. ving. The engine will resume run-
ning normally after the engine speed
NOTE is reduced below the red zone.
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
CAUTION
To ensure safety, do not attempt to
change the function of the indicator
during driving, as an accident could
1) TRIP RESET switch result.
2) Type A combination meter
3) Type B combination meter
1) TRIP RESET switch
2) Type A combination meter
NOTE
This meter displays the odometer when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. 3) Type B combination meter . If the connection between the com-
bination meter and battery is broken for
The odometer shows the total distance This meter displays the two trip meters any reason such as vehicle mainte-
that the vehicle has been driven. when the ignition switch is in the “ON” nance or fuse replacement, the data
position. recorded on the trip meter will be lost.
NOTE The trip meter shows the distance that the . If you press the TRIP RESET switch
If you press the TRIP RESET switch vehicle has been driven since you last set when the ignition switch is in the
when the ignition switch is in the it to zero. “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position, the
“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position, the
The display can be switched as shown in odometer/trip meter will light up. It is
odometer/trip meter will light up.
the following sequence by pressing the possible to switch between the A trip
The indicators will turn off when: meter and B trip meter indications while
. The TRIP RESET switch is not oper- TRIP RESET switch.
the odometer/trip meter is lit up.
ated for approximately 10 seconds. In addition, it is possible to reset the trip
. The driver’s door is opened and then meter by pressing and holding the TRIP
– CONTINUED –
RESET switch. to fuel level movement in the tank. & ECO gauge (if equipped)
S03AD12
The indicators will turn off when:
– The TRIP RESET switch is not NOTE
operated for approximately 10 sec- . You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel
onds. gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler
– The driver’s door is opened and lid is located on the right side of the
then closed. vehicle.
. If you press the TRIP RESET switch
while the ignition switch is in the
& Fuel gauge “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position, the
S03AD07
fuel gauge will light up and indicate the
amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
The indicators will turn off when:
– The TRIP RESET switch is not
operated for approximately 10 sec- 1) Type A combination meter
onds. 2) Type B combination meter
– The driver’s door is opened and
The ECO gauge shows the difference
then closed.
between the current rate of fuel consump-
tion and the average rate of fuel consump-
tion since the trip meter was last reset.
If the ECO gauge moves towards the +
side, this indicates better fuel efficiency.
1) TRIP RESET switch
2) Type A combination meter NOTE
3) Type B combination meter
. The ECO gauge shows only an
The fuel gauge is displayed when the approximate indication of fuel effi-
ignition is in the “ON” position, and it shows ciency.
the approximate amount of fuel remaining . After resetting the trip meter, the
in the tank. average rate of fuel consumption is not
shown until you have driven for 1 mile
The gauge indication may change slightly (or 1 km). Before that time, the ECO
during braking, turning or acceleration due
gauge does not operate. edly until the item you want to change is
NOTE displayed.
. If you switch the units on the combi- 3. Press and hold the TRIP RESET
& Combination meter settings nation meter, the units on the multi-
S03AD16 switch while the item to be changed is
Meter and vehicle settings can be set on function display (black and white) also displayed, the setting of the item will be
the combination meter. switches accordingly. switched. 3
. If either of the following conditions
! Type A combination meter is met, the combination meter setting
S03AD1601
Various adjustments can be made, such ! Type B combination meter
mode will be canceled. S03AD1602
as switching units shown on the combina- – The driver’s door is opened. Meter and vehicle settings can be set on
tion meter and adjusting the warning tone the combination meter display (color
– The TRIP RESET switch is not
volume. LCD). Refer to “Menu screens” F3-41.
operated for approximately 10 sec-
While the ignition switch is in the “OFF” onds or more.
position, each press of TRIP RESET
switch results in items shown in the table ! Switching method
S03AD160101
below being switched. 1. Push the ignition switch in the “OFF”
Combination Possible position.
Item meter display settings
A trip —
B trip —
Gauge
needle On/Off
sweep
function
Changing mile/km
the unit*
Warning Lv. 1/Lv. 2/Lv. 3
volume* 1) TRIP RESET switch
*: If available 2. Press the TRIP RESET switch repeat-
Illumination brightness con- To brighten, turn the control dial upward. Warning and indicator
trol To darken, turn the control dial downward. S03AE
& Initial illumination for system
S03AJ
NOTE check
. When the control dial is turned fully S03AE29
Several of the warning and indicator lights
upward, the illumination brightness
becomes the maximum and the auto- illuminate when the ignition switch is
matic dimming function does not work initially turned to the “ON” position. This
at all. permits checking the operation of the
. The brightness setting is not can- bulbs.
celed even when the ignition switch is Apply the parking brake and turn the
turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position. ignition switch to the “ON” position. For
the system check, several of the following
& Auto dimmer cancel function lights illuminate and then turn off after
(if equipped) several seconds or after the engine has
S03AJ01 started.
When the ambient light is bright, the
The illumination brightness of the instru- illumination brightness is set to the max- : Seatbelt warning light: The seatbelt
ment panel illuminates under the following imum regardless of the position of the warning light turns off only when the
conditions. control dial. In this case, you cannot adjust driver fastens the seatbelt.
For models without “AUTO” position: the illumination brightness by using the : Front passenger’s seatbelt warning
. The light switch is in the “ ” or “ ” control dial. When the ambient light is dark, light: The seatbelt warning light turns
position. you can dim the illumination brightness as off only when the front seat passenger
described above. fastens the seatbelt.
For models with “AUTO” position:
. The light switch is in the “ ” or “ ” The operational/non-operational setting : SRS airbag system warning light
position when the ambient light is dark. and sensitivity of the auto dimmer cancel
function can be changed by your SUBARU : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
. The light control switch is in the “AUTO” indicator
position and the headlights illuminate dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for
automatically. details. : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator
You can adjust the illumination brightness
for better visibility.
– CONTINUED –
! Operation . It is possible to cancel the warning them are not locked securely, adjust them
S03AE0101
If the driver and/or front passenger have/ operation that follows the 6-second again. For adjusting procedure, refer to
has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when warning after turning ON the ignition “Manual seat” F1-5.
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” switch. When the ignition switch is
turned ON next time, however, the If the seatbelt warning device for the front
position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will passenger’s seat does not function cor-
flash for several seconds, to warn that the complete sequence of the warning
operation resumes. For further details rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the
seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the driver’s front passenger’s seat is empty or it is
seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will also about canceling the warning operation,
please contact your SUBARU dealer. deactivated even when the front passen-
sound simultaneously. ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt), take
If there is no passenger on the front the following actions.
NOTE passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning
. Ensure that no article is placed on the
. If the driver’s and/or front passen- device for the front passenger’s seat will
seat other than a child restraint system and
ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened be deactivated. The front passenger’s
its child occupant, although we strongly
6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning seatbelt warning system monitors whether
recommend that all children sit in the rear
device operates as follows according or not there is a passenger on the front
seat properly restrained.
to the vehicle speed. passenger’s seat.
– At speeds lower than approxi- . Ensure that there is no article left in the
Observe the following precautions. Failure
mately 9 mph (15 km/h) seatback pocket.
to do so may prevent the device from
The warning light(s) for unfastened functioning correctly or cause the device to . Ensure that the backward-forward po-
seatbelt(s) will alternate between fail. sition and seatback of front passenger’s
steady illumination and flashing at seat are locked into place securely by
. Do not install any accessory such as a
15-second intervals. The chime will moving the seat back and forth.
table or TV onto the seatback.
not sound. . Do not store a heavy load in the If still the seatbelt warning device for front
– At speeds higher than approxi- seatback pocket. passenger’s seat does not function cor-
mately 9 mph (15 km/h) . Do not allow the rear seat occupant to rectly after taking relevant corrective ac-
The warning light(s) for unfastened place his/her hands or legs on the front tions described above, immediately con-
seatbelt(s) will alternate between passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
flashing and steady illumination at pull the seatback. tion.
15-second intervals and the chime
will sound while the warning light(s) . Do not use front seats with their back-
is/are flashing. ward-forward position and seatback not
being locked into place securely. If any of
& SRS airbag system & Front passenger’s frontal air- airbag determined by the SUBARU ad-
warning light bag ON and OFF indicators vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.
S03AE02
S03AE03 If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
WARNING is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF
If the warning light exhibits any of indicator will remain off. 3
the following conditions, there may If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
be a malfunction in the seatbelt is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag airbag ON indicator will remain off while
system. Immediately take your vehi- the OFF indicator will illuminate.
cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
to have the system checked. Unless position, if both the ON and OFF indicators
checked and properly repaired, the remain illuminated or off simultaneously
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS even after the system check period, the
airbag will not operate properly in system is malfunctioning. Contact your
the event of a collision, which may SUBARU dealer immediately for an in-
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
increase the risk of injury. indicator spection.
. Flashing or flickering of the warn- : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
ing light indicator & CHECK ENGINE warn-
. No illumination of the warning The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON ing light/Malfunction
light when the ignition switch is and OFF indicators show you the status of indicator light S03AE04
first turned to the “ON” position the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
. Continuous illumination of the The indicator is displayed near the map CAUTION
warning light lights.
When the ignition switch is turned to the If the CHECK ENGINE light illumi-
. Illumination of the warning light nates while you are driving, have
while driving “ON” position, both the ON and OFF
indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during your vehicle checked/repaired by
which time the system is checked. Follow- your SUBARU dealer as soon as
For details about the components mon- possible. Continued vehicle opera-
itored by the warning light, refer to “SRS ing the system check, both indicators turn
off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the tion without having the emission
airbag system monitors” F1-68. control system checked and re-
indicators illuminates depending on the
status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal paired as necessary could cause
– CONTINUED –
serious damage, which may not be ized SUBARU dealer immediately. & Engine hood open
covered by your vehicle’s warranty. ! If the light is blinking warning light (if
S03AE0402
If the light is blinking while driving, an equipped) S03AE98
If this light illuminates steadily or blinks
while the engine is running, it may indicate engine misfire condition has been de- The warning light illuminates if the engine
that there is at least one problem or tected which may damage the emission hood is not fully closed. This function is
potential problem somewhere in the emis- control system. effective even if the ignition switch is in the
sion control system. To prevent serious damage to the emis- “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position (all mod-
sion control system, you should do the els) or the key is removed from the ignition
! If the light illuminates steadily following. switch (models without “keyless access
S03AE0401
If the light illuminates steadily while driving . Reduce vehicle speed. with push-button start system”). Always
or does not turn off after the engine starts, . Avoid hard acceleration. make sure this light is not illuminated
an emission control system malfunction . Avoid steep uphill grades. before you start to drive.
has been detected.
. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi-
You should have your vehicle checked by ble. & Coolant temperature
an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi- low indicator light/
. Stop towing a trailer as soon as
ately. Coolant temperature
possible.
NOTE high warning light S03AE48
The CHECK ENGINE warning light may
This light also illuminates when the fuel stop blinking and illuminate steadily after
filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.
CAUTION
several driving trips. You should have your
If you have recently refueled your vehicle, vehicle checked by an authorized . After turning the ignition switch
the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning SUBARU dealer immediately. to the “ON” position, if this
light/malfunction indicator light illuminating indicator light/warning light be-
could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap. haves in any of the following
Remove the cap and retighten it until it ways, the electrical system may
clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering with be malfunctioning. Contact your
the sealing of the cap. Tightening the cap SUBARU dealer immediately for
will not make the CHECK ENGINE warn- an inspection.
ing light turn off immediately. It may take – It remains blinking in RED.
several driving trips. If the light does not
– It remains illuminated in RED
turn off, take your vehicle to your author-
for more than 2 seconds.
– It remains blinking in RED and . Illumination in RED indicates overheat- often blinks in RED, the electrical system
BLUE alternately. ing condition of the engine may be malfunctioning. Contact your
. While driving, if this indicator SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
For a system check, this indicator light/
light/warning light behaves in warning light illuminates in RED for ap- NOTE
any of the following ways, take proximately 2 seconds when the ignition
the specified appropriate mea- If the engine is restarted after a certain 3
switch is turned to the “ON” position. After driving condition, this indicator light/
sure listed below. that, this indicator light/warning light warning light may illuminate in RED.
– Blinking or illuminated in changes to BLUE and maintains illumina- However, this is not a malfunction if the
RED: tion in BLUE. This BLUE illuminated light indicator light/warning light turns off
Safely stop the vehicle as turns off when the engine is warmed up after a short time.
soon as possible, and refer to sufficiently.
the emergency steps to take in
the case of engine overheat- If the engine coolant temperature in- & Charge warning light S03AE05
ing. After that, have the sys- creases over the specified range, the
If this light illuminates when the engine is
tem checked by your nearest indicator light/warning light blinks in RED.
running, it may indicate that the charging
SUBARU dealer. Refer to “En- At this time, the engine is close to over-
system is not working properly.
gine overheating” F9-12. heating.
If the light illuminates while driving or does
– Blinking in RED and BLUE If the engine coolant temperature in-
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
alternately: creases further, the indicator light/warning
engine at the first safe opportunity and
The electrical system may be light illuminates in RED continuously. At
check the alternator belt. If the belt is
malfunctioning. Contact your this time, the engine may be overheating.
loose, broken or if the belt is in good
SUBARU dealer for an inspec- condition but the light remains illuminated,
When the indicator light/warning light
tion. contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
blinks in RED or illuminates in RED, safely
stop the vehicle as soon as possible, and immediately.
This coolant temperature low indicator
refer to the emergency steps to take in the
light/coolant temperature high warning & Oil pressure warning
case of engine overheating. Refer to
light has the following three functions.
. Illumination in BLUE indicates insuffi-
“Engine overheating” F9-12. After that, light S03AE06
have the system checked by your nearest
cient warming up of the engine SUBARU dealer. If this light illuminates when the engine is
. Blinking in RED indicates that the running, it may indicate that the engine oil
engine is close to overheating Also, if the indicator light/warning light pressure is low and the lubricating system
– CONTINUED –
is not working properly. normal range, have the vehicle checked by mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
If the light illuminates while driving or does a SUBARU dealer. and let the engine idle until the warning
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the light turns off.
engine at the first safe opportunity and NOTE
. The oil level will be detected by the ! Transmission control system warn-
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer ing
immediately. system just after turning the ignition S03AE0701
switch to the OFF position. If the oil If the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light flashes
CAUTION level is below the lower limit when the after the engine has started, it may indicate
ignition switch is turned to the ON that the transmission control system is not
Do not operate the engine with the position, the engine low oil level warn- working properly. Contact your nearest
oil pressure warning light illumi- ing light will turn on. SUBARU dealer for service immediately.
nated. This may cause serious en- . When the vehicle is parked on a
gine damage. steep slope, the engine low oil level & Low tire pressure
warning light may not illuminate even if warning light (U.S.-
the oil level is below the lower limit to spec. models) S03AE08
& Engine low oil level avoid erroneous lighting.
warning light When the ignition switch is turned to the
S03AE58
“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn-
This light illuminates when the engine oil & Windshield washer ing light will illuminate for approximately 2
level decreases to the lower limit. fluid warning light S03AE42 seconds to check that the tire pressure
If the warning light illuminates, check the This light illuminates when the fluid level in monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning
engine oil level on a level surface. When the windshield washer fluid tank de- properly. If there is no problem and all tires
the engine oil level is not within the normal creases to the lower limit (approximately are properly inflated, the light will turn off.
range, refill with engine oil. Refer to 0.6 US qt, 0.6 liter, 0.5 Imp qt). Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
“Engine oil” F11-8. After adding or chan- should be checked monthly when cold and
ging the engine oil, warm up the engine & AT OIL TEMP warning inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
and stop it on a level surface, then start the mended by the vehicle manufacturer on
engine after a lapse of 1 minute or more.
light (CVT models) S03AE07
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
Confirm that the warning light has turned If this light illuminates when the engine is sure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
off after the engine has started. If the running, it may indicate that the transmis- different size than the size indicated on the
warning light does not turn off after refilling sion fluid temperature is too hot. vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
the engine oil, or the light illuminates even label, you should determine the proper tire
though the engine oil level is within the If the light illuminates while driving, im-
inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle as the malfunction exists. When the mal- driving straight ahead while gradu-
has been equipped with a tire pressure function indicator is illuminated, the sys- ally reducing speed. Then slowly
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates tem may not be able to detect or signal low pull off the road to a safe place.
a low tire pressure telltale when one or tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc- Otherwise an accident involving
more of your tires is significantly under- tions may occur for a variety of reasons, serious vehicle damage and serious
inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire including the installation of replacement or personal injury could occur. 3
pressure telltale illuminates, you should alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that If this light still illuminates while
stop and check your tires as soon as prevent the TPMS from functioning prop- driving after adjusting the tire pres-
possible, and inflate them to the proper erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction sure, a tire may have significant
pressure. Driving on a significantly under- telltale after replacing one or more tires or damage and a fast leak that causes
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also replacement or alternate tires and wheels a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, allow the TPMS to continue to function as soon as possible.
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and properly.
stopping ability. When a spare tire is mounted or a
Should the warning light illuminate steadily
wheel rim is replaced without the
Please note that the TPMS is not a after blinking for approximately one min-
original pressure sensor/transmitter
substitute for proper tire maintenance, ute, have the system inspected by your
being transferred, the Low tire pres-
and it is the driver’s responsibility to nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as
sure warning light will illuminate
maintain correct tire pressure, even if possible.
steadily after blinking for approxi-
under-inflation has not reached the level
WARNING mately one minute. This indicates
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
the TPMS is unable to monitor all
pressure telltale.
If this light does not illuminate four road wheels. Contact your
Your vehicle has also been equipped with SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
briefly after the ignition switch is
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate for tire and sensor replacement and/
turned ON or the light illuminates
when the system is not operating properly. or system resetting.
steadily after blinking for approxi-
The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
mately one minute, you should have If the light illuminates steadily after
bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- blinking for approximately one min-
When the system detects a malfunction,
tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as ute, promptly contact a SUBARU
the telltale will flash for approximately one
soon as possible. dealer to have the system inspected.
minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue If this light illuminates while driving,
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long never brake suddenly and keep
– CONTINUED –
warning light on is dangerous. SUBARU dealer for repair. seconds, shut down the engine, apply the
This indicates your brake system ! Electronic Brake Force Distribution parking brake and check the brake fluid
may not be working properly. If (EBD) system warning level.
the light remains illuminated, S03AE1003
The EBD system may be malfunctioning if . If the brake fluid level is not below the
have the brakes inspected by a
the brake system warning light / , “MIN” mark, the EBD system may be 3
SUBARU dealer immediately.
Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the
. If at all in doubt about whether the and ABS warning light / illuminate nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
brakes are operating properly, do simultaneously during driving. system inspected.
not drive the vehicle. Have your Even if the EBD system fails, the conven- . If the brake fluid level is below the “MIN”
vehicle towed to the nearest tional braking system will still function. mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. Instead,
SUBARU dealer for repair. However, the rear wheels will be more have the vehicle towed to the nearest
prone to locking when the brakes are SUBARU dealer for repair.
The brake system warning light has the applied harder than usual and the vehicle’s
following functions. ! Vacuum pressure system warning
motion may therefore become somewhat S03AE1006
– CONTINUED –
ately.
NOTE NOTE
. The light does not illuminate when the
If the warning light behavior is as . The light may remain illuminated for ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
described in the following examples, a short period of time after the engine position.
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system has been started, especially in cold
may be considered normal. weather. This does not indicate the . The light does not turn off even once
existence of a problem. The light several seconds have elapsed after the
. The warning light illuminates when ignition switch has been turned to the “ON”
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” should turn off as soon as the engine
has warmed up. position.
position and turns off approximately 2
seconds after the engine has started. . The indicator light illuminates when
the engine has developed a problem & Warning chimes and
. The warning light illuminates right
after the engine is started but turns off and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/ warning indicator of the
immediately, remaining off. malfunction indicator light is on. keyless access with
. The warning light illuminates after The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is push-button start sys-
the engine has started and turns off probably malfunctioning under the follow- tem (if equipped) S03AE55
while the vehicle is subsequently being ing condition. Have your vehicle checked
driven. at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. The warning light illuminates during . The light does not turn off even after the
driving, but it turns off immediately and lapse of several minutes (the engine has
remains off. warmed up) after the engine has started.
. The warning light illuminates when
the engine has stalled and continues to & Vehicle Dynamics Con-
illuminate after the engine has been
restarted. However, it will turn off once
trol OFF indicator light S03AE15
the vehicle starts moving. The light illuminates when the Vehicle
Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed
! Vehicle Dynamics Control operation to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
indicator light trol system.
S03AE1402
The indicator light flashes during activation
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is Access key warning indicator
of the skid suppression function and during
activation of the traction control function. probably malfunctioning under any of the The keyless access with push-button start
following conditions. Have your vehicle system sounds a warning chime and
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi- flashes the access key warning indicator
CAUTION
CAUTION
When any of the following warnings
. When starting the engine again occurs even if the access key warn-
after the operation indicator on ing indicator does not appear, take
the push-button ignition switch the appropriate action.
flashes in green, if the operation
indicator is still flashing in green,
there could be a steering lock
malfunction. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
. When the operation indicator on
the push-button ignition switch
flashes in orange, contact a
– CONTINUED –
The driver’s door was opened while the Switch the push-button ignition switch to
push-button ignition switch is “ACC” (in “OFF”, or close the driver’s door.
CVT models, when the select lever is in When exiting the vehicle, be sure to
Ding, ding ... the “P” position). switch the push-button ignition switch to
(intermittent) — — “OFF”.
The push-button ignition switch was
switched to “OFF” while the driver’s door Close the driver’s door.
is open.
Take out the access key fob from the
Lockout warning: vehicle, and lock the doors.
Ding Short beep — An attempt was made to lock all doors The doors cannot be locked while the
(2 seconds) while the access key fob is left inside the access key fob is inside the vehicle.
vehicle. A chirp sound will be heard, and all doors
will be unlocked.
Access key fob lock-in warning: Take out the access key fob from the
Short beep The door lock sensor was touched while vehicle, and lock the doors.
— (2 seconds) — the push-button ignition switch is “OFF” If the access key fob is inside the vehicle,
and the access key fob is inside the the doors cannot be locked.
vehicle.
Door ajar warning:
Beep, beep, beep, The door lock sensor is touched while the Close the doors securely and lock them.
— beep, beep — ignition switch is in the “OFF” position and If one of the doors including the rear gate
(5 times) one of the doors including the rear gate is is opened, the doors cannot be locked.
opened.
Power warning: Return the access key fob inside the
The door lock sensor was touched while vehicle, or switch the push-button ignition
Ding Long beep (60 — carrying the access key fob, the push- switch to “OFF”.
seconds max.) button ignition switch is in a position other If the push-button ignition switch is not
than “OFF” (in CVT models, when the switched to “OFF”, the doors cannot be
select lever is in the “P” position). locked.
Ding, ding ... Access key warning: Carry the access key fob, and drive the
(7 seconds) — — The vehicle was driven while the access vehicle.
key fob is not inside the vehicle.
– CONTINUED –
Flashes in green Steering lock warning: While turning the steering wheel right and
Ding — (15 seconds max.) The engine start procedure was per- left lightly, depress the brake pedal and
formed, but the steering is still locked. press the push-button ignition switch.
– CONTINUED –
& SI-DRIVE indicator light (if & Select lever/gear position in-
equipped) dicator (CVT models)
S03AE52 S03AE43
Type B
1) Intelligent (I) mode indicator
2) Sport (S) mode indicator
Type A Type A
1) Intelligent (I) mode indicator This light indicates the current SI-DRIVE 1) Upshift indicator
2) Sport (S) mode indicator mode. 2) Downshift indicator
3) Select lever/gear position indicator
For details of SI-DRIVE mode, refer to “SI-
DRIVE” F7-32.
These lights show the operation of the turn This light illuminates when the cruise
signal or lane change signal. control main button is pressed to activate
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink the cruise control function. For details, 3
rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned refer to “To set cruise control” F7-52.
out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible. If this light blinks, do not use the cruise
Refer to “Replacing bulbs” F11-38. control. In addition, if it blinks frequently,
contact your SUBARU dealer for an
& High beam indicator inspection.
light S03AE21
CAUTION
Type B This light shows that the headlights are in
1) Upshift indicator the high beam mode. If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
2) Downshift indicator This indicator light also illuminates when malfunction indicator light illumi-
3) Select lever/gear position indicator the headlight flasher is operated. nates, the cruise control indicator
light flashes at the same time. At this
This indicator shows the position of the
select lever.
& High beam assist indi- time, avoid driving at high speed and
cator light (if equipped) S03AE83
have your vehicle inspected at a
For models with manual mode, when the SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
manual mode is selected, the gear position This light illuminates when the high beam ble.
indicator (which shows the current gear assist function is activated. For details
selection) and the upshift/downshift indi- about the high beam assist function, refer
cator light up. Refer to “Continuously to “High beam assist function” F3-72. & Cruise control set indi-
variable transmission” F7-25. cator light (if equipped) S03AE23
– CONTINUED –
& Automatic headlight Responsive Headlight (SRH)” F3-75. mend that you have your vehicle
beam leveler warning inspected at a SUBARU author-
light (models with LED & Front fog light indicator ized dealer as soon as possible.
headlights) light (if equipped) S03AE25 . If the Auto Start Stop warning
S03AE33
This indicator light illuminates while the light is illuminated in yellow at
This light illuminates when the automatic any time other than in the follow-
front fog lights are illuminated.
headlight beam leveler does not operate ing cases and will not turn off
normally. even if the Auto Start Stop OFF
& Headlight indicator
If this light illuminates during driving, have switch is pushed and held, we
your vehicle inspected at your SUBARU
light (if equipped) S03AE24
recommend that you have your
dealer. This indicator light illuminates under the vehicle inspected at a SUBARU
following conditions. dealer as soon as possible.
& LED headlight warning . The light switch is turned to the “ ” or
light (models with LED “ ” position. The Auto Start Stop warning light will
headlights) S03AE76 . The light control switch is in the “AUTO” illuminate in yellow if you open the engine
position and the headlights illuminate hood when the engine has been tempora-
This light illuminates if the LED headlights rily stopped by the Auto Start Stop system.
automatically.
malfunction. Have your vehicle inspected In this case, to ensure safety, the engine
at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
& Auto Start Stop warning will not be automatically restarted, even if
light/Auto Start Stop you release the brake pedal. Use normal
& Steering Responsive operation to restart the engine.
Headlight warning light/ OFF indicator light (yel-
low) (if equipped) ! Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light
Steering Responsive S03AE65
(yellow)
Headlight OFF indicator ! Auto Start Stop warning light (yel- S03AE6502
This light will illuminate in yellow when the
light (if equipped) S03AE89 low) Auto Start Stop OFF switch is pressed to
S03AE6501
This light illuminates when the Steering prevent the Auto Start Stop system from
Responsive Headlight OFF switch is
CAUTION operating. It will turn off when the Auto
pressed to deactivate the Steering Re- Start Stop OFF switch is pressed once
. If the Auto Start Stop warning
sponsive Headlight. Also, the light flashes more to enable operation of the Auto Start
light is flashing in yellow, there
when a malfunction occurs in the Steering Stop system.
may be a malfunction in the Auto
Responsive Headlight. Refer to “Steering Start Stop system. We recom-
& Auto Start Stop indica- & X-MODE indicator (if ! Type B combination meter
S03AE6802
tor light (green) (if equipped)
S03AE68
equipped) S03AE66
! Type A combination meter
S03AE6801
This indicator light illuminates when the
engine has been temporarily stopped by 3
the Auto Start Stop system. It will turn off
when the engine is restarted.
is activated. It will disappear when the X- the combination meter display (color
MODE is deactivated. Refer to “To acti- LCD). For details, refer to “BSD/RCTA”
NOTE
vate/deactivate the X-MODE” F7-43. F7-62. . The outside temperature indicator
shows the temperature around the
& Hill descent control in- & RAB warning indicator sensor. However, the temperature may
dicator (if equipped) (if equipped) not be indicated correctly or the update
S03AE69 S03AE91
may be delayed in the following condi-
This indicator appears while the hill des- This indicator illuminates if the Reverse tions.
cent control function is in standby. It will Automatic Braking (RAB) system malfunc- – While parking or driving at low
flash while the hill descent control function tions. Refer to “Reverse Automatic Brak- speeds
is operating. It will disappear when the hill ing (RAB) system” F7-71. – When the outside temperature
descent control function is not available. changes suddenly (example: when
Refer to “Hill descent control function” F7- & RAB OFF indicator (if going in and out of an underground
44. equipped) S03AE92 parking area or when passing
through a tunnel)
& BSD/RCTA warning in- This indicator illuminates when the Re-
verse Automatic Braking (RAB) system is – When starting the engine after
dicator (if equipped) S03AE80
turned OFF, or when the Reverse Auto- being parked for a certain period of
This warning indicator appears when the matic Braking (RAB) system is suspended time
BSD/RCTA is malfunctioning. In this case temporarily. Refer to “Reverse Automatic . The icy road surface warning screen
the BSD/RCTA warning indicator will be Braking (RAB) system” F7-71. should be treated only as a guide. Be
shown on the combination meter display sure to check the condition of the road
(color LCD). When this indicator appears, & Icy road surface warn- surface before driving.
. Once the icy road surface warning
have your vehicle inspected by your ing indicator (if screen appears, it will not disappear
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. equipped) S03AE82 unless the outside temperature has
& BSD/RCTA OFF indica- When the outside temperature is 378F increased to 418F (58C) or higher.
tor (if equipped) (38C) or less, the icy road surface warning
S03AE86
will illuminate to inform the driver that the
The indicator appears when the BSD/ road surface may be frozen.
RCTA OFF switch is pressed to deactivate
the BSD/RCTA, or when the BSD/RCTA is
suspended temporarily. In this case the
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will be shown on
Steering Responsive
Headlight warning light 3-32
(if equipped)
– CONTINUED –
Mark Name Page & Basic screens Current fuel consumption screen:
S03BN06
Auto Start Stop warning By operating the “ ” or “ ” switch on the
light/Auto Start Stop 3-32 steering wheel, you can change the screen
OFF light (yellow) (if
equipped) that is always displayed.
Auto Start Stop No Ac- Average fuel consumption screen:
tivity Detected indicator 3-33
light (if equipped)
Auto Start Stop indica-
tor light (green) (if 3-33
equipped)
Icy road surface warn- This screen displays the rate of fuel
ing indicator (if 3-34 consumption at the present moment.
equipped)
Engine hood open
: Average fuel consumption NOTE
warning light (if 3-16 : Driving range on remaining fuel
The driving range on remaining fuel is
equipped)
This screen displays the average rate of only a guide. The indicated value may
fuel consumption since the trip meter was differ from the actual driving range on
last reset. remaining fuel, so you must immedi-
ately fill the tank when the low fuel
NOTE warning light illuminates.
The driving range on remaining fuel is
only a guide. The indicated value may
differ from the actual driving range on
remaining fuel, so you must immedi-
ately fill the tank when the low fuel
warning light illuminates.
: Journey time 1) Speed limit indicator (if equipped) : The total amount of time that the engine
: Journey distance 2) Vehicle speed was stopped by means of the Auto Start
Stop system
This screen displays the journey time (the This screen displays the current vehicle : The total amount of fuel saved due to the
time that has elapsed since the ignition speed. engine being stopped by the Auto Start
switch was turned to the “ON” position) Stop system
and journey distance (the distance that The indicated values are calculated from
has been driven since the ignition switch the most recent reset of the currently
was turned to the “ON” position). displayed trip meter to the current time.
The indication ranges are as follows.
. Total amount of time: from 00’00@ to
9999h59’59@
. Total amount of fuel saved: from 0 ml to
9999.999 L
NOTE
. When the trip meter is reset, the
corresponding accumulated time and
the amount of fuel saving are also reset.
– CONTINUED –
. The time spent with the engine TPMS screen (U.S.-spec. models): When the tire pressure monitoring
stopped by means of the Auto Start system detects the adjusted tire pres-
Stop system is also added to the sure, the warning light will turn off and
journey time. the tire pressure values will turn to
white.
SI-DRIVE mode screen (if equipped): . For information about the specified
value of the air pressure, refer to
“Tires” F12-8.
Menu screen entering screen:
screen. combination meter display (color LCD) When the Reverse Automatic Braking
and the multi-function display (color LCD). (RAB) system is in operation, the warning
! Screen Settings sound to notify that an obstacle is detected
S03BN0701 ! Warning Volume (if equipped)
After entering the “Screen Settings” menu, S03BN0713 in the rear can be activated or deactivated.
Sets the EyeSight warning volume, the
select one of the following menus.
BSD/RCTA warning volume and the Re-
verse Automatic Braking (RAB) warning
– CONTINUED –
! Vehicle Setting ! Auto Door Lock and Unlock ! Welcome Lighting (if equipped)
S03BN0708 S03BN070808 S03BN070806
After entering the “Vehicle Setting” menu, Setting conditions for Auto Door Lock and Sets the leaving time and approaching
select one of the following menus. Unlock time.
! Keyless Entry System . Auto Door Lock: . Approaching time set
S03BN070801 Set the condition of the following items to Sets the illumination time of the headlights
Sets the settings used when the keyless
lock the door automatically. that illuminate when you approach the
access function was operated.
– Vehicle Speed: When the vehicle vehicle.
. Audible Signal (if equipped)
speed reaches more than 12 mph (20 . Leaving time set
Sets the electronic chirp that sounds when km/h). Sets the time until the headlights turn off
the door is locked or unlocked. – Shift Into or Out of PARK: When the when you have moved away from the
. Hazard Warning Flasher select lever is shifted into a position vehicle.
Sets the operation of the hazard warning other than the “P” position (CVT
flasher that blinks when the door is locked models). ! One-touch lane changer
or unlocked. – Off: When the function is set to OFF. S03BN070807
Sets the one-touch lane changer on/off.
. Driver Door Unlock (if equipped) . Auto Door Unlock:
Select only the driver’s door to unlock or all ! Default Settings
Set the conditions of the following items to S03BN0704
doors to unlock simultaneously when the unlock the door automatically. Select “Yes” to use the menu screen to
driver’s door is unlocked. – Shift Into or Out of PARK: When the restore customized settings to the factory
. Rear Gate/Trunk Unlock (if equipped) select lever is shifted into the “P” default settings. Select “No” to return to the
Select only the rear gate to unlock or all position (CVT models). previous screen without restoring to the
doors to unlock simultaneously when – Ignition OFF: When the ignition factory default settings.
accessing from the cargo area. switch is turned to OFF.
– Driver Door Open: When the dri-
! Defogger ver’s door is open.
S03BN070802
Sets and customizes the operation of the – Off: When the function is set to OFF.
defogger.
! Auto Light Sensor (if equipped)
! Interior Light S03BN070804
S03BN070803 Sets and customizes the sensitivity of the
Sets and customizes the interior light off auto light sensor.
delay timer.
Multi-function display (black and white) ! How to change the information dis-
type B play
S03BO0910
1) Outside temperature indicator
2) X-MODE indicator (if equipped)
3) Driving information display
4) Clock
With the ignition switch in the “ACC”
position, the clock appears on the display.
Multi-function display (black and white)
With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-
type A
1) Clock
tion, the outside temperature indicator,
2) Auto Start Stop system (if equipped) driving information display and clock all
3) Outside temperature indicator appear on the display.
4) Driving information display
5) Climate control screen
NOTE
The indicated values vary in accor- 1) INFO button
dance with changes in the vehicle’s
running conditions. Also, the indicated Pressing the INFO button on the steering
values may differ slightly from the wheel switches the display in the following
actual values and should thus be sequence.
– CONTINUED –
– CONTINUED –
! Journey time (models without com- time a complete hour has elapsed. If the speed corresponding to the A trip meter
bination meter display (color LCD)) display is giving a reading other than the display and the average vehicle speed
S03BO0904
journey time, the display switches to the corresponding to the B trip meter display.
journey time, flashes for 5 seconds, and When either of the trip meter displays is
returns to its original reading each time a reset, the corresponding average vehicle
complete hour has elapsed. speed value is also reset.
NOTE NOTE
The journey time is reset when the When either trip meter display is reset,
ignition switch is turned to the “ACC” the average vehicle speed correspond-
or “LOCK”/“OFF” position. ing to that trip meter display is not
shown until the vehicle has subse-
! Average vehicle speed quently covered a distance of 1 mile
S03BO0905
(or 1 km).
! Auto Start Stop time (if equipped)
The journey time shows the time that has S03BO0907
This display shows the total time that the total time in conjunction with the ignition ! Turn off display of driving informa-
engine was stopped by the Auto Start Stop switch. tion display
system in the following ways. S03BO0906
Select the blank space in the menu to exit
Total time in conjunction with the trip the driving information display selection.
meter: Displays the total time that the 3
engine was stopped by the Auto Start Stop NOTE
system, from the last time the currently . The average fuel consumption and
displayed trip meter was reset until the average vehicle speed are calculated
current time. By pressing the TRIP RESET even while the driving information dis-
switch, you can toggle the display between play has been turned off.
the time the engine was stopped for trip A . Even if you turn off the driving
and the time the engine was stopped for information display, the display will
trip B. automatically turn on when the battery
voltage is disconnected and then re-
NOTE connected for battery replacement or
When the trip meter mileage is reset, 1. Press and hold the “+” button located fuse replacement.
the total time in conjunction with the on the side of the information display. The
trip meter is not shown until the vehicle stopped time will then flash.
has subsequently covered a distance 2. Within 5 seconds after the stopped
of 1 mile (or 1 km). time starts flashing, press and hold the “−”
button located on the side of the informa-
Total time in conjunction with the igni- tion display. The display will then change
tion switch: Displays the total time that and after flashing for 3 seconds, the
the engine was stopped by the Auto Start stopped time selected will be displayed.
Stop system, from the time when the 3. Each time the “−” button is pressed and
ignition switch was turned to the “ON” held during the 3 seconds that the display
position to the current time. is flashing, the display will change and
! How to switch the display flash for 3 seconds. If the “−” button is not
S03BO090701 pressed and held during the 3-second
Perform the following operation to toggle period that the display is flashing, the
the display between the total time in stopped time selected will be displayed.
conjunction with the trip meter and the
– CONTINUED –
– CONTINUED –
! Information screen
S03BP1019
Press the INFO button on the steering wheel to switch the item displayed on the information screen.
– CONTINUED –
– CONTINUED –
Item Details ! Weather information screen (if . The weather forecast for the set
equipped) destination remains displayed until a
The posted speed limit of the road S03BP101905 new destination is set or until you reach
you are currently driving on is the destination.
displayed.*1
. Depending on the reception timing
of XM, the display of weather informa-
tion may be delayed.
The calendar is displayed.
! Navigation screen (models with
navigation system)
S03BP101906
Nothing is displayed.
*1: If equipped
*2: Models with SiriusXM Satellite Radio
The screen of the currently selected audio 1) Driving range on remaining fuel The time and date are displayed.
source is displayed. 2) Average fuel consumption corresponding You can adjust the time and date. For
to the driving distance of each trip meter
For details about how to use the audio set, 3) Current fuel consumption
details, refer to “Clock” F3-66.
refer to the separate navigation/audio
Owner’s Manual. The fuel consumption information is dis-
played on the screen.
NOTE
The driving range on remaining fuel is
only a guide. The indicated value may
differ from the actual driving range on
remaining fuel, so you must immedi-
ately fill the tank when the low fuel
warning light illuminates.
– CONTINUED –
Camera Set- Contrast Set and adjust the contrast of a display. 3-63
tings Camera Shift Link Set the camera shift link. On or Off 3-63
Go Back Return to the 1st menu. —
Engine Oil Set and adjust the oil maintenance notification date. 3-64
Oil Filter Set and adjust the oil filter maintenance notification date. 3-64
Tires Set and adjust the tire maintenance notification date. 3-64
Maintenance Schedule Set and adjust the vehicle maintenance notification date. 3-64
Maintenance
Turn on or off the self-check screen that is
ON/OFF activated when the ignition switch is turned to the On or Off 3-64
“ON” position.
Clear All Settings Clear all settings for maintenance items. Yes or No 3-65
Go Back Return to the 1st menu. —
– CONTINUED –
For safety reasons, we recommend stopping the vehicle in a safe location while setting.
a message will be displayed when the 1. Select “Screen Off” from the 2nd menu
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” in setting screen. Refer to “Setting screen”
position. This function can be set to on or F3-58.
off. For details, refer to “Bypass screen
setting” F3-62. 3. Enter the date and the text by using the
1. Select “Birthday” from the 2nd menu in control switches.
the setting screen. Refer to “Setting 4. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go
screen” F3-58. Back” to return to the previous screen
without applying the setting changes.
NOTE
You can store a maximum of 5 birth-
days.
! Anniversary setting
S03BP280103
1. The procedure for setting an anniver- 2. Select “Yes” to turn off the screen.
sary is the same as “Birthday setting” F3- Select “No” to return to the previous
61, except that in step 1 “Anniversary” is screen.
selected.
Restoring the screen
2. Select from the list the number that you When the INFO button is operated after
– CONTINUED –
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” or 3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go switches.
“ACC” position, the screen will be restored. Back” to return to the previous screen 3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go
The screen will be restored with the basic without applying the setting changes. Back” to return to the previous screen
screen that was displayed when the without applying the setting changes.
screen was turned off. NOTE
. You can display a maximum of the 3
NOTE items. NOTE
While the screen is off, the screen . The same item cannot be selected Traffic information setting is only dis-
switches to the climate control screen for the left, center or right location. played for the audio unit with SiriusXM
only when the climate control system is . Weather information for 3 hours satellite radio.
operated. later or 6 hours later can be displayed.
! Beep setting
S03BP280504
! Favorite setting 1. Select “Beep” from the 2nd menu in the
S03BP280502 ! Bypass screen setting
1. Select the “Favorite” from the 2nd S03BP280503 setting screen. Refer to “Setting screen”
menu in setting screen. Refer to “Setting 1. Select “Bypass Screen” from the 2nd F3-58.
screen” F3-58. menu in the setting screen. Refer to
“Setting screen” F3-58.
without applying the setting changes. ! Contrast setting ! Camera shift link setting
S03BP280902 S03BP280903
! Camera Settings (if equipped) 1. Select “Contrast” from the 2nd menu in 1. Select “Camera Shift Link” from the
S03BP2809 the setting screen. Refer to “Setting 2nd menu in the setting screen. Refer to
You can set the front camera display screen” F3-58. “Setting screen” F3-58.
settings.
3
! Brightness setting
S03BP280901
1. Select “Brightness” from the 2nd menu
in the setting screen. Refer to “Setting
screen” F3-58.
2. Select the contrast level by using the 2. Select “On” or “Off” by using the control
control switches. switches.
3. Press the “ /SET” button to confirm 3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go
the setting. Back” to return to the previous screen
without applying the setting changes.
2. Select the brightness level by using the
control switches.
3. Press the “ /SET” button to confirm
the setting.
– CONTINUED –
can be adjusted using either auto mode or 1. Turn the ignition switch to “ON”.
manual mode.
. Auto mode: automatic clock adjustment
. Manual mode: manual clock adjust-
ment
CAUTION
The clock in the multi-function dis-
play (color LCD) cannot be adjusted, 6. Press the “+” button or the “−” button
if the SUBARU genuine navigation beside the clock.
and/or audio system is removed.
! Setting 12-hour or 24-hour dis-
play
S03AF030901
2. Press the button. The clock can be set to 12-hour or 24-hour
3. Select “Settings”. display. Perform the following procedure to
4. Select “Vehicle”. switch the display format.
5. Select “Clock adjustment” and then 1. Turn the ignition switch in the “LOCK”/
select “Manual”. “OFF” position.
2. Press and hold the “−” button located
near the clock display for approximately 5
seconds. The clock display will then start
to flash.
3. While the clock display is flashing,
press and hold the “+” button for approxi-
mately 2 seconds. The clock format will
then change.
– CONTINUED –
! Models with navigation system & Regulatory information Light control switch
S03AF0201 S03AF04
The clock will be set automatically where a S03AH
dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for & High/low beam change (dim- & Headlight flasher
S03AH03
details. mer)
S03AH02
! Sensor for the auto on/off head-
lights (if equipped)
S03AH0101
3
– CONTINUED –
& High beam assist function (if . When there is a preceding or oncoming
equipped) vehicle.
S03AH07 . When the EyeSight system is malfunc-
NOTE tioning or is temporarily stopped.
. The high beam assist function uti-
lizes the stereo camera installed at the NOTE
position of the front map lights. . Do not overestimate the capacity of
. For details on how to handle the the high beam assist function. The
stereo camera, refer to the Owner’s driver always has the responsibility to
Manual supplement for the EyeSight understand the surrounding situation,
system. to drive safely, and to change the
The high beam assist function automati- headlight mode manually if necessary.
cally changes the headlight from high . The factory setting (default setting)
beam to low beam (or vice versa). for this function is set as “operational”. High beam assist indicator light
This setting can be changed to OFF When the high beam assist function is
When all of the following conditions are (non-operation) at SUBARU dealers. activated, the high beam assist indicator
met, the headlight will change to high For more details, contact a SUBARU light on the combination meter will illumi-
beam. dealer. nate.
. When the vehicle speed increases to or
above 20 mph (32 km/h). ! How to use the high beam assist NOTE
. There is no preceding or oncoming function If the high beam assist function is
S03AH0701
vehicle. The high beam assist function will be malfunctioning or is temporarily
. The forward area of the vehicle is dark. activated when all the following conditions stopped, the headlight will be fixed at
. The road does not have a sharp curve. are met. low beam.
. The light control switch is in the “AUTO”
When any of the following conditions is position and the low beam headlights are
met, the headlight will change to low beam. on automatically.
. When the vehicle speed decreases to . The turn signal lever is pushed forward.
or below 10 mph (16 km/h).
. When the forward area of the vehicle is
bright.
! How to temporarily lower the sensi- the next time the ignition switch is and license plate lights will be on.
tivity of the high beam assist func- turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position
tion and the engine is restarted. ! Tips for the high beam assist sys-
S03AH0704 tem
The sensitivity of the high beam assist ! How to change the headlight mode S03AH0703
function can be lowered by performing the . The high beam assist function recog-
manually nizes the conditions surrounding the ve- 3
following operations. S03AH0702
Change to the low beam: hicle based on the brightness of illumina-
1. Before turning the ignition switch to the
When you return the turn signal lever to the tion ahead of your vehicle, etc. Therefore,
“ON” position, set the light control switch to
center position, the high beam assist the headlight mode may switch in some
the “AUTO” position and push the signal
function will turn off and the high beam situations that do not match to the driver’s
lever forward (high beam position).
assist indicator light will turn off. sense.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
. A bicycle or cargo cycle may not be
position and within approximately 15 sec- Change to the high beam: detected.
onds, press the “ / ” (following distance When you turn the light control switch to
setting) switch more than 10 times con- . Under the following situations, the
the “ ” position, the headlight mode will brightness of ambient illumination may
secutively. be changed to the high beam. not be detected correctly and the high
At this time, the high beam assist function beam assist function may not work prop-
When the sensitivity of the high beam will turn off, the high beam assist indicator erly. As a result, the glare of the high beam
assist function is lowered, the high beam light will turn off and the high beam may disturb the oncoming vehicle or
assist indicator light “ ” on the combina- indicator light will turn on. vehicle ahead. Also, the low beam mode
tion meter will flash. may continue although there are no
NOTE oncoming vehicles and vehicles ahead.
NOTE . After manually changing the head- In the such cases, change the headlight
. The sensitivity of the high beam light mode to the high beam, if you turn mode manually.
assist function cannot be lowered in on the high beam assist function, – In bad weather (fog, snow, sand
the following conditions. return the light control switch to the storm, heavy rain, etc.).
– Cruise control or Adaptive Cruise “AUTO” position.
– When the windshield glass is dirty or
Control indicator is illuminated. . When manually changing the head-
fogged.
– The EyeSight warning indicator light mode to the high beam, if you turn
the light control switch to the “ ” – When the windshield is cracked or
(yellow) is illuminated.
position, the instrument panel illumina- damaged.
. The sensitivity of the high beam
assist function returns to normal level tion, parking lights, front side marker – When the stereo camera is de-
lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights formed or the stereo camera lenses
– CONTINUED –
are dirty. ged from the high beam to the low beam. – When the headlights of an oncom-
– If there are lights similar to the – When your vehicle passes an on- ing vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle
headlights or the tail lights in the coming vehicle suddenly in a blind ahead illuminate on only one side.
surrounding area. curve. – When the oncoming vehicle or
– When an oncoming vehicle or ve- – When another vehicle passes in vehicle ahead is a motorcycle.
hicle ahead is driven without its head- front of your vehicle. – Conditions of a road (slope, curve,
lights and tail lights on. – When an oncoming vehicle or ve- road surface, etc.).
– If the headlights of an oncoming hicle ahead comes in and out of view – Number of passengers and weight
vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle because of continuous curves, median of loaded cargo.
ahead are dirty or discolored, or if the strips, roadside trees, etc. – Limitation of the detection ability of
light beams are not aimed correctly. . If the stereo camera detects the light of the stereo camera.
– When a rapid change of brightness the front fog lights of an oncoming vehicle,
continues while driving. the headlight mode may change from the & Daytime running light system
S03AH04
– When driving on a road with many high beam to the low beam automatically.
ups and downs or uneven surfaces. . The headlight mode may change from WARNING
– When driving on a road with many the high beam to the low beam, or the low When the daytime running lights are
curves. beam mode may continue, when affected illuminated, the tail lights do not
– When there are some objects that by a street light, traffic signal, illumination illuminate. When it becomes dark
reflect light strongly, such as a road of an advertisement board, or a reflective outside, turn the light switch to the
sign or a mirror in vehicle ahead. object such as a road sign and signboard. “ ” position to illuminate the head-
– When the rear part of the vehicle . The timing of the change of headlight lights and tail lights. This will im-
ahead, such as a container, reflects mode may differ due to the following prove visibility and allow other dri-
light strongly. factors. vers to see your vehicle more easily.
– When the headlights of your vehicle – Color or brightness of the headlights
are damaged or dirty. of an oncoming vehicle or the tail lights The daytime running lights will automati-
– When your vehicle is tilted, such as of a vehicle ahead. cally illuminate when the following condi-
in case the vehicle has a flat tire or is – The headlights of the oncoming tions are fulfilled.
being towed. vehicle or the tail lights of the vehicle . The engine is running.
– Immediately after the engine has ahead are covered with mud, snow, . The parking brake is fully released.
started. etc. . The light control switch is in “AUTO” (if
. In the following conditions, the head- – Movement and direction of an on- equipped), “ ” or “ ” (except for
light mode will not be automatically chan- coming vehicle or a vehicle ahead.
3-76 Instruments and controls/Headlight beam leveler (models with LED headlights)
The SRH OFF indicator light on the Headlight beam leveler Fog light switch (if equipped)
combination meter illuminates when SRH
is turned off.
(models with LED headlights) S03BA
S03AT
If SRH is malfunctioning, the SRH OFF The LED headlights produce more light
indicator light on the combination meter than conventional halogen headlights.
flashes when the ignition switch is in the When the vehicle is carrying a heavy load
“ON” position. It indicates that SRH has and the headlight beams are angled
been deactivated. Contact a SUBARU upwards, the driver of an oncoming vehicle
dealer for an inspection. may experience glare.
NOTE To prevent this, the automatic headlight
beam leveler adjusts the headlights to the
. If you turn the ignition switch to the
optimum height automatically depending
“OFF” position with SRH turned off and
on the load the vehicle is carrying.
then start the engine again, SRH will
automatically turn on. CAUTION Except for Canada models
. When you turn the ignition switch to
1) Headlight switch
the “ON” position, the SRH OFF indi- For CVT models, in certain circum- 2) Fog light switch
cator light will illuminate and turn off stances, the headlights may become
after several seconds. misaligned, and the headlight beam
. SRH only activates when the vehicle leveler will not reset them to the
is traveling forward at the speed of proper angle. This may occur after
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more. transporting your vehicle on a flat-
. SRH may not activate when the shift bed truck, or if the vehicle is parked
lever (MT models) is selected in 1st and restarted on different angles. In
gear. such cases, have the headlight
alignment checked by a SUBARU
dealer.
– CONTINUED –
& One-touch lane changer Wiper and washer . In freezing weather, be sure that
S03AI01
To flash the turn signal and turn signal S03AM the blade rubbers are not frozen
indicator light three times, push the turn to the windshield or rear window
signal lever up or down slightly and WARNING before switching on the wipers.
immediately release it. Attempting to operate the wiper
In freezing weather, do not use the with the blades frozen to the
NOTE windshield washer until the wind- window glass could cause not
The operational/non-operational shield is sufficiently warmed by the only the blade rubbers to be
setting of the one-touch lane changer defroster. damaged but also might cause
can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Otherwise the washer fluid can the wiper motor to fail. If the blade
Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for freeze on the windshield, blocking rubbers are frozen to the window
details. For models with the combina- your view. glass, be sure to operate the
tion meter display (color LCD), the defroster, windshield wiper dei-
setting can also be changed by operat- cer (if equipped) or rear window
ing the combination meter display CAUTION defogger before turning on the
(color LCD). For details, refer to “Vehi- wiper.
cle Setting” F3-42. . Do not operate the washer con- . If the wipers stop during opera-
tinuously for more than 10 sec- tion because of ice or some other
onds, or when the washer fluid obstruction on the window, this
tank is empty. This may cause might cause the wiper motor to
overheating of the washer motor. fail even if the wiper switch is
Check the washer fluid level fre- turned off. If this occurs,
quently, such as at fuel stops. promptly stop the vehicle in a
. Do not operate the wipers when safe place, turn the ignition
the windshield or rear window is switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” po-
dry. This may scratch the glass, sition and clean the window glass
damage the blade rubbers and to allow proper wiper operation.
might cause the wiper motor to . Use clean water if windshield
fail. Before operating the wiper washer fluid is unavailable. In
on a dry windshield or rear win- areas where water freezes in
dow, always use the windshield winter, use SUBARU Windshield
washer. Washer Fluid or the equivalent.
Refer to “Windshield washer and streaking on the glass. If you & Windshield wiper and washer
fluid” F11-29. cannot remove those streaks after switches
. Do not clean the blade rubbers operating the washer or if the wiper S03AM01
operation is jerky, clean the outer sur- The wiper operates only when the ignition
with gasoline or a solvent, such switch is in the “ON” position.
as paint thinner or benzine. This face of the windshield or rear window
will cause deterioration of the and the blade rubbers using a sponge ! Operating the wiper lever 3
S03AM0106
blade rubbers. or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or
mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,
rinse the window glass and blade
NOTE rubbers with clean water. The glass is
. The windshield wiper motor is pro- clean if no beads form on the glass
tected against overloads by a circuit when you rinse with water.
breaker. If the motor operates continu- . If you cannot eliminate the streaking
ously under an unusually heavy load, even after following this procedure,
the circuit breaker may trip to stop the replace the blade rubbers with new
motor temporarily. If this happens, park ones. For replacement instructions,
your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the refer to “Replacement of wiper blades”
wiper switch, and wait for approxi- F11-30.
mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker
will reset itself, and the wipers will
again operate normally. : Mist operation (for a single wipe)
. Clean your blade rubbers and win- : Off
dow glass periodically with a washer : Intermittent operation
solution to prevent streaking, and to
remove accumulations of road salt or : Low speed operation
road film. Operate the windshield : High speed operation
washer for at least 1 second so that
washer solution will be sprinkled all For a single wipe of the wipers, push the
over the windshield or rear window. lever up. The wipers operate until you
. Grease, wax, insects or other mate- release the lever.
rial on the windshield or the blade
rubbers results in jerky wiper operation
– CONTINUED –
When the wiper switch is in the “ ” To wash the windshield, pull the wiper
position, turn the dial to adjust the operat- control lever toward you. The washer fluid Windshield washer fluid warning light
ing interval of the wiper. The operating sprays until you release the lever. The
interval can be adjusted in several steps wipers operate while you pull the lever. The windshield washer fluid warning
from the shortest interval to the longest. light illuminates when the washer fluid
level in the tank has dropped to the
lower limit. If the warning light illumi-
nates, refill the tank with fluid. For the
refilling procedure, refer to “Wind-
shield washer fluid” F11-29.
(2) Press and hold the “ ” switch for S03AP07 1. To turn the compass feature on/off,
more than 6 seconds or until a zone press and hold the “ ” switch for more
number appears in the display. than 3 seconds or until the display turns 3
on/off. The compass feature will default to
(3) Once the zone number appears in
on with each ignition cycle.
the display, toggle the “ ” switch
again until your current location zone 2. If the display reads “C”, slowly drive the
number appears. After you stop press- vehicle in circles until compass is cali-
ing the switch, your new zone number brated.
will be saved. Within a few seconds,
the display will show a compass direc-
tion.
4. If the vehicle’s magnetics have chan-
ged or if the compass appears inaccurate,
recalibrate the compass. Press and hold 1) Display
the “ ” switch for more than 9 seconds or 2) HomeLink Buttons
until a “C” appears in the display. Once a 3) Switch
“C” appears in the display, slowly drive the
vehicle in circles until compass is cali- During nighttime driving, the auto-dimming
brated. feature senses distracting glare from
vehicle headlights behind you and auto-
matically dims to eliminate the glare and
preserve your vision. Compass calibration zones
! To Operate the Auto-Dimming Fea- 3. To adjust for compass zone variance:
ture (1) Find your current location and
S03AP0705
Press the “ ” switch to turn the auto- zone number on the map.
dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming (2) Press and hold the “ ” switch for
feature is enabled when the switch’s green more than 6 seconds or until a zone
LED indicator is on. The auto-dimming number appears in the display.
feature will default to on with each ignition (3) Once the zone number appears in
– CONTINUED –
– CONTINUED –
1) “Learn” button 7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, 1) Status Indicators
5. At the garage door opener motor, hold for two seconds and release the 8. If status indicator arrows appear next
(security gate motor, etc.) locate the HomeLink button up to three times. At this to the indicator light, please refer to
“Learn”, “Smart”, or “Program” button. This point programming is complete and your “Garage Door Two-Way Communication”
can usually be found where the hanging device should operate when the HomeLink F3-87.
antenna wire is attached to the motor-head button is pressed and released.
unit (see the device’s manual to identify In the event that there are still program-
this button). The name and color of the ming difficulties or questions, additional
button may vary by manufacturer. HomeLink information and programming
videos can be found at
NOTE www.HomeLink.com and
A ladder and/or second person may www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex. For
simplify the following steps. Genie and Sommer garage door openers
please go directly to the HomeLink web-
6. Firmly press and release the “Learn”, site.
“Smart”, or “Program” button. You now
have 30 seconds in which to complete step
7.
! Gate Operator / Canadian Pro- the device during the “cycling” process ! Reprogramming a Single
gramming to prevent possible overheating. HomeLink Button
S03AP070410 S03AP070406
Canadian radio-frequency laws require To program a previously trained button,
Proceed with “Programming a New
transmitter remote signals to “time-out” follow these steps:
HomeLink Button” step 4 to complete.
(or quit) after several seconds of transmis- 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink
sion, which may not be long enough for ! Using HomeLink button. DO NOT release the button.
3
S03AP070411
HomeLink to pick up the signal during To operate, simply press and release the 2. The indicator light will begin to slowly
programming. Similar to this Canadian programmed HomeLink button. Activation flash orange after 20 seconds. The
law, some U.S. gate operators are de- will now occur for the trained device (i.e. HomeLink button can be released at this
signed to “time-out” in the same manner. garage door opener, gate operator, secur- point. Proceed with “Programming a New
The indicator LED on the hand-held ity system, entry door lock, home/office HomeLink Button” - step 3.
remote will go off when the device times lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand- 3. If you do not complete the program-
out, indicating that it has finished transmit- held remote of the device may also be ming of a new device to the button, it will
ting. used at any time. revert to the previously stored program-
If you live in Canada or you are having ming.
! Erasing HomeLink Buttons
difficulties programming a gate operator or S03AP070412
garage door opener by using the program- To erase programming from the three ! Garage Door Two-Way Commu-
ming procedures, replace “Programming a buttons (individual buttons cannot be nication
New HomeLink Button” step 3 with the erased but can be “reprogrammed” as S03AP070413
outlined below), follow the step noted: HomeLink has the capability of commu-
following: nicating with your garage door opener.
While the HomeLink indicator light is Press and hold the two outer HomeLink HomeLink can receive and display “clos-
flashing orange, press and release (“cy- buttons for at least 10 seconds. The LED ing” or “opening” status messages from
cle”) your device’s hand-held remote every indicator will change from continuously lit compatible garage door opener systems.
two seconds until the HomeLink indicator to rapidly flashing. Release both buttons. At any time, HomeLink can also recall and
light changes from orange to green. You Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds. display the last recorded status commu-
may now release the hand-held remote HomeLink is now ready to be programmed nicated by the garage door opener to
button. at any time beginning with “Programming a indicate your garage door being “closed”
New HomeLink Button” - step 1. or “opened”.
NOTE HomeLink has the capability of receiving
If programming a garage door opener this communication from the garage door
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug opener at a range up to 820 feet (250 m).
– CONTINUED –
CAUTION
3
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
– CONTINUED –
The remote control mirrors operate only Defogger and deicer (if The vehicle is equipped with the defogger
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or and the deicer (if equipped) system. The
“ACC” position.
equipped) defogger and deicer system is activated
S03BI
1. Turn the control switch to the side that only when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
you want to adjust. “L” is for the left mirror, position.
“R” is for the right mirror. 3
2. Move the control switch in the direction
you want to move the mirror.
3. Return the control switch to the neutral
position to prevent unintentional opera-
tion.
The mirrors can also be adjusted manu-
ally.
– CONTINUED –
– CONTINUED –
NOTE
. If the surface temperature of the
steering wheel is approximately above
1048F (408C) when the switch is turned
on, the system will not heat the steering
wheel. Then, the indicator light will
continue to illuminate.
Climate control
Ventilator control .................................................... 4-2 Air inlet selection ...................................................4-9
S04
Center ventilators .................................................. 4-2 To turn off the climate control system................... 4-10
Side ventilators...................................................... 4-2 Defrosting.............................................................. 4-10
Climate control panel ............................................. 4-2 Operating tips for heater and air conditioner .....4-11
Type A ................................................................... 4-3 Cleaning ventilation grille ..................................... 4-11
Type B ................................................................... 4-4 Efficient cooling after parking in direct sunlight .... 4-11
Type C ................................................................... 4-5 Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant
Automatic climate control operation circuit................................................................ 4-11 4
(type B and C) ...................................................... 4-6 Checking air conditioning system before summer
season .............................................................. 4-11
Sensors ................................................................. 4-6
Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and
Manual climate control operation.......................... 4-7 low temperature weather conditions................... 4-11
Airflow mode selection........................................... 4-7 Air conditioner compressor shut-off when
MAX A/C mode (for type B and C) .......................... 4-9 engine is heavily loaded .................................... 4-11
Temperature control............................................... 4-9 Refrigerant for your climate control system .......... 4-11
Fan speed control .................................................. 4-9 Air filtration system.............................................. 4-12
Air conditioner control ........................................... 4-9 Replacing the cabin air filter ................................. 4-12
– CONTINUED –
NOTE
The climate control screen is displayed
on the multi-function display (color
LCD). Refer to “Climate control screen”
F3-52.
As for the multi-function display (black
and white) type A, refer to “Climate
control screen” F3-49.
1) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Auto- 2) AUTO button (Refer to “Automatic cli-
matic climate control operation (type B mate control operation (type B and C)”
and C)” F4-6 and/or “Temperature con- F4-6.)
trol” F4-9.) 3) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air
conditioner control” F4-9.)
NOTE
The climate control screen is displayed
on the multi-function display (color
LCD). Refer to “Climate control screen”
F3-52.
1) Driver’s side temperature control dial 2) AUTO button (Refer to “Automatic cli-
(Refer to “Automatic climate control mate control operation (type B and C)”
operation (type B and C)” F4-6 and/or F4-6.)
“Temperature control” F4-9.) 3) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air
conditioner control” F4-9.)
Automatic climate control operation, the “FULL” indicator light on & Sensors
the multi-function display (color LCD)/ S04AI03
operation (type B and C) multi-function display (black and white)
The sensors are located as follows.
S04AI
type A will turn off and the “AUTO”
When this mode is selected, the fan speed, indicator light will remain illuminated.
airflow distribution, air-inlet control, and air You can then manually control the
conditioner compressor operation are system as desired using the button
automatically controlled. To activate this you operated. To change the system
mode, perform the following. back to the FULL AUTO mode, press
1. Press the AUTO button. The indicator the AUTO button.
light “FULL AUTO” on the multi-function
display (color LCD) illuminates. To turn off the climate control system,
2. Set the preferred temperature using press the ON/OFF button. Then the air
the temperature control dial. inlet selection will be set to the following.
. When the air inlet selection is set to
NOTE auto mode: Outside air circulation
. Operate the automatic climate con- . When the air inlet selection is set to
trol system when the engine is running. manual mode: No change
. Even when cooling is not necessary,
the air conditioner compressor will
automatically turn on if the temperature
is set much lower than the current
outlet air temperature. Even in this
case, the “A/C” indicator light on the
control panel illuminates.
. The controllable temperature range
may vary depending on the regional
specifications of the vehicle.
. If you operate any of the buttons on 1) Interior air temperature sensor
the control panel other than the ON/ 2) Solar sensor
OFF button, rear window defogger
button, SYNC button and temperature The automatic climate control system
control dial(s) during FULL AUTO mode employs several sensors. These sensors
are delicate. If they are not treated properly Manual climate control op-
and become damaged, the system may
not be able to control the interior tempera-
eration
S04AJ
ture correctly. To avoid damaging the & Airflow mode selection
sensors, observe the following precau- S04AJ01
tions. Select the airflow mode by using the
. Do not subject the sensors to impact. airflow mode selection dial (type A and B)
or the airflow mode selection button (type
. Keep water away from the sensors. C). 4
. Do not cover the sensors.
Airflow modes are as follows.
– CONTINUED –
Heat: Foot outlets, both side outlets of the Heat-def: Windshield defroster outlets, Defrost: Windshield defroster outlets and
instrument panel and some through wind- foot outlets and both side outlets of the both side outlets of the instrument panel
shield defroster outlets (A small amount of instrument panel (Refer to “Defrosting” (Refer to “Defrosting” F4-10.)
air flows to the windshield and both side F4-10.)
windows to prevent fogging.)
& MAX A/C mode (for type B and ! SYNC mode (type C) NOTE
S04AJ0207
C) When the SYNC mode is turned on, both For efficient defogging or dehumidify-
S04AJ06
For quicker cooling, press the MAX A/C the driver’s and passenger’s side tem- ing in cold weather, turn on the air
button. peratures are synchronized using the conditioner. If the ambient temperature
When the MAX A/C mode is on, the driver’s side temperature control dial. decreases to approximately 328F (08C),
following settings will be changed auto- Press the SYNC button to turn on the the air conditioner and dehumidifica-
matically. SYNC mode. The SYNC button indicator tion system may not operate properly.
. The air conditioner will turn on. will illuminate. 4
. The temperature will be set on the Press the SYNC button again or turn the
passenger’s side temperature control dial
& Air inlet selection
lowest. S04AJ05
to cancel the SYNC mode. The SYNC Select the air inlet by pressing the air inlet
. The fan speed will be set on the selection button.
button indicator will not illuminate. In this
maximum speed.
case, temperature control on the driver’s . Recirculation:
. The air inlet will be set to recirculation. side and passenger’s side is separated.
. The air flow mode setting will be set to When the indicator light on the air inlet
The temperature will be controlled indivi-
ventilation mode. selection button illuminates, interior air is
dually using the driver’s and passenger’s
recirculated inside the vehicle. Press the
temperature control dials.
To turn off MAX A/C mode and return the air inlet selection button to the ON position
previous setting, press the MAX A/C in the following cases.
button again. & Fan speed control – When driving on a dusty road
S04AJ03
Select the preferred fan speed by turning – When you want cooling perfor-
& Temperature control the fan speed control dial. mance to increase (for example, in
S04AJ02
Turn the temperature control dial to set the particularly hot weather)
preferred interior temperature. & Air conditioner control
S04AJ04
The air conditioner operates only when the . Outside air circulation:
NOTE engine is running. When the indicator light on the air inlet
The controllable temperature range Press the air conditioner button while the selection button does not illuminate, out-
may vary depending on the regional fan is in operation to turn on the air side air is drawn into the passenger
specifications of the vehicle. conditioner. When the air conditioner is compartment. Press the air inlet selection
on, the “A/C” indicator light illuminates. button to the OFF position in the following
cases.
To turn off the air conditioner, press the
button again. – When the road is no longer dusty
– CONTINUED –
– When the interior has cooled to a Defrosting For type A climate control system, in
comfortable temperature S04AH
this state:
– You cannot stop the air condi-
WARNING tioner compressor by pressing the
air conditioner button.
Continued operation in the ON posi-
– You cannot select the recircula-
tion may fog up the windows. Switch
tion mode by pressing the air inlet
to the OFF position as soon as the
selection button.
outside conditions are no longer
. For types B and C climate control
dusty.
system, after defrosting the windshield
by pressing the defroster button “ ”,
pressing the button again returns the
& To turn off the climate control system to the setting that had been
system selected before the defroster was acti-
S04AJ07
To turn off the climate control system: vated.
. Type A: Select the “OFF” position using Select the “ ” or “ ” mode to defrost or
the fan speed control dial. dehumidify the windshield and front door
. Type B and C: Press the ON/OFF windows.
button.
NOTE
. When the “ ” or “ ” mode is
selected, the air conditioner compres-
sor operates automatically regardless
of the position of the air conditioner
button to defrost the windshield more
quickly. However the indicator on the
air conditioner button may not illumi-
nate. At the same time, the air inlet
selection is automatically set to the
outside air mode.
Operating tips for heater and allow outside air to circulate into the any problem with the air conditioning
heated interior. This results in quicker system.
air conditioner cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the
S04AD
& Cleaning ventilation grille windows closed during the operation of the & Air conditioner compressor
S04AD01 air conditioner for maximum cooling effi- shut-off when engine is
ciency. heavily loaded
S04AD06
To improve acceleration and gas mileage,
& Lubrication oil circulation in the air conditioner compressor is designed 4
the refrigerant circuit to temporarily shut off during air condi-
S04AD03
Operate the air conditioner compressor at tioner operation whenever the accelerator
a low engine speed (at idle or low driving is fully depressed such as during rapid
speeds) a few minutes each month during acceleration or when driving on a steep
the off-season to circulate its oil. upgrade.
3. Replace the cabin air filter with a new 4. Reinstall the glove box, and connect
one and then reinstall the cover. the damper shaft.
5. Close the glove box.
2. Remove the cabin air filter according to CAUTION
the following procedure in order to prevent
dust on the air cleaner from falling to the The arrow mark on the filter must
inside of its housing. point UP.
(1) Pinch both tabs and remove the
filter cover.
(2) Gently tilt down the end of the filter
and slowly pull it out 0.4 in (1 cm).
(3) Slowly pull out the rest of the filter.
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Audio
Antenna ................................................................... 5-2 Roof antenna (for Shark fin type) ............................5-2
S05
Roof antenna (for Rod type) ................................... 5-2 Audio set ................................................................. 5-3
5-2 Audio/Antenna
CAUTION
. Be sure to remove the antenna
rod before entering garages,
parking towers and other loca-
tions with low ceilings.
. Remove the antenna rod before
washing your car at a car wash. If
the antenna rod remains at-
1) Unscrew
tached, it may scratch the roof.
2) Remove
. When reinstalling the removed
antenna rod, be sure to fully The roof antenna is installed on the roof. The roof antenna is installed on the roof.
tighten it. The antenna rod can be removed by
unscrewing it from its base.
Audio set
S05AC
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Interior equipment
Interior lights........................................................... 6-2 Floor mat ............................................................... 6-12
S06
Map lights.............................................................. 6-2 Assist grip............................................................. 6-12
Dome light ............................................................. 6-2 Coat hook.............................................................. 6-13
Cargo area light ..................................................... 6-3 Shopping bag hook .............................................. 6-14
Rear gate light (if equipped) ................................... 6-3 Cargo area cover (if equipped)............................ 6-14
OFF delay timer ..................................................... 6-3 Using the cover .................................................... 6-14
Sun visors ............................................................... 6-4 To remove the cover housing................................ 6-15
Sun visor extension plate (if equipped) .................. 6-4 Stowage of the cargo area cover........................... 6-15
Vanity mirror.......................................................... 6-5 To install the cover housing.................................. 6-16
Vanity mirror with light (if equipped) ...................... 6-5 Cargo tie-down hooks (if equipped) ................... 6-16
Storage compartment ............................................. 6-5 Front View Monitor (if equipped)......................... 6-16
Glove box .............................................................. 6-6 How to access the Front View Monitor .................. 6-17 6
Center console ...................................................... 6-6 How to cancel the Front View Monitor................... 6-17
Cup holders ........................................................... 6-6 How to adjust the display contrast and
Bottle holders ........................................................ 6-7 brightness ......................................................... 6-18
Accessory power outlets........................................ 6-7 Range of image on screen .................................... 6-18
Use with a cigarette lighter (dealer option) ............. 6-9 Guiding line.......................................................... 6-19
USB power supply .................................................. 6-9 Handling of camera .............................................. 6-19
How to use the USB power supply ........................ 6-10 Rear view camera ................................................. 6-20
Ashtray (dealer option)......................................... 6-11
using the remote keyless entry transmitter. & Rear gate light (if equipped) “DOOR” position, the light will automati-
Refer to “Remote keyless entry system” S06AA04 cally turn on and turn off depending on the
F2-17. locking and unlocking of the doors, the
. The ignition switch is turned from the opening and closing of the doors including
“ACC” position to the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi- the rear gate, as well as the position of the
tion. ignition switch.
CAUTION
To block out glare, swing down the visors. With the sun visor positioned over the side Do not pull out the extension plate
To use the sun visor at a side window, window, you can use the sun visor exten- with the sun visor positioned over
swing it down and move it sideways. sion plate to prevent glare through the gap the windshield. The extension plate
between the sun visor and center pillar. To would obstruct your view of the
use the extension plate, pull it toward the rearview mirror.
rear of the vehicle. When you have
finished using it, stow it by pushing it
toward the front of the vehicle.
& Vanity mirror & Vanity mirror with light (if Storage compartment
S06AC03
equipped) S06AD
S06AC02
CAUTION
CAUTION CAUTION
Keep the vanity mirror cover closed
while the car is being driven to avoid Keep the vanity mirror cover closed . Always keep the storage com-
being temporarily blinded by the while the car is being driven to avoid partment closed while driving to
glare of bright light. being distracted by the light. reduce the risk of injury in the
event of a sudden stop or an
accident.
. Do not store spray cans, contain-
ers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous 6
items in the storage compart-
ment.
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the To use the vanity mirror, swing down the
sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover. sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.
The light beside the vanity mirror illumi-
nates when the mirror cover is opened.
NOTE
Use of the vanity mirror light for a long
period of time while the engine is not
running can cause battery discharge.
– CONTINUED –
& Glove box & Center console and/or your passengers. Spilled
S06AD01 S06AD02
The center console box provides a storage beverages may also damage up-
space. holstery or carpets.
. When a cup in the rear passen-
ger’s cup holder contains a bev-
erage, do not fold down the rear
seatback. Otherwise, the bever-
age could spill and, if the bev-
erage is hot, it could scald you
and/or your passengers.
6
Rear passenger’s cup holder (if equipped) The bottle holder equipped on each door
A dual cup holder is built into the armrest. trim can be used to hold beverage bottles
and other items.
& Bottle holders
S06AD17
CAUTION
. Do not pick up a bottle from the Power outlet below the climate control
bottle holder or put a bottle in the dials
holder while you are driving, as
this may distract you and lead to
an accident.
. When placing a beverage in a
bottle holder, make sure it is
capped. Otherwise, the beverage
could spill when opening/closing
the door or while driving and, if
the beverage is hot, it could scald
you and/or your passengers.
– CONTINUED –
& Use with a cigarette lighter cigarette lighter plug in the sock- USB power supply
(dealer option) et. Doing so may cause a short- S06AY
S06AF01 circuit and overheating, resulting
To use the accessory power outlet as a
in a fire. CAUTION
cigarette lighter socket, purchase the
cigarette lighter plug, which is an optional . If the socket is ever used for a . The specification of a USB term-
accessory. A cigarette lighter plug is plug-in accessory such as a cell inal that can be used is the A-
available from your SUBARU dealer. phone, that may damage the type. If a different specification of
The cigarette lighter operates only when portion of the socket’s internal terminal is connected, power
the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” mechanism that causes a cigar- supply or charging may not be
position. ette lighter plug to “pop out” after possible, or the device may mal-
its lighter element is heated. function.
To use the cigarette lighter, push in the
Therefore, do not place a cigar-
knob and wait a few moments. It will
ette lighter plug in a socket that . There is a risk that a connected 6
automatically spring up when ready for device may malfunction or data
has been used, even once, to
use. may be damaged. The connec-
power a plug-in accessory. Doing
so may cause the plug to stick tion of a device shall be per-
WARNING formed at your responsibility.
and overheat, creating a potential
To avoid being burned, never grasp fire hazard. . To avoid an electric shock or a
the lighter by the end with the malfunction, observe the follow-
heating element. Doing so could ing precautions.
result in injury and could also da- – Do not connect a USB hub.
mage the heating element. – Do not insert any metal or
other foreign object into the
USB terminal.
CAUTION
– Do not spill water or other
. Do not hold the lighter pushed in, liquid on the USB terminal.
because it will overheat. . Be careful not to pull the con-
. The electrical power socket is nected cable. Doing so could
originally designed to use a gen- break the USB terminal and the
uine SUBARU cigarette lighter connected device.
plug. Do not use a non-genuine
– CONTINUED –
Floor mat . Do not use more than one floor Assist grip
S06AJ mat. S06BD
1) Assist grip
CAUTION Retaining pins are located on the driver’s
The assist grip is to be held to support the
side floor.
If the floor mat slips forward and body of the passengers when they are in
The floor mat should be properly secured the seat and the vehicle is moving.
interferes with the movement of the using the built-in grommets, by placing the
pedals during driving, it could cause grommets over the pins and pushing them
an accident. Observe the following WARNING
downward.
precautions to prevent the floor mat Do not hold the assist grip when
from slipping forward. getting up from the seat. Holding
. Be sure to use a genuine and pulling the assist grip in the
SUBARU floor mat or an equiva- wrong way could break the grip and
lent designed with grommets in possibly cause injury.
the correct locations.
. Make sure that the driver’s floor
mat is placed in its proper loca- CAUTION
tion and is correctly secured on
Do not attach heavy objects to the
its retaining pins.
assist grip. Doing so could break it
CAUTION
Never hang anything on the coat
hook that might obstruct the driver’s
view or that could cause injury in
sudden stops or in a collision. And
do not hang items on the coat hook
that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or more.
& To remove the cover housing & Stowage of the cargo area
S06AK02
1. Rewind the cover. cover
S06AK04
The cargo area cover can be stowed in
under the cargo floor.
6
2. Stow the cover housing in the cargo
area end.
2. Push the cover housing to the right
side and shorten it.
3. Take it off the retainer. 1. Raise and fold the rear end of the cargo
floor board.
& To install the cover housing Cargo tie-down hooks Front View Monitor (if
S06AK05
The right end of the cargo area cover is a (if equipped) equipped)
sliding structure. S06AM S06BA
1. Insert the right end of the cover into the The cargo area is equipped with two or The image from the camera mounted
recessed portion with the arrow mark four tie-down hooks so that cargo can be inside the front grille is displayed in the
facing upward. secured with a cargo net or ropes. multi-function display (color LCD). This
When using the front tie-down hooks, turn eliminates blind spots and allows the driver
2. Hold the cover housing securely and
them down out of the storing recesses. to check the forward direction of both
insert the left end of the cover into the
sides.
recessed portion.
CAUTION
WARNING
The cargo tie-down hooks are de-
signed only for securing light cargo. . Never rely on only the Front View
Never try to secure cargo that ex- Monitor when driving the vehicle.
ceeds the capacity of the hooks. The The image on the monitor screen
maximum load capacity is 22 lbs (10 may be different from the actual
kg) per hook. situation. If you drive the vehicle
by viewing only the monitor im-
age, a collision or an unexpected
accident may occur. When driv- & How to access the Front View & How to cancel the Front View
ing the vehicle, always check the Monitor Monitor
traffic around the vehicle directly S06BA01 S06BA02
– CONTINUED –
. Under an artificial light such as a & Guiding line . The camera unit is a waterproof
fluorescent lamp, sodium-vapor lamp S06BA04
structure. Do not attempt to re-
or mercury lamp, the lighted portion move, disassemble or modify the
may look like it is flickering (flicker unit.
phenomenon). . Do not rub strongly or polish the
. While the display has cooled down, camera lens with a hard brush or
the image may leave traces or become abrasive compounds. The lens
darker than usual, causing a difficulty may be scratched resulting in an
in viewing the screen. Always check the adverse effect to the camera
traffic around the vehicle directly with image.
your eyes while driving the vehicle.
. The following incidents should not . The camera lens is made of glass
be deemed a malfunction. or plastic. Do not allow any 6
– The camera lens may become organic solvent, body wax, oil
foggy when the humidity is high on film remover or glass coating
1) Guiding line agent to become attached on the
a rainy day. 2) Warning message lens surface. If any becomes
– The light from a vehicle or build-
The guiding line that indicates the width attached, remove it immediately.
ing located ahead may be reflected
towards the camera image while and the front end of your vehicle is . Do not expose the camera lens to
driving at night. displayed on the display. any sudden temperature change,
– In a dark place or while driving at for example, spraying hot water
night, the camera image may be & Handling of camera on it in cold weather.
S06BA05
adjusted to make noises less visi- . Do not apply the water jet of a
ble. Therefore, the image may look CAUTION high pressure washer to the cam-
like a monochromatic image or the era or the surrounding area when
image colors may differ from the Observe the following instructions. cleaning the vehicle. The impact
actual colors. The camera image Otherwise, the system may malfunc- by the strong water pressure may
may be deteriorated in regard to tion. cause the camera to come off.
sharpness at the center and four . Do not apply any strong impact to Also, water may enter inside the
corners of the screen. This is not a the camera such as banging it or camera and cause a malfunction.
malfunction. hitting it with an object. The . If the camera is exposed to any
mounting angle may change. impact, it may lead to malfunction
– CONTINUED –
NOTE
If the camera lens is contaminated, no
sharp image will be available. When the
camera is contaminated with water
drops, snow or mud, wash it with water
and wipe away any moisture with a soft
cloth. If it heavily gets dirty, wash it with
a neutral detergent.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) Auto Start Stop system (if equipped) ................. 7-57
system ................................................................ 7-37 System operation ................................................. 7-57
Steps to take if EBD system malfunctions ............. 7-38 Displaying the Auto Start Stop system status ....... 7-61
Vehicle Dynamics Control system....................... 7-39 System warning.................................................... 7-61
Safety precautions ................................................ 7-39 BSD/RCTA (if equipped)....................................... 7-62
System features .................................................... 7-39 System features.................................................... 7-62
Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor............. 7-40 System operation ................................................. 7-65
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch ................... 7-40 BSD/RCTA approach indicator light/warning
X-MODE (if equipped) ........................................... 7-42 buzzer ............................................................... 7-66
To activate/deactivate the X-MODE ........................ 7-43 BSD/RCTA OFF indicator ...................................... 7-68
Hill descent control function ................................. 7-44 BSD/RCTA warning indicator ................................ 7-68
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) BSD/RCTA OFF switch.......................................... 7-69
(U.S.-spec. models)............................................ 7-46 Certification for the BSD/RCTA ............................. 7-70
Parking your vehicle............................................. 7-47 Handling of radar sensors .................................... 7-71
Parking brake ....................................................... 7-47 Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
Parking tips .......................................................... 7-48 (if equipped) ....................................................... 7-71
Hill start assist system......................................... 7-49 Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
overview............................................................ 7-72
To activate/deactivate the Hill start assist
system................................................................ 7-51 Operating conditions ............................................ 7-74
Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
OFF indicator light .............................................. 7-52 operation........................................................... 7-76
Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking
Cruise control (if equipped) ................................. 7-52 (RAB) system operation..................................... 7-79
To set cruise control ............................................. 7-52 Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
To temporarily cancel the cruise control................ 7-54 ON/OFF setting.................................................. 7-79
To turn off the cruise control................................. 7-55 RAB warning indicator.......................................... 7-81
To change the cruising speed ............................... 7-55 Handling of the sonar sensors .............................. 7-81
Cruise control indicator light................................. 7-56
Cruise control set indicator light ........................... 7-56
below 87 AKI (90 RON). Use of Research Octane and Motor Octane num- Your use of gasoline with detergent ad-
bers and is commonly referred to as the ditives will help prevent deposits from
those fuels are not recom-
Anti Knock Index (AKI). forming in your engine and fuel system.
7
mended.
! Unleaded gasoline This helps keep your engine in tune and
S07AA0104 your emission control system working
The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed properly, and is a way of doing your part
& Fuel requirements to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler
S07AA01 for cleaner air. If you continuously use a
The engine is designed to operate using nozzle. Under no circumstances should high quality fuel with the proper detergent
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating leaded gasoline be used because it will and other additives, you should never
of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher. damage the emission control system and need to add any fuel system cleaning
may impair driveability and fuel economy. agents to your fuel tank.
! Mexico only
Add a bottle of genuine SUBARU fuel
S07AA0121
! Reformulated gasoline
S07AA0128 Many gasolines are now blended with
additive to the fuel every 15,000 km (9,000 SUBARU supports the use of reformulated materials called oxygenates. Use of these
miles). Refer to an authorized SUBARU gasoline when available. Reformulated fuels can also help keep the air cleaner.
dealer for details. gasoline has been blended to burn more Oxygenated blend fuels, such as ethanol
cleanly and reduce vehicle emissions. (ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in your
! Fuel octane rating
S07AA0103
! MMT vehicle, but should contain no more than
Using a gasoline with a lower octane rating
Some gasoline contains an octane-enhan-
S07AA0106
15% ethanol for the proper operation of
can cause persistent and heavy knocking,
cing additive called MMT (Methylcyclo- your SUBARU.
which can damage the engine. Do not be
– CONTINUED –
Do not use any gasoline that contains under these conditions. Do not use any gasoline that contains
more than 15% ethanol, including from any . If undesirable driveability problems are more than 10% ethanol, including from any
pump labeled E30, E50 or E85 (which are experienced and you suspect they may be pump labeled E15, E30, E50 or E85 (which
only some examples of fuel containing fuel related, try a different brand of gaso- are only some examples of fuel containing
more than 15% ethanol). line before seeking service at your more than 10% ethanol).
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are SUBARU dealer. In addition, some gasoline suppliers are
now producing reformulated gasolines, . Fuel system damage or driveability now producing reformulated gasolines,
which are designed to reduce vehicle problems which result from the use of which are designed to reduce vehicle
emissions. SUBARU approves the use of improper fuel are not covered under the emissions. SUBARU approves the use of
reformulated gasoline. SUBARU Limited Warranty. reformulated gasoline.
! Gasoline for cleaner air (2.5 L engine
If you are not sure what the fuel contains, If you are not sure what the fuel contains,
models)
you should ask your service station op- S07AA0107 you should ask your service station op-
erators if their gasolines contain deter- Your use of gasoline with detergent ad- erators if their gasolines contain deter-
gents and oxygenates and if they have ditives will help prevent deposits from gents and oxygenates and if they have
been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis- forming in your engine and fuel system. been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis-
sions. This helps keep your engine in tune and sions.
your emission control system working
As additional guidance, only use fuels properly, and is a way of doing your part As additional guidance, only use fuels
suited for your vehicle as explained in the for cleaner air. If you continuously use a suited for your vehicle as explained in the
following. high quality fuel with the proper detergent following.
. Fuel should be unleaded and have an and other additives, you should never . Fuel should be unleaded and have an
octane rating no lower than that specified need to add any fuel system cleaning octane rating no lower than that specified
in this manual. agents to your fuel tank. in this manual.
. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is . Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is
Many gasolines are now blended with
sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline. sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.
materials called oxygenates. Use of these
Methanol can be used in your vehicle Methanol can be used in your vehicle
fuels can also help keep the air cleaner.
ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel
Oxygenated blend fuels, such as ethanol
mixture AND if it is accompanied by mixture AND if it is accompanied by
(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in your
sufficient quantities of the proper cosol- sufficient quantities of the proper cosol-
vehicle, but should contain no more than
vents and corrosion inhibitors required to vents and corrosion inhibitors required to
10% ethanol for the proper operation of
prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not
your SUBARU.
use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT
– CONTINUED –
firmly and turn it slowly to the left. fully inserted, its automatic stop-
Do not remove the cap quickly. ping mechanism may not func-
Fuel may be under pressure and tion, causing fuel to overflow the
spray out of the fuel filler neck, tank and creating a fire hazard.
especially in hot weather. If you . Stop refueling when the auto-
hear a hissing sound while you matic stop mechanism on the
are removing the cap, wait for the fuel nozzle activates. If you con-
sound to stop and then slowly tinue to add fuel, temperature
open the cap to prevent fuel from changes or other conditions
spraying out and creating a fire may cause fuel to overflow from
hazard. the tank and create a fire hazard.
Otherwise, the painted surface . Do not let fuel spill on the exterior State emission testing
could be damaged. surfaces of the vehicle. Because (U.S. only)
fuel may damage the paint, be S07AB
sure to wipe off any spilled fuel
NOTE quickly. Paint damage caused by WARNING
spilled fuel is not covered under
. You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler Only use a four-wheel dynamometer
lid is located on the right side of the . Always use a genuine SUBARU when testing an All-Wheel Drive
vehicle. fuel filler cap. If you use the (AWD) model.
. If the fuel filler cap is not tightened wrong cap, it may not fit or have Testing of an AWD model must
until it clicks or if the tether is caught proper venting and your fuel tank NEVER be performed on a single
under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE and emission control system two-wheel dynamometer. Attempt-
warning light/malfunction indicator may be damaged. It could also ing to do so will result in uncon-
light may illuminate. Refer to “CHECK lead to fuel spillage and a fire. trolled vehicle movement and may
ENGINE warning light/Malfunction in- . Immediately put fuel in the tank cause an accident or injuries to
7
dicator light” F3-15. whenever the low fuel warning persons nearby.
light illuminates. Engine misfires
CAUTION as a result of an empty tank could
cause damage to the engine. CAUTION
. Never add any cleaning agents to Continuing to operate your vehi-
the fuel tank. The addition of a cle at an extremely low fuel level . At state inspection time, remem-
cleaning agent may cause da- may result in a reduction of ber to tell your inspection or
mage to the fuel system. engine performance. service station in advance not to
place your SUBARU AWD vehicle
. After refueling, turn the cap to the on a two-wheel dynamometer.
right until it clicks to ensure that Otherwise, serious transmission
it is fully tightened. If the cap is damage will result.
not securely tightened, fuel may
leak out while the vehicle is being . Resultant vehicle damage due to
driven or fuel spillage could oc- improper testing is not covered
cur in the event of an accident, under the SUBARU Limited War-
creating a fire hazard. ranty and is the responsibility of
the state inspection program or
– CONTINUED –
its contractors or licensees. served, there are no stored diagnostic on a dynamometer, tell your emission
trouble codes, and the OBDII readiness inspector not to place your SUBARU
California and a number of federal states monitors are all complete. AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam-
have Inspection/Maintenance programs to . A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection if ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis-
inspect your vehicle’s emission control the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is not sion damage will result.
system. If your vehicle does not pass this properly operating (light is illuminated or is The U.S. Environmental Protection
test, some states may deny renewal of not working due to faulty LED [Light Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel
your vehicle’s registration. Emitting Diode]) or there is one or more dynamometers in their emission testing
diagnostic trouble codes stored in the program have EXEMPTED SUBARU
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer
vehicle’s computer. AWD vehicles from the portion of the
that monitors the performance of the
engine’s emission control system. Certi- . A state emission inspection may reject testing program that involves a two-wheel
fied emission inspectors will inspect the (not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of dynamometer. There are some states that
On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as OBDII system readiness monitors “NOT use four-wheel dynamometers in their
part of the state emission inspection READY” is greater than one. If the testing program. When properly used, this
process. The OBDII system is designed vehicle’s battery has been recently re- equipment should not damage a SUBARU
to detect engine and transmission pro- placed or disconnected, the OBDII system AWD vehicle.
blems that might cause the vehicle emis- inspection may indicate that the vehicle is
not ready for the emission test. Under this Under no circumstances should the rear
sions to exceed allowable limits. OBDII
condition, the vehicle driver should be wheels be jacked off the ground, nor
inspections apply to all 1996 model year
instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a should the driveshaft be disconnected in
and newer passenger cars and trucks.
few days to reset the readiness monitors an attempt to bypass AWD for state
Over 30 states plus the District of Colum-
and return for an emission re-inspection. emission testing. An AWD vehicle must
bia have implemented emission inspection
. Owners of rejected or failing vehicles be tested using an AWD dynamometer
of the OBDII system.
should contact their SUBARU Dealer for with all 4 wheels driven and loaded.
. The inspection of the OBDII system
consists of a visual operational check of service.
the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/mal- Some states still use dynamometers in
function indicator light (MIL) and an ex- their emission inspection program. A
amination of the OBDII system with an dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like
electronic scan tool. testing device that allows your vehicle’s
. A vehicle passes the OBDII system wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in
inspection if proper operation of the one place. Prior to your vehicle being put
“CHECK ENGINE” warning light is ob-
– CONTINUED –
7-10 Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without push-button start system)
Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without push-button start system) 7-11
the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”/ position and check the operation of the (4) If the engine still refuses to start,
“OFF” position and wait for at least 10 warning and indicator lights. Refer to contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
seconds. Then fully depress the accel- “Warning and indicator” F3-12. for assistance.
erator pedal and turn the ignition 5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” 6. Confirm that all warning and indicator
switch to the “START” position. If the position without depressing the accelera- lights have turned off after the engine has
engine starts, quickly release the ac- tor pedal. Release the key immediately started. The fuel injection system auto-
celerator pedal. after the engine has started. matically lowers the idle speed as the
(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn engine warms up.
the ignition switch again to the “LOCK”/ If the engine does not start, try the
“OFF” position. After waiting for 10 following procedure. While the engine is warming up, make sure
seconds or longer, turn the ignition (1) Turn the ignition switch to the that the select lever is at the “P” or “N”
switch to the “START” position without “LOCK”/“OFF” position and wait for at position and that the parking brake is
depressing the accelerator pedal. least 10 seconds. After checking that applied.
(4) If the engine still fails to start, the parking brake is firmly set, turn the
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer ignition switch to the “START” position CAUTION 7
for assistance. while depressing the accelerator pedal
slightly (approximately a quarter of the If you restart the engine while the
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator vehicle is moving, shift the select
full stroke). Release the accelerator
lights have turned off after the engine has lever into the “N” position. Do not
pedal as soon as the engine starts.
started. The fuel injection system auto- attempt to place the select lever of a
matically lowers the idle speed as the (2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”/ moving vehicle into the “P” position.
engine warms up.
“OFF” position and wait for at least 10
! CVT models seconds. Then fully depress the accel- & Stopping the engine
S07BD0104 erator pedal and turn the ignition S07BD02
The ignition switch should be turned off
1. Apply the parking brake. switch to the “START” position. If the only when the vehicle is stopped and the
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces- engine starts, quickly release the ac- engine is idling.
sories. celerator pedal.
3. Shift the select lever to the “P” or “N” (3) If this fails to start the engine, turn WARNING
position (preferably the “P” position). the ignition switch again to the “LOCK”/
The starter motor will only operate when “OFF” position. After waiting for 10 Do not stop the engine when the
the select lever is at the “P” or “N” position. seconds or longer, turn the ignition vehicle is moving. This will cause
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” switch to the “START” position without loss of power to the power steering
depressing the accelerator pedal. and the brake booster, making steer-
– CONTINUED –
7-12 Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system)
ing and braking more difficult. It If you cannot unlock the steering wheel by Starting and stopping engine
could also result in accidental acti- doing the steps, contact your nearest
SUBARU dealer.
(models with push-button
vation of the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-
tion on the ignition switch, causing start system)
S07BE
the steering wheel to lock.
& Safety precautions
S07BE06
Refer to “Safety precautions” F2-3.
& Steering lock
S07BD07
After stopping the engine and the key is & Operating range for push-
removed from ignition switch, the steering button start system
S07BE01
wheel will be locked due to the steering Refer to “Operating range for push-button
lock function. start system” F3-6.
When the engine is restarted, the steering
lock will be automatically released. & Starting engine
S07BE03
! When the steering lock cannot be
released WARNING
S07BD0701
When you cannot unlock the steering . There are some general precau-
wheel, perform the following steps. tions when starting the engine.
1. Check that the parking brake is ap- Carefully read the precautions
plied. described in “Starting engine”
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces- F7-10.
sories. . If the indicator on the push-but-
3. Check that the select lever is set in the ton ignition switch flashes in
“P” position. green after the engine has
4. Depress the brake pedal and keep it started, never drive the vehicle.
depressed. The steering is still locked, and it
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” may result in an accident.
position while turning the steering wheel
left and right.
Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system) 7-13
7-14 Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system)
! MT models however, for safety reasons, start in the “P” the engine.
S07BE0301
position.
1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the & Stopping engine
driver’s seat. 4. Depress the brake pedal until the S07BE04
operation indicator on the push-button 1. Stop the vehicle completely.
2. Apply the parking brake.
ignition switch turns green. When starting 2. Move the select lever to the “P”
3. Shift the shift lever to neutral. with the select lever in the “N” position, the position (CVT models).
4. Depress the brake pedal. indicator does not turn green.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch.
5. Depress the clutch pedal until the 5. While depressing the brake pedal, The engine will stop, and the power will be
indicator on the push-button ignition switch press the push-button ignition switch. switched off.
turns green.
6. While depressing the clutch pedal, NOTE
press the push-button ignition switch. WARNING
. While pressing the select lever but-
ton in, the indicator on the push-button . Do not touch the push-button
NOTE ignition switch will not turn green even ignition switch during driving.
In case the engine does not start by the when the select lever is in the “P” When the push-button ignition
normal engine start procedure, move position. switch is operated as follows,
the shift lever to the neutral position, . In case the engine does not start by the engine will stop.
and switch the power to “ACC”. De- the normal engine start procedure,
press the clutch pedal, and press the move the select lever to the “P” posi- – The switch is pressed and held
push-button ignition switch for at least tion, and switch the power to “ACC”. for 3 seconds or longer.
15 seconds. The engine may start. Only Depress the brake pedal, and press the – The switch is pressed briefly 3
use this engine start procedure in case push-button ignition switch for at least times or more in succession.
of emergency. 15 seconds. The engine may start. Only When the engine stops, the brake
use this engine start procedure in case booster will not function. A great-
! CVT models of emergency.
S07BE0304 er foot pressure will be required
1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the . When the engine is not started, the on the brake pedal.
driver’s seat. brake pedal may feel stiff. In such a
The power steering system will
2. Apply the parking brake. case, depress the brake pedal more
not operate either. A greater force
3. Shift the select lever into the “P” forcefully than usual. Check that the
will be required to steer, and it
position. The engine can also start when operation indicator on the push-button
may result in an accident.
the select lever is in the “N” position, ignition switch turns green, and press
the push-button ignition switch to start
Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system) 7-15
. If the engine stops during driving, & When access key fob does When you cannot restart the engine due to
do not operate the push-button not operate properly the steering lock, check the status of
ignition switch or open any of the S07BE05 operation indicator and perform the follow-
Refer to “Access key fob – if access key ing steps.
doors until the vehicle is stopped fob does not operate properly” F9-17.
in a safe location. It is dangerous
! Operation indicator flashing in
because the steering lock may be
activated. Stop the vehicle in a & Steering lock green
S07BE070101
S07BE07
safe place, and contact a After stopping the engine and any door 1. Check that the select lever is set in the
SUBARU dealer immediately. including the rear gate is opened, the “P” position.
steering wheel will be locked due to the 2. Depress the brake pedal and keep it.
steering lock function. 3. Press the push-button ignition switch
CAUTION When the engine is restarted, the steering while turning the steering wheel left and
lock will be automatically released. right.
For CVT models
! When the steering lock cannot be
. Do not stop the engine while the
released ! Operation indicator flashing in 7
select lever is in a position other S07BE0701 orange
than the “P” position. S07BE070102
There may be a malfunction in the steering
. If the engine is stopped while the lock function. Immediately contact your
select lever is in a position other nearest SUBARU dealer.
than the “P” position, the power
will be in “ACC”. If the vehicle is
left in this condition, the battery
may be discharged.
NOTE
Although you can stop the engine by
operating the push-button ignition
switch, do not stop the engine during
1) Operation indicator
driving except in an emergency.
2) Push-button ignition switch
Remote engine start system mote engine start system. ! Starting the engine
S07AZ2101
(dealer option) NOTE NOTE
S07AZ
. The length of time for which it is All vehicle doors (including rear gate)
acceptable to allow the engine to and the engine hood must be closed
WARNING
remain idling may be bound by local prior to activating the remote engine
. There are some general precau- laws and regulations. Check the local start system. Any open entry point will
tions when starting the engine. rules when using the remote engine prevent starting or cause the engine to
Carefully read the precautions start system. stop.
described in “General precau- . When taking your vehicle in for
tions when starting engine” F7- service, it is recommended that you The remote engine start system is acti-
10. inform the service personnel that your vated by pressing the fob button on your
vehicle is equipped with a remote remote engine starter transceiver (fob)
. Do not remote start a vehicle in an twice within 3 seconds. If the fob is within
enclosed environment (e.g. engine start system.
operating range of the system and the start
closed garage). Prolonged opera- request is received, the following phenom-
tion of a motor vehicle in an & Remote engine starter trans- ena will occur.
enclosed environment can cause ceiver (fob) . The fob flashes and beeps once.
a harmful build-up of Carbon S07AZ21
. The side marker lights, tail lights, and ! Remote start safety features
parking lights flash once. S07AZ2103
NOTE
For safety and security reasons, the . If the alarm system is armed at the
While the engine is idling via the remote remote engine start system will prevent time of remote engine starter activation
engine start system, the following phe- starting (or stop the engine if running) and (the security indicator light on the
nomena will occur. sound the horn twice if any of the following combination meter is flashing), the
. The side marker lights, tail lights, and conditions is detected. In addition, the fob alarm system will remain armed
parking lights remain illuminated. will flash and beep 3 times. throughout the remote start run cycle.
. The fob button flashes once every 3 . The total run-time has exceeded 20 . If the alarm system is disarmed at
seconds. minutes. the time of remote engine starter acti-
. The power windows are disabled. . The brake pedal is depressed. vation (the security indicator light on
. A key is in the ignition switch. the combination meter is not flashing),
If the engine turns over but does not start . The engine hood is open. the alarm system will remain disarmed
(or starts and stalls) the remote engine throughout the remote start run cycle.
. The engine idle speed exceeds 3,500
start system will power off and then RPM. 7
attempt to start the engine 3 additional ! Remote start operation - fob con-
. The security alarm is triggered. firmation
times. The system will not attempt to S07AZ2104
restart the engine if it determines a vehicle . The select lever is not in the “P” position Your remote engine starter fob is a
malfunction is preventing starting. If the (CVT models). bidirectional transceiver that can confirm
engine does not start after 3 additional system operation with several different
If the system detects any door (including
attempts, the remote engine start request visual and audible indications. The fob’s
the rear gate) open during operation, it will
will be aborted. LED-backlit button and internal piezo
prevent starting or stop the engine, and
buzzer will indicate status of the system
! Stopping the engine sound the horn and flash side marker
S07AZ2102 using the following flash and beep se-
Press and hold the fob button for at least 2 lights, tail lights, and parking lights 6 times.
quences, provided the fob is within opera-
seconds to stop the engine. The fob will In addition to the items above, if the tional range of the system.
flash and beep three times, indicating the vehicle’s engine management system
engine has stopped. If the stop request is determines there is a safety risk due to a
not received (for example, if the user is too vehicle-related problem, the vehicle will
far away from the vehicle), the fob will power down and the horn will sound 3
continue to flash once every 3 seconds. times.
The system will automatically stop the
engine after 15 minutes.
– CONTINUED –
Fob Indication
Precondition Meaning
Flash Beep
Fob start button is being pressed Continuous while button is — The fob is transmitting an RF signal
held down
1 flash 1 beep Engine start request received
2 flashes 2 beeps Engine started successfully
User attempts to start engine by pressing fob 1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling
button twice within 3 sec
3 flashes 3 beeps Vehicle is in range but engine not started
2 long flashes — Vehicle not in range (engine not started)
1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling
Engine idling by remote engine start operation Engine stopped by system timeout or for safety
3 flashes 3 beeps reasons (see sections above)
User attempts to stop engine by pressing and 3 flashes 3 beeps Engine stopped by user request
holding fob button for at least 2 sec 1 flash every 3 sec — Stop request not received. Engine still idling.
and turn it to the “START” position to once while depressing the brake pedal desired (the system will accept up to eight
restart the engine. before driving your vehicle. The remote transmitters). New remote engine start
engine starter transceiver (fob) will flash transmitters can be programmed accord-
& Entering the vehicle while it is and beep 3 times to indicate that the ing to the following procedure.
running via remote start remote start system has been shut down. 1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s
(models with “keyless access door must remain opened throughout the
with push-button start sys- & Entering the vehicle following entire process).
tem”) remote engine start shut- 2. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
S07AZ24 down 3. Turn the ignition switch to “ON” then
1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the S07AZ10
“LOCK”/“OFF”, back to “ON” then “LOCK”/
keyless access function and remote key- An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is
opened by the remote keyless entry “OFF”, back to “ON” then “LOCK”/“OFF”,
less entry system. then back to “ON” again and leave the
transmitter within a few seconds immedi-
NOTE ately following remote engine start shut- ignition “ON” throughout the programming
down. process.
If the vehicle’s doors are unlocked
manually using the key, the vehicle’s 4. The system will flash the side marker
alarm system will trigger (if the alarm & Pre-heating or pre-cooling lights, tail lights and parking lights and
system is armed prior to activating the the interior of the vehicle honk the horn three times, indicating that
remote engine start system) and the S07AZ04 the system has entered the transmitter
Before exiting the vehicle, set the tem- learn mode.
engine will turn off. Perform either of perature controls to the desired setting and
the following procedures to disarm the 5. Press and release the “ ” button on
operation. After the system starts the
alarm system. Refer to “Alarm system” the transmitter that you want to program.
engine, the heater or air conditioning will
F2-25. activate and heat or cool the interior to 6. The system will flash the side marker
– Turn the push-button ignition your setting. lights, tail lights and parking lights and
switch to the “ACC” or “ON” posi- honk the horn one time, indicating that the
tion. & Remote transmitter program system has learned the transmitter. Upon
– Press any button on the access successful programming, the remote start
(Remote engine starter confirmation transmitter button will flash
key fob. transceiver)
S07AZ13
one time.
2. Enter the vehicle. The engine will New transmitters can be programmed to 7. Repeat step 5 for any additional
remain running provided the access key the remote engine start system in the transmitters (the system will accept up to
fob is present and detected by the vehicle. event that a transmitter is lost, stolen, eight transmitters).
3. Press the push-button ignition switch damaged or additional transmitters are
8. The system will exit the transmitter moved parts; children could
learn mode if the key is turned to the swallow them.
“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the door is closed . There is a danger of explosion if
or after 2 minutes. an incorrect replacement battery
is used. Replace only with the
& System maintenance same or equivalent type of bat-
S07AZ09
NOTE tery.
For remote engine starter transceiver: . Battery should not be exposed to
In the event that the vehicle’s battery is excessive heat such as sunshine,
replaced, discharged or disconnected, fire or the like.
it will be necessary to start the vehicle a
minimum of one time using the key For models with “keyless access with
prior to activating the remote engine push-button start system”:
1. Remove the small phillips screw lo-
start system. This is required to allow Perform the procedure described in “Re- 7
cated on the back side lower left corner of
the vehicle electronic systems to re- placing battery of access key fob” F11-46.
the transmitter.
synchronize. For remote engine starter transceiver:
2. Carefully pry the remote engine start
The 3-volt lithium battery (model CR-2450) transmitter halves apart using a small flat-
! Changing the battery supplied in your remote engine start
S07AZ0901 head screwdriver.
transmitter should last approximately one
CAUTION year, depending on usage. When the
battery begin to weaken, you will notice a
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on
decrease in range (distance from the
or in the remote engine start
vehicle that your remote control operates).
transmitter when replacing the
Follow the instructions below to change
battery.
the remote engine start transmitter battery.
. Be careful not to damage the
printed circuit board in the re-
mote engine start transmitter
when replacing the battery.
. Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any re-
– CONTINUED –
! U.S.-spec. models
S07AZ2301
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
3. Remove the circuit board from the ence, and (2) this device must accept
bottom half of the case and remove the any interference received, including
battery and replace with new one. Be sure interference that may cause undesired
to observe the (+) sign on the old battery operation.
before removing it to ensure that the new
battery is inserted properly (battery “+”
– CONTINUED –
The engine may, on rare occasions, knock Continuously variable trans- . Never move the vehicle rearward
when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or by inertia with the select lever set
rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This
mission
S07BG
in a forward driving position or
phenomenon is not an indication of a move the vehicle forward by
problem in your vehicle. WARNING inertia with the select lever set
in the “R” position. Doing so may
Do not shift from the “P” or “N” result in an unexpected accident
position into the “D” or “R” position or malfunction.
while depressing the accelerator . When parking the vehicle, first
pedal. This may cause the vehicle securely apply the parking brake
to jump forward or backward. and then place the select lever in
the “P” position. Do not park for a
long time with the select lever in
CAUTION any other position as doing so
could result in a dead battery. 7
. Observe the following precau-
tions. Otherwise, the transmis-
sion could be damaged. & Continuously variable trans-
– Shift into the “P” or “R” posi- mission features
tion only after the vehicle has S07BG06
The continuously variable transmission is
completely stopped. electronically controlled and provides an
– Do not shift from the “D” infinite number of forward speeds and 1
position into the “R” position reverse speed. For some models, it also
or vice versa until the vehicle has a manual mode or an “L” position.
has completely stopped.
. Do not race the engine for more NOTE
than 5 seconds in any position . When the engine coolant tempera-
except the “N” or “P” position ture is still low, the transmission will
when the brake is applied or shift at higher engine speeds than
when chocks are used in the when the coolant temperature is suffi-
wheels. This may cause the ciently high in order to shorten the
transmission fluid to overheat. warm-up time and improve driveability.
– CONTINUED –
too high even if the accelerator pedal is ! N (Neutral) position, depress the accelerator pedal
depressed hard. S07BG0103
This position is for restarting a stalled fully to the floor and hold that position. The
engine. In this position, the transmission is transmission will automatically downshift.
! P (Park) In this case, the transmission will operate
S07BG0101 neutral, meaning that the wheels and
This position is for parking the vehicle and transmission are not locked. Therefore, like a conventional automatic transmis-
starting the engine. In this position, the the vehicle will roll freely, even on the sion. When you release the pedal, the
transmission is mechanically locked to slightest incline unless the parking brake transmission will return to the original gear
prevent the vehicle from rolling freely. or foot brake is applied. position.
When you park the vehicle, first apply the Avoid coasting with the transmission in For models with manual mode, if one of the
parking brake firmly, then shift into the “P” neutral. Engine braking has no effect in shift paddles behind the steering wheel is
position. Do not hold the vehicle with only this condition. operated while driving in the “D” position,
the mechanical friction of the transmission. the transmission will temporarily switch to
WARNING the manual mode. In this mode, you can
To shift the select lever from the “P” shift into any gear position using the shift
position to any other position, you should
Do not drive the vehicle with the paddles. For details about the manual
7
depress the brake pedal fully then move mode, refer to “Selection of manual mode”
select lever in the “N” (neutral)
the select lever. This prevents the vehicle F7-28. Once the vehicle speed stabilizes,
position. Engine braking has no
from lurching when it is started. the transmission will switch from the
effect in this condition and the risk
! R (Reverse) of an accident is consequently in- manual mode back to the “D” position for
S07BG0102
This position is for backing the vehicle. To creased. normal driving.
shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop the
vehicle completely then move the lever to ! D (Drive)
the “R” position while pressing the select S07BG0104
This position is for normal driving. The
lever button in.
transmission shifts automatically and con-
When the ignition switch has been turned tinuously into a suitable gear according to
to the “ACC” position, the movement of the the vehicle speed and the acceleration you
select lever from the “N” to “R” position is require. Also, while driving up and down a
only possible by depressing the brake hill, the transmission assists and controls
pedal. For details, refer to “Shift lock the driving performance and engine brak-
function” F7-30. ing while corresponding to the road grade.
When more acceleration is required in “D”
– CONTINUED –
Type A Type B
1) Upshift indicator 1) Upshift indicator
2) Downshift indicator 2) Downshift indicator
With the vehicle either moving or station- 3) Gear position indicator 3) Gear position indicator
ary, move the select lever from the “D”
position to the “M” position to select the When the manual mode is selected, the
manual mode. gear position indicator and upshift indica-
tor and/or downshift indicator on the
combination meter illuminate.
The gear position indicator shows the
currently selected gear in the 1st-to-8th-
gear range. The upshift and downshift
indicators show when a gear shift is
possible. When the upshift indicator “ ”
illuminates, upshifting is possible. When
the downshift indicator “ ” illuminates,
downshifting is possible. When both in-
dicators illuminate, upshifting and down-
shifting are both possible. When the
vehicle stops (for example, at traffic
signals) the gear will be automatically accidental gear shifting. & Selection of “L” (if equipped)
shifted to the 1st position and the down- S07BG03
– CONTINUED –
. Only the “P” position allows you to turn If the select lever still does not move, refer
the ignition switch from the “ACC” position to “Shift lock release using the shift lock
to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and remove release button” F7-30.
the key from the ignition switch.
If the shift lock cannot be released without
. If the ignition switch is turned to the using the shift lock release button in the
“ACC” position while the select lever is in above cases, there may be a malfunction
the “N” position, the select lever may not in the shift lock system or the vehicle
be moved to the “P” position without control system. Contact a SUBARU dealer
depressing the brake pedal and pressing for an inspection as soon as possible.
the select lever button.
! Shift lock release using the shift
! Shift lock release lock release button
S07BG0402
S07BG0401
If the select lever cannot be operated, turn Perform the following procedure to release
Type B the shift lock.
the ignition switch back to the “ON”
When selected, the indicator “L” will position, then move the select lever to 1. Apply the parking brake and turn the
illuminate on the combination meter. the “P” position with the select lever button ignition switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-
pressed and the brake pedal depressed. tion.
To deselect “L”, move the select lever to
the “D” position. If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, check
& Shift lock function and confirm the following and release the
S07BG04
The shift lock function helps prevent the shift lock accordingly.
improper operation of the select lever. . When the select lever cannot be
. The select lever cannot be operated shifted from “P” to “N”:
unless the ignition switch is turned to the Refer to “Shift lock release using the shift
“ON” position and the brake pedal is lock release button” F7-30.
depressed. . When the select lever cannot be
. The select lever cannot be moved from shifted from “N” to “R”, “P”:
the “P” position to any other position before Place the ignition switch in the “ACC”
the brake pedal is depressed. Depress the position, then move the select lever to the
brake pedal first, and then operate the “P” position with the brake pedal de- 2. Wrap the tip of a flat-head screwdriver
select lever. pressed. with vinyl tape or a cloth and use it to
remove the shift lock cover. The shift lock & Driving tips
release button is located under the shift S07BG05
! For smooth, efficient performance this versatile mode is ideal for normal
driving use. Type A
driving
S07BC0201
The Intelligent (I) mode provides well-
balanced performance with greater fuel
efficiency and smooth driveability without
stress. Power delivery is moderate during
acceleration for maximum fuel efficiency.
This is ideal for around-town driving and
situations that do not require full power
output. It provides better control in difficult
driving conditions, such as slippery roads
or loose surfaces, due to gentler throttle
response.
Type B
Type A
The Sport (S) mode provides the engine
power desired by those who want to make ! Models without the VIEW monitor ! Models with the VIEW monitor
the driving experience their own personal switch switch
adventure. S07BC0109 S07BC0110
NOTE
If the steering wheel is operated in the
following ways, the power steering
control system may temporarily limit
the power assist in order to prevent the
system components, such as the con-
trol computer and drive motor, from
& Power steering system fea- overheating.
tures . The steering wheel is operated fre-
S07AJ11
The vehicle is equipped with an electric quently and turned sharply while the
power steering system. When the ignition vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low
switch is turned to the “ON” position, the speeds, such as while frequently turn-
power steering warning light on the com- ing the steering wheel during parallel
bination meter illuminates to inform the parking.
driver that the warning system is function- . The steering wheel remains in the
ing properly. Then, if the engine started, fully turned position for a long period of
the warning light turns off to inform the time.
driver that the steering power assist is
operational. At this time, there will be more resis-
tance when steering. However this is
not a malfunction. Normal steering
force will be restored after the steering
! Use of engine braking The brake booster uses engine manifold vehicle beyond its braking capabil-
S07AK0102 vacuum to assist braking force. Do not turn ity. Always use the utmost care
Remember to make use of engine braking off the engine while driving because that when driving regarding vehicle
in addition to foot braking. When descend- will turn off the brake booster, resulting in speed and safe distance.
ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used, poor braking power.
the brakes may start working improperly The brakes will continue to work even
because of brake fluid overheating, when the brake booster completely stops CAUTION
caused by overheated brake pads. To help functioning. If this happens, you will have
prevent this, shift into a lower gear to get to depress the pedal much harder than When you need to brake suddenly,
stronger engine braking. during normal braking, and the braking continue depressing the brake pedal
! Braking when a tire is punctured distance will increase. strongly to bring the effect of the
S07AK0103 brake assist.
Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly
when a tire is punctured. This could cause
– CONTINUED –
Brake assist is a driver assistance system. & Disc brake pad wear warning ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-
It assists the brake power when the driver indicators
cannot depress the brake pedal strongly S07AK03
tem)
S07AL
and the brake power is insufficient.
Brake assist generates the brake power The ABS prevents the lock-up of wheels
according to the speed at which the driver which may occur during sudden braking or
depresses the brake pedal. braking on slippery road surfaces. This
helps prevent the loss of steering control
NOTE and directional stability caused by wheel
When you depress the brake pedal lock-up.
strongly or suddenly, the following When the ABS is operating, you may hear
phenomena occur. However, even a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration
though these occur, they do not indi- in the brake pedal. This is normal when the
cate any malfunctions, and the brake ABS operates.
assist system is operating properly.
. You might feel that the brake pedal is The ABS will not operate when the vehicle
The disc brake pad wear warning indica- speed is below approximately 6 mph (10
applied by lighter force and generates a tors on the disc brakes give a warning
greater braking force. km/h).
noise when the brake pads are worn.
. You might hear an ABS operating
noise from the engine compartment. If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard WARNING
from the disc brakes while braking, im-
mediately have your vehicle checked by Always use the utmost care in driv-
your SUBARU dealer. ing – overconfidence because you
are driving a vehicle with the ABS
could easily lead to a serious acci-
dent.
– CONTINUED –
& Steps to take if EBD system If all the warning lights illuminate simulta- have the vehicle towed to the nearest
malfunctions neously, take the following steps. SUBARU dealer for repair.
S07AM01 1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, flat
location. WARNING
2. Apply the parking brake and turn off the . Driving with the brake system
engine. warning light illuminated is dan-
3. Restart the engine. gerous. This indicates your brake
4. Release the parking brake. system may not be working prop-
erly. If the light remains illumi-
If all the warning lights do not come
nated, have the brakes inspected
back on:
by a SUBARU dealer immedi-
The EBD system have a possible malfunc- ately.
tion. Drive carefully to the nearest
SUBARU dealer and have the system . If at all in doubt about whether the
inspected. brakes are operating properly, do
not drive the vehicle. Have your
If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system, If all the warning lights stay illuminated vehicle towed to the nearest
the system stops working and the following or come back on after approximately 2 SUBARU dealer for repair.
warning lights illuminate simultaneously. seconds:
. Brake system warning light 1. Turn off the engine again.
. ABS warning light 2. Apply the parking brake.
. Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light 3. Check the brake fluid level. For details
The EBD system may be malfunctioning if about checking the brake fluid level, refer
all the warning lights illuminate simulta- to “Checking the fluid level” F11-15.
neously during driving. . If the brake fluid level is not below the
Even if the EBD system malfunctions, the “MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
conventional braking system will still func- malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the
tion. However, the rear wheels will be more nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
prone to locking when the brakes are system inspected.
applied harder than usual and the vehicle’s . If the brake fluid level is below the “MIN”
motion may therefore become somewhat mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. Instead,
harder to control.
. A standing start on a steeply sloping hancement offered by Vehicle Dynamics . Even when the Vehicle Dynamics
road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or Control system is unavailable. Therefore Control system is deactivated, compo-
otherwise slippery surface you should not deactivate the Vehicle nents of the brake control system may
. Extrication of the vehicle when its Dynamics Control system except under still activate. When the brake control
wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow above-mentioned situations. system is activated, the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control operation indicator
NOTE light flashes.
. When the switch has been pressed
to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system automatically reacti-
vates itself the next time the ignition
switch is turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF”
position and the engine is restarted.
. If the switch is held down for 30 7
seconds or longer, the indicator light
turns off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system is activated, and the system
ignores any further pressing of the
When the switch is pressed during engine switch. To make the switch usable
operation, the Vehicle Dynamics Control again, turn the ignition switch to the
OFF indicator light “ ” on the combination “LOCK”/“OFF” position and restart the
meter illuminates. The Vehicle Dynamics engine.
Control system will be deactivated and the . When the switch is pressed to
vehicle will behave like a model not deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
equipped with the Vehicle Dynamics Con- trol system, the vehicle’s running per-
trol system. When the switch is pressed formance is comparable with that of a
again to reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics vehicle that does not have a Vehicle
Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics Dynamics Control system. Do not de-
Control OFF indicator light turns off. activate the Vehicle Dynamics Control
With the Vehicle Dynamics Control system system except when absolutely neces-
deactivated, traction and stability en- sary.
X-MODE (if equipped) MODE does not guarantee that – Use only the special tempor-
S07BI the vehicle will be able to avoid ary spare tire to replace a flat
accidents in any situation. tire. With a normal temporary
WARNING . Activate the X-MODE when you spare tire, the effectiveness of
encounter a very slippery surface the X-MODE is reduced and
. Always use the utmost care in this should be taken into ac-
driving – overconfidence be- at low speed. However, having X-
MODE is no guarantee that full count when driving the vehi-
cause you are driving a vehicle cle in such a condition.
with X-MODE could easily lead to vehicle control will be maintained
a serious accident. at all times and under all condi- . If the hill descent control function
tions. When activating X-MODE, has operated continuously for a
. Always use the utmost care in the speed of the vehicle should long time, the temperature of the
driving – overconfidence be- be reduced considerably. brake disc may increase and the
cause you are driving a vehicle hill descent control function may
with hill descent control function . Whenever suspension compo-
nents, steering components, or be temporarily disabled. In this
could easily lead to a serious case, the hill descent control
accident. Be especially careful, an axle are removed from a
vehicle, have the system in- indicator will disappear. When
and depress the brake pedal if the hill descent control indicator
necessary when driving on ex- spected by an authorized
SUBARU dealer. disappears, the hill descent con-
tremely steep downhill, frozen, trol function is disabled.
muddy or sandy roads. Failure . Observe the following precau-
to control the vehicle’s speed tions in order to ensure that the X-MODE is the integrated control system
may cause a loss of control and X-MODE is operating properly: of the engine, AWD and Vehicle Dynamics
result in a serious accident. – All four wheels should be Control system, etc. for driving with bad
fitted with tires of the same road conditions. Using X-MODE, you can
size, type, and brand. Further- drive more comfortably even in slippery
CAUTION more, the amount of wear road conditions including uphill and down-
should be the same for all four hill.
. Even if your vehicle is equipped
tires.
with X-MODE, winter tires should
be used when driving on snow- – Keep the tire pressure at the
covered or icy roads; in addition, proper level as shown on the
vehicle speed should be reduced label attached to the vehicle’s
considerably. Simply having X- door pillar.
The X-MODE indicator will disappear activated. At this time, a buzzer will – The Vehicle Dynamics Control
when the X-MODE is deactivated. sound twice. warning light illuminates.
. If the vehicle speed reaches 25 mph . If there is a possibility that the
Models with 1 mode (40 km/h) or more while the X-MODE is engine could overheat because of a
Press the X-MODE switch again. The X- activated, a buzzer will sound once and temperature increase of the engine
MODE indicator will disappear when the X- the X-MODE will be deactivated. coolant, it is not possible to activate
MODE is deactivated. . For models with SI-DRIVE, the SI- the X-MODE. Even while the X-MODE is
DRIVE mode will change to the Intelli- activated, the X-MODE will be deacti-
NOTE gent (I) mode when the X-MODE is vated when the engine coolant tem-
. For models with 2 modes: SNOW·- deactivated. perature increases. In this case, the
DIRT is suitable for driving on a snow- . For models with SI-DRIVE, the SI- mode will change to the Intelligent (I)
covered road where the points of con- DRIVE mode will not be affected even if mode (models with SI-DRIVE).
tact between the tires and road surface the SI-DRIVE switch is pressed while
are visible, or for driving on an unpaved the X-MODE is activated. At this time,
road. the buzzer will sound twice.
& Hill descent control function
S07BI03
. For models with 2 modes: DEEP . For models with Auto Start Stop The hill descent control function will be in
SNOW·MUD is suitable for driving on system, the system will be stopped standby mode when the X-MODE is
a road covered with deep snow where while the X-MODE is activated. activated and the vehicle speed is less
the points of contact between the tires . While the engine is running, if any of than approximately 12 mph (20 km/h).
and road surface are not visible, or for the following conditions is met, the X- The function will operate when the vehicle
driving on a muddy road. MODE will be deactivated. In this case, speed is less than approximately 12 mph
. For models with 2 modes: When the it is not possible to activate the X- (20 km/h) and the accelerator ratio is less
X-MODE is ON, the Vehicle Dynamics MODE. Also, for models with SI-DRIVE, than approximately 10%.
Control system cannot be switched ON the mode will change to the Intelligent The function will turn off when the vehicle
and OFF using the Vehicle Dynamic (I) mode and it will not be possible to speed is more than approximately 12 mph
Control OFF switch. The Vehicle Dy- change to the other modes. (20 km/h) and the accelerator pedal is
namics Control system is fixed to ON in – The malfunction indicator light depressed.
“SNOW·DIRT” and OFF in “DEEP (Check Engine light) illuminates.
SNOW·MUD”. CAUTION
– The AT OIL TEMP warning light
. Even if you try to activate the X-
flashes.
MODE by pressing the X-MODE switch The braking power of the hill des-
when the vehicle speed is 12 mph (20 – The ABS warning light illumi-
cent control function may not be
km/h) or more, the X-MODE will not be nates.
sufficient when strong braking
power is needed (e.g., when towing a ! Hill descent control indicator operating. It will disappear when the
trailer). S07BI0301
function is in the disabled mode. When
this function is changed from operational
to non-operational, it will disappear when
NOTE the vehicle speed reaches more than
. Even while the hill descent control approximately 18 mph (30 km/h).
function is operating, you can vary the
vehicle speed by using the brake pedal
or accelerator pedal.
. During braking by the hill descent
control function, the hill descent con-
trol indicator will flash.
. The hill descent control function is
operable regardless of the gradient of
the road. Hill descent control indicator (type A) 7
. The hill descent control function
may be considered normal when the
following conditions occur.
– An operating sound is heard
briefly from the engine compart-
ment while the hill descent control
function is operating.
– The sensation of depressing the
brake pedal is different, (harder than
usual etc.) when the brake pedal is
depressed during hill descent con-
trol function operation.
7-46 Starting and operating/Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models)
sealant, the tire pressure warning Do not place metal film or any metal & Parking brake
S07AP01
valve and transmitter may not parts in the cargo area. This may To set the parking brake, depress the
operate properly. If a liquid sea- cause poor reception of the signals brake pedal firmly and hold it down until
lant is used, contact your nearest from the tire pressure sensors, and the parking brake lever is fully pulled up.
SUBARU dealer or other qualified the tire pressure monitoring system
service shop as soon as possi- will not function properly.
ble. Make sure to replace the tire
pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the
NOTE
tire. You may reuse the wheel if This device complies with part 15 of the
there is no damage to it and if the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
sealant residue is properly following two conditions: (1) This de-
cleaned off. Do not inject any tire vice may not cause harmful interfer- 7
liquid or aerosol tire sealant into ence, and (2) this device must accept
the tires, as this may cause a any interference received, including
malfunction of the tire pressure interference that may cause undesired
sensors. If the light illuminates operation.
steadily after blinking for ap- FCC CAUTION To release the parking brake, pull the lever
proximately one minute, Changes or modifications not ex- up slightly, press the release button, then
promptly contact a SUBARU pressly approved by the party respon- lower the lever while keeping the button
dealer to have the system in- sible for compliance could void the pressed.
spected. user’s authority to operate the equip- When the parking brake is set while the
ment. engine is running, the parking brake
warning light illuminates. After starting
the vehicle, be sure that the warning light
has turned off before the vehicle is driven.
Refer to “Brake system warning light (red)”
F3-20.
– CONTINUED –
CAUTION WARNING
Never drive while the parking brake . Never leave unattended children
is set because this will cause un- or pets in the vehicle. They could
necessary wear on the brake linings. accidentally injure themselves or
Before starting to drive, always others through inadvertent op-
make sure that the parking brake eration of the vehicle. Also, on
has been fully released. hot or sunny days, the tempera-
ture in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to
& Parking tips cause severe or possibly fatal
When parking your vehicle, always per-
S07AP02
injuries to people.
form the following items. . Do not park the vehicle over
When parking on a hill, always turn the flammable materials such as dry
. Apply the parking brake firmly.
steering wheel. When the vehicle is grass, waste paper or rags, as
. For MT models, put the shift lever in the headed up the hill, the front wheels should
“1” (1st) for upgrade or “R” (Reverse) for a they may burn easily if they come
be turned away from the curb. near hot engine or exhaust sys-
downgrade.
tem parts.
. For CVT models, put the select lever in
the “P” (Park) position. . Be sure to stop the engine if you
take a nap in the vehicle. If engine
Never rely on the mechanical friction of the exhaust gas enters the passen-
transmission alone to hold the vehicle. ger compartment, occupants in
the vehicle could die from carbon
monoxide (CO) contained in the
exhaust gas.
CAUTION
. If your vehicle has a bumper
When facing downhill, the front wheels under guard (optional), pay atten-
should be turned into the curb. tion to blocks and other obstruc-
& To activate/deactivate the Hill place the ignition switch in the “LOCK”/
start assist system “OFF” position once and then start
S07AU02 over again.
! To deactivate
S07AU0201
1. Park your vehicle in a flat and safe
location and apply the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
3. Restart the engine.
Cruise control indicator light (type A) 3. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the Cruise control set indicator light (type A)
“SET” side and release it. Then release the 1) When setting the displayed unit as “MPH” 7
2) When setting the displayed unit as “km/h”
accelerator pedal.
NOTE
When setting a cruise speed for the first
time during a drive, both “SET” and
“RES” may be used to set the initial
cruise speed.
switch to the “RES” side to return to the Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “RES” ! To increase the speed (by accelera-
original cruising speed automatically. side and hold it until the vehicle reaches tor pedal)
The cruise control set indicator light in the the desired speed. Then, release the S07AQ0402
switch. The vehicle speed at that moment 1. Depress the accelerator pedal to ac-
combination meter will automatically illu- celerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
minate at this time. will be memorized and treated as the new
set speed.
& To turn off the cruise control When setting the displayed unit as
S07AQ03
There are two ways to turn off the cruise “MPH”:
control: The set speed can be increased 1 mph
. Press the cruise control main button (1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the “RES/
again. SET” switch to the “RES” side.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” or
When setting the displayed unit as
“LOCK”/“OFF” position (but only when the
“km/h”:
vehicle is completely stopped). 7
The set speed can be increased 1 km/h
(0.6 mph) each time by pressing the “RES/
& To change the cruising speed SET” switch to the “RES” side.
S07AQ04
! To increase the speed (by the “RES/ 2. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the
SET” switch) “SET” side once. Now the desired speed is
S07AQ0405
set and the vehicle will keep running at that
speed without depressing the accelerator
pedal.
– CONTINUED –
! To decrease the speed (by the “RES/ ! To decrease the speed (by brake & Cruise control indicator light
S07AQ05
SET” switch) pedal) Refer to “Cruise control indicator light” F3-
S07AQ0406 S07AQ0404
1. Depress the brake pedal to release 31.
cruise control temporarily.
& Cruise control set indicator
light
S07AQ06
Refer to “Cruise control set indicator light”
F3-31.
Auto Start Stop system (if stopped by depressing the brake pedal
with the select lever in the “D” position, the
equipped) engine will be automatically stopped.
S07BH
If you release the brake pedal with the
The Auto Start Stop system is designed to select lever kept in the “D” position, the
automatically stop and restart the engine engine will be automatically restarted.
when the vehicle is stationary for a short
period of time (while waiting for a traffic
light or in a traffic jam, etc.) after the engine
has warmed up. The system operates in
order to reduce fuel consumption and
exhaust emissions, as well as undesired
idling noise.
Auto Start Stop indicator light (green)
& System operation (type B) 7
S07BH01
If the engine is temporarily stopped by the
CAUTION system, the Auto Start Stop indicator light
on the combination meter will illuminate in
The Auto Start Stop system is de- green. This indicator light will turn off when
signed to automatically stop and Auto Start Stop indicator light (green) the system restarts the engine.
restart the engine for a short period (type A)
of time during idling. Do not use the NOTE
system when parking the vehicle . After starting the engine, if the
normally. vehicle is left idling without being
driven, the Auto Start Stop system will
So that it can be used safely and comfor- not operate.
tably, in addition to driver operations, the . Your vehicle is equipped with a
Auto Start Stop system is designed to special high-performance battery.
constantly monitor the vehicle conditions When replacing the vehicle battery, be
as well as the environment inside and sure to replace it with a genuine
outside the vehicle, in order to control SUBARU battery (or equivalent) de-
stopping and restarting of the engine. signed specifically for use in a vehicle
After the vehicle has been completely
– CONTINUED –
equipped with the Auto Start Stop under the following conditions. . When the vehicle is at an altitude of
system. For details, we recommend – The vehicle is stopped on a road more than approximately 10,000 ft (3,000
that you consult your SUBARU dealer. with a steep slope. m)
– The vehicle is stopped by hard . When the CVT fluid is not sufficiently
! Operational conditions warmed up
S07BH0105 braking.
The Auto Start Stop system will automa- – Negative pressure in the brake . When the temperature of the CVT fluid
tically stop the engine when all of the booster is not sufficient. is abnormally high
following conditions are met. . After the vehicle is stopped, the . When the vehicle battery is not in good
. The engine is sufficiently warmed up. engine may not automatically stop if condition
. The engine hood is closed. the brake pedal is not fully depressed. . When using the climate control system,
. The driver’s door is closed. Make sure to depress the brake pedal the temperature difference between the
. The driver’s seatbelt is fastened. firmly when stopping the vehicle. setting temperature and the temperature
. The malfunction indicator light (Check . In the following cases, it may take inside the vehicle is significant
Engine light) is off. some time for the Auto Start Stop . When using the climate control system,
system to operate. the amount of air flow is significant
. Airflow mode selection is set to a mode
other than “ ” mode. – The battery is discharged be-
. The rear window defogger is not in use.
cause the vehicle has not been used NOTE
for a long period of time, etc. The Auto Start Stop system may not
. The X-MODE has been turned off (if – The coolant temperature is low. operate if the malfunction indicator
equipped). – The battery terminals have been light (Check Engine light) or other
After the vehicle is stopped, the engine will reconnected after replacing the bat- warning lights on the combination
be automatically stopped when the follow- tery, etc. meter are illuminating or flashing.
ing conditions are met. ! Non-operational conditions ! Engine restart operational condi-
. The steering wheel is in the straight S07BH0106
tions
ahead position. In any of the following cases, the Auto S07BH0107
Start Stop system will not operate. In any one of the following cases, the
. The steering wheel is not being oper-
. When the Auto Start Stop warning light/ engine will be automatically restarted even
ated.
Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light (yellow) if the brake pedal is kept depressed.
NOTE is illuminating or flashing . When slightly releasing the brake pedal
. After the vehicle is stopped, the . When the malfunction indicator light on road with a steep slope and the vehicle
engine may not automatically stop (Check Engine light) is illuminating begins rolling
. When the engine hood is opened
. When further depressing the brake even if you keep the brake pedal ! Auto Start Stop warning light
pedal depressed. S07BH0109
The Auto Start Stop warning light will ! Auto Start Stop OFF switch
illuminate in yellow when initially turning S07BH0104
CAUTION
If the Auto Start Stop warning light Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light (yel-
does not turn off after the engine has Auto Start Stop OFF switch
low) (type B)
started, the Auto Start Stop system If the Auto Start Stop OFF switch is
may be malfunctioning. We recom- pressed, operation of the Auto Start Stop
mend that you contact your author- system will be disabled. The Auto Start
ized SUBARU dealer for an inspec- Stop OFF indicator light on the combina-
tion. tion meter will then illuminate in yellow. If
the switch is pressed once more, the Auto
Start Stop system will turn on again. The
Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light will then
turn off.
While the engine is temporarily stopped by
the system, if the Auto Start Stop OFF
switch is pressed, the engine will be
restarted even if you do not release the
Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light (yel- brake pedal.
low) (type A)
! Display of warning messages BSD/RCTA (if equipped) at all even when a vehicle is present
(models with combination meter S07BM in a neighboring lane or approach-
display (color LCD)) The BSD/RCTA consists of rear corner ing from either side.
S07BH0302
If a warning message is displayed on the radar with Blind Spot Detection and Rear The driver is responsible for paying
combination meter display (color LCD) Cross Traffic Alert. attention to the rear and side areas
while the vehicle is being driven, a of the vehicle.
malfunction may have occurred in the Auto These functions enable the system to
Start Stop system. In this case, the Auto detect objects or vehicles to the rear,
Start Stop warning light will illuminate or drawing attention to the driver when & System features
flash in yellow. We recommend that you changing a lane or when driving in reverse. S07BM01
BSD/RCTA consists of the following func-
have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU tions.
dealer as soon as possible. WARNING
. To detect a vehicle in a blind spot on an
The driver is responsible for driving adjacent lane or a vehicle approaching at
safely. Always be sure to check the high speed while driving the vehicle (Blind
surroundings with your eyes when Spot Detection)
changing lanes or reversing the . To detect a vehicle approaching from
vehicle. the right or left while reversing the vehicle
The system is designed to assist the (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
driver to change lanes or reverse
safely by monitoring the rear and The system uses radar sensors for the
side areas of the vehicle. However, above functions.
you cannot rely on this system alone NOTE
in assuring the safety during a lane
The BSD/RCTA radar sensor has been
change or reversing. Overconfi-
certified by the radio wave related laws
dence in this system could result in
of the U.S. and other FCC compliant
an accident and lead to serious
countries, Canada, and Mexico. When
injury or death. Since the system
driving in other countries, certification
operation has various limitations,
of the country where the vehicle is
the flashing or illumination of the
driven must be obtained. For certifica-
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
tion in the U.S. and other FCC compli-
may be delayed or it may not operate
ant countries, Canada, and Mexico,
– CONTINUED –
! Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) ! Limitations of the detectability of reversing the vehicle.
S07BM0103
RCTA
S07BM010301
Since the detectability of RCTA is limited,
the RCTA may not operate properly in
angled parking.
1) Operating range
Example 2
The system notifies the driver of another 1) The detection range of the radar sensors
vehicle approaching from either side when C) Vehicle that may be detected
driving in reverse. This feature helps the
Example 1
driver check the rear and side areas of the NOTE
1) The detection range of the radar sensors
vehicle when moving backward. 2) Area out of detection range of the radar The system may detect that a vehicle
If the system detects a vehicle approach- sensors (C) is passing in front of your vehicle.
ing from either side while moving back- A) Vehicle that may not be detected Always be sure to check the surround-
B) Parked vehicle ings with your eyes when reversing the
ward, it warns the driver of dangers in the
following way. vehicle.
. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator WARNING
light(s) on the outside mirror(s) flashes.
An approaching vehicle (A) may not
. A warning buzzer sounds.
be detected because the detection
. An icon appears on the rear view range is limited by the parked vehi-
camera screen (audio/navigation monitor). cle (B). Always be sure to check the
surroundings with your eyes when
& System operation . In the following cases, the BSD/ eration and the BSD/RCTA OFF indica-
S07BM02 RCTA will temporarily stop operating tor will disappear. However, if the BSD/
! Operating conditions (or may stop operating) and the BSD/ RCTA OFF indicator has appeared for a
S07BM0201
The BSD/RCTA will operate when all of the RCTA OFF indicator will appear. prolonged time, have the system in-
following conditions are met. – When the radar sensor becomes spected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as
. The ignition switch is in the “ON” significantly misaligned (If the or- possible.
position. ientation of the radar sensor is . The detectability of the radar sen-
. The BSD/RCTA warning indicator and shifted for any reason, readjust- sors is restricted. The BSD/RCTA de-
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator are turned off. ment is required. Have the sensor tection may be impaired and the system
. The vehicle is driven at speeds above 7 adjusted at a SUBARU dealer.) may not operate properly under the
mph (12 km/h) (except when reversing). – When a large amount of snow or following conditions.
ice sticks to the rear bumper sur- – When the rear bumper around the
. The shift lever/select lever is in the “R”
face around the radar sensors radar sensors is distorted
position (when reversing).
– When the vehicle is driven on a – When ice, snow or mud adheres
The BSD/RCTA will not operate in the snow-covered road or in an envir- to the rear bumper surface around 7
following situations. onment in which there are no ob- the radar sensors
. The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator is on. jects around (such as in a desert) for – When stickers, etc. are affixed on
. The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10 a long time the areas of the radar sensors on
km/h) even when the BSD/RCTA OFF – When the temperature around the the rear bumper
indicator remains off (except when rever- radar sensors increased exces- – During adverse weather condi-
sing). sively due to long driving on uphill tions such as rain, snow or fog
grades in summer, etc. – When driving on wet roads such
NOTE – When the temperature around the as snow-covered roads and through
. In the following case, the BSD/RCTA radar sensors becomes extremely puddles
will stop operating and the BSD/RCTA low . The radar sensors may not detect or
warning indicator will appear. If the – When the vehicle battery voltage may have difficulty detecting the fol-
BSD/RCTA warning indicator appears, lowers lowing.
have your vehicle inspected at a – When the vehicle battery be- – Small motorcycles, bicycles, pe-
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. comes overvoltage destrians, stationary objects on the
– When a malfunction occurs in the road or road side, etc.
system, including the BSD/RCTA When the above conditions are cor-
– Vehicles with body shapes that
approach indicator light rected, the BSD/RCTA will resume op-
the radar may not reflect (vehicles
– CONTINUED –
with a low body height such as & BSD/RCTA approach indica- driver of dangers under the following
sports cars or a trailer with no tor light/warning buzzer conditions.
cargo) S07BM03 . While the indicator light illuminates, if
– Vehicles that are not approaching When the BSD/RCTA is active, the BSD/ you operate the turn signal lever toward
your vehicle even though they are in RCTA approach indicator light will operate the side in which this light turned on.
the detection area (either on a to alert the driver when there are vehicles
. When reversing the vehicle while the
neighboring lane to the rear or be- in the neighboring lanes. When reversing
system detects a vehicle approaching
side your vehicle when reversing) the vehicle, the BSD/RCTA approach
from either side.
(The system determines the pre- indicator light and warning buzzer will
sence of approaching vehicles operate to alert the driver that a vehicle is
! BSD/RCTA approach indicator
based on data detected by the radar approaching from the left or right side.
light dimming function
sensors.) ! BSD/RCTA approach indicator light S07BM030101
When the headlights are turned on, the
– Vehicles traveling at significantly S07BM0301
brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach
different speeds indicator light will be reduced.
– Vehicles driving in parallel at al-
most the same speed as your vehi- NOTE
cle for a prolonged time . You may have difficulty recognizing
– Oncoming vehicles the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
– Vehicles in a lane beyond the under the following conditions.
neighboring lane – When affected by direct sunlight
– Vehicles travelling at a signifi- – When affected by the headlight
cantly lower speed that you are beams from the vehicles behind
trying to overtake . While the illumination brightness
. On a road with extremely narrow control dial is in the fully upward
lanes, the system may detect vehicles position, even if the headlights are
driving in a lane next to the neighboring BSD/RCTA approach indicator light turned on, the brightness of the BSD/
lane. It is mounted in each side of the outside RCTA approach indicator light will not
. When the 8-inch audio/navigation mirrors. be reduced. For details about the
system is performing a software up- The indicator light will illuminate when a illumination brightness control dial,
date, the RCTA warning icons may not vehicle approaching from behind is de- refer to “Illumination brightness con-
be displayed on the audio/navigation tected. trol” F3-12.
screen until the update is complete. The indicator light will flash to warn the
away is driving on the near side of its appear. If the indicator remains displayed & BSD/RCTA warning indicator
lane from your vehicle for a prolonged time, have the system S07BM04
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
! Mexico-spec. models vehicle, are mounted inside the rear Reverse Automatic Braking
S07BM0603
bumper.
(RAB) system (if equipped)
To ensure correct operation of the BSD/ S07BN
RCTA, observe the following precautions.
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
. Always keep the bumper surface near is a system designed to help avoid colli-
the radar sensors clean. sions or reduce collision damage when
. Do not affix any stickers or other items reversing the vehicle. If a wall or an
on the bumper surface near the radar obstacle is detected in the reversing
sensors. direction, the system will notify the driver
. Do not modify the bumper near the with a warning sound and may activate the
radar sensors. vehicle’s brakes automatically.
. Do not paint the bumper near the radar
sensors. WARNING
. Do not expose the bumper near the 7
radar sensors to strong impacts. If a . Reverse Automatic Braking
& Handling of radar sensors sensor becomes misaligned, a system (RAB) system is not a system
S07BM07
malfunction may occur, including the in- intended to replace the driver’s
ability to detect vehicles entering the responsibility to check surround-
detection areas. If any strong shock is ing areas for vehicles or obsta-
applied to the bumper, be sure to contact cles to avoid a collision.
your SUBARU dealer for inspection. . The driver is responsible for driv-
. Do not disassemble the radar sensors. ing safely. Before reversing, be
sure to first depress the brake
NOTE pedal and visually check the
If the radar sensors require repair or surroundings.
replacement, or the bumper area . There are some cases in which
around the radar sensors requires the vehicle cannot avoid colli-
repair, paintwork or replacement, con- sion, because the system opera-
tact your SUBARU dealer for assis- tion has limitations. The warning
1) Sensors tance. sound or automatic braking may
The radar sensors, one on each side of the be delayed or may not operate at
all even when an obstacle is
– CONTINUED –
! Detecting range
S07BN0101
WARNING
If your vehicle is trapped on a rail-
road crossing and you are trying to
1) When reversing 3) When the vehicle is stopped by the escape by reversing through the
2) When either strong automatic braking or system (in this case, the continuous crossing gate, the system may re-
torque control is applied to prevent beep will remain sounding) cognize the crossing gate as an
collision (in this case, short warning 4) Object (e.g., a wall) obstacle and the brake may activate.
beeps or continuous warning beeps will
sound) In this case, remain calm and either
continue to depress the accelerator
pedal or cancel the system. To
– CONTINUED –
cancel the system, refer to “Cancel- system is set to on. – The sonar sensor and the area
ing the Reverse Automatic Braking . The select lever is in the “R” position. near the sonar sensor are being
(RAB) system operation” F7-79. . The vehicle speed is between 1 to 9 damaged.
mph (1.5 to 15 km/h). – The rear bumper is exposed to
strong impact, or the rear bumper is
& Operating conditions NOTE deformed.
S07BN02
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) . In the following cases, the Reverse . When the 8-inch audio/navigation
system will operate when all of the follow- Automatic Braking (RAB) system will system is performing a software up-
ing conditions are met. not operate. Promptly contact a date, the Reverse Automatic Braking
SUBARU dealer to have the system (RAB) system may not display the
inspected. following items on the audio/navigation
– The EyeSight warning indicator screen until the update is complete.
is illuminated. – Display Icon on/off Function
– The Reverse Automatic Braking – Distance Indicator Image
warning is illuminated. – Warning Message
. When the RAB OFF indicator is . On a steep hill, the system’s auto-
illuminated, the Reverse Automatic matic braking ability will be reduced.
Braking (RAB) system cannot be oper- . The system is designed to avoid
ated. collisions by automatic hard braking
. In the following cases, the system when the vehicle’s reversing speed is
may not be able to properly detect an less than approximately 3 mph (5 km/h).
obstacle. Promptly contact a SUBARU However, the system does not guaran-
1) EyeSight warning indicator dealer to have the system inspected. tee that the vehicle will be able to avoid
2) RAB warning indicator – A sticker, paint, or a chemical is collisions in any situation.
3) RAB OFF indicator applied to the sonar sensor or the . If the vehicle is reversed at an
rear bumper near the sonar sensor. extremely slow speed, the driver’s
. The ignition switch is in the “ON”
– The rear bumper is modified. operation may be prioritized. In this
position.
– The rear bumper has been re- case, automatic braking will not oper-
. The EyeSight warning indicator is off. ate.
moved and reattached.
. The RAB warning indicator is off. . The system may not be able to detect
– The ground clearance is changed
. The RAB OFF indicator is off. due to the vehicle’s loading condi- the following objects.
. The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) tion or modification. – Sharp or thin objects such as
poles, fences and ropes which may – Engine sound from other vehi- – Parts that emit high frequency
not reflect the sound wave emitted cles sound, such as a horn or speaker,
from the sonar sensor. – Sound of an air brake are attached.
– Objects that are too close to the – Vehicle detection equipment or a
rear bumper when the select lever is Vehicle conditions:
sonar from another vehicle
set to the “R” position. – Ice, snow or mud is adhered to
– A sound wave with a frequency
– Objects with a surface which may the rear bumper near the sonar
similar to the vehicle’s system is
not reflect the sound wave emitted sensor.
transmitted nearby.
from the sonar sensor such as a – The vehicle is significantly in-
– A vehicle equipped with the same
chain link fence. clined.
system is reversing toward your
. Objects the system is not designed reversing direction. – The ground clearance is signifi-
to detect. cantly reduced due to the vehicle’s
– Pedestrians Weather conditions: loading condition, etc.
– Moving objects including moving – Extremely high or extremely low – When the sonar sensor is mis-
vehicles temperatures in which the area near aligned due to a collision or an 7
– Objects which absorb sound the sonar sensor becomes too hot accident.
waves such as cloth or snow. or too cold to operate.
– The rear bumper near the sonar Surrounding environment:
– Objects whose surface has a – A cloth banner, flag, hanging
diagonal angle. sensors is exposed to heavy rain or
a significant amount of water. branch or railroad crossing bars
– Objects that are low to the ground are present in the reversing direc-
such as parking blocks. – Fog, snow or sandstorm, etc.
tion.
– Objects that are high above the – Air is moving rapidly such as
– When reversing on a gravel or
ground such as objects hanging when a strong wind is blowing.
grassy area.
from above. Parts attached to the rear bumper – When reversing in an area where
. The system may not be able to near the sonar sensor: objects or walls are adjacent to the
properly detect objects or may cause – Commercial electronic parts (fog vehicle such as narrow tunnels,
a system malfunction when the follow- light, fender pole, radio antenna) or narrow bridges, narrow roads or
ing conditions exist. commercial attachment parts (trai- narrow garages.
High frequency sound from other ler hitch, bicycle carrier, bumper – Wheel tracks or a hole is present
sources are nearby: guard) are attached in the ground of the reversing
direction.
– Horn sound from another vehicle
– CONTINUED –
– When reversing over a drainage – A curb is present in the reversing – Tire chains are installed.
cover (grate cover). direction. – Vehicle driving is unstable due to
– When reversing downhill. accident or malfunction.
– The brake warning light is illumi-
nated.
– CONTINUED –
WARNING the select lever is shifted to a position other & Canceling the Reverse Auto-
than the “R” position. matic Braking (RAB) system
Depress the brake pedal immedi- The system will operate again the next operation
ately after the system stops the time the select lever is shifted to “R” S07BN04
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
vehicle by automatic braking. De- position.
system can be temporarily canceled by
pending on the conditions of the In circumstances such as the following, the any of the following operations.
road surface and tires, the vehicle Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
may not remain stopped, possibly . While the vehicle is stopped by the
automatically stops operating and the RAB
leading to an unexpected accident. operation of automatic braking, the brake
OFF indicator illuminates.
pedal is depressed.
– There is ice, snow, mud, or other
. While the vehicle is stopped by the
! After the vehicle is stopped by the substance on the sonar sensors.
operation of automatic braking, the accel-
system – The select lever was shifted to “R” erator pedal is depressed.
S07BN0304
when there is an obstacle located close to
. The accelerator pedal is kept de-
the rear bumper.
– A sound with a frequency close to that
pressed. (In this case, limited acceleration 7
will be canceled and the vehicle will
of the sonar used by the Reverse Auto- continue reversing.)
matic Braking (RAB) system was de-
. The select lever is shifted to a position
tected.
other than the “R” position.
NOTE NOTE
Automatic braking only holds the vehi-
The system will be canceled if the
cle for 2 seconds. Before the automatic
object is no longer detected.
brake is released, a warning sound (3
short beeps followed by a long beep)
will activate to alert the driver that the & Reverse Automatic Braking
RAB OFF indicator: illuminates when the automatic will be released. (RAB) system ON/OFF setting
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system is S07BN05
turned OFF. While the select lever is shifted to the “R”
position, the below functions of the Re-
After the brake pedal is depressed, the verse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
RAB OFF indicator will illuminate and the can be set by operating the audio/naviga-
system will temporarily stop operating. tion monitor.
The RAB OFF indicator will turn off when
– CONTINUED –
& RAB warning indicator & Handling of the sonar sen- becomes misaligned, a system malfunc-
S07BN07
sors tion may occur, including inability to detect
S07BN06 objects in the reversing direction. If any
The 4 sonar sensors are located in the rear strong impact is applied to the rear
bumper. To ensure the proper operation of bumper, contact a SUBARU dealer to
the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) have the system inspected.
system, observe the following precau-
tions. . Do not disassemble the sonar sensors.
NOTE
If the sonar sensors require repair or
replacement, or if the area of the rear
bumper near the sonar sensors re-
quires repair, paintwork or replace-
ment, contact your SUBARU dealer for
1) RAB malfunction message assistance. 7
2) RAB warning indicator
If the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system malfunctions, the above indicator
illuminates on the combination meter.
Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for
details. . Do not affix any stickers or other items
on the sonar sensor or the bumper surface
near the sonar sensors.
. Always keep the sonar sensor and the
rear bumper surface near the sonar
sensors clean.
. Do not modify the rear bumper.
. Do not paint the bumper near the sonar
sensors.
. Do not apply strong impacts to the rear
bumper near the sonar sensors. If a sensor
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving – the first 1,000 Tire chains ........................................................... 8-11
S08
miles (1,600 km) ................................................... 8-2 Rocking the vehicle .............................................. 8-11
Fuel economy hints ................................................ 8-2 Loading your vehicle............................................ 8-12
Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ............... 8-2 Vehicle capacity weight ........................................ 8-12
Catalytic converter.................................................. 8-3 GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ............... 8-13
Periodic inspections ............................................... 8-4 Roof rail ............................................................... 8-14
Driving in foreign countries ................................... 8-4 Roof tent .............................................................. 8-14
Driving tips for AWD models ................................. 8-4 Trailer hitch (dealer option) ................................. 8-16
Off road driving....................................................... 8-6 Connecting a trailer .............................................. 8-17
Before driving ........................................................ 8-6 If not towing a trailer ............................................ 8-18
During driving........................................................ 8-7 Trailer towing ........................................................ 8-18
After driving........................................................... 8-7 Warranties and maintenance ................................. 8-19
Winter driving.......................................................... 8-8 Maximum load limits............................................. 8-19
Operation during cold weather ............................... 8-8 Trailer Hitches ...................................................... 8-22
Driving on snowy and icy roads ............................. 8-9 When you do not tow a trailer ............................... 8-23
Corrosion protection ............................................. 8-10 Connecting a trailer .............................................. 8-23 8
Snow tires ............................................................ 8-10 Trailer towing tips................................................. 8-24
8-2 Driving tips/New vehicle break-in driving – the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km)
New vehicle break-in driving – Fuel economy hints Engine exhaust gas (carbon
the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) S08AB monoxide)
S08AA The following suggestions will help to save S08AC
. If at any time you suspect that Catalytic converter your vehicle checked and repaired by an
exhaust fumes are entering the S08AD
authorized SUBARU dealer.
vehicle, have the problem . Do not apply undercoating or rust
checked and corrected as soon prevention treatment to the heat shield of
as possible. If you must drive catalytic converter and the exhaust sys-
under these conditions, drive tem.
only with all windows fully open. . Do not drive with an extremely low fuel
. Keep the rear gate closed while level.
driving to prevent exhaust gas
from entering the vehicle. WARNING
. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive
NOTE or park the vehicle anywhere
Due to the expansion and contraction near flammable materials (e.g.,
of the metals used in the manufacture grass, paper, rags or leaves),
of the exhaust system, you may hear a The catalytic converter is installed in the because the catalytic converter
exhaust system. It serves as a catalyst to operates at very high tempera-
crackling sound coming from the ex-
tures.
8
haust system for a short time after the reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust gases,
engine has been shut off. This sound is thus providing cleaner exhaust. . Keep everyone and flammable
normal. materials away from the exhaust
To avoid damage to the catalytic converter: pipe while the engine is running.
. Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small The exhaust gas is very hot.
amount of leaded fuel will damage the
catalytic converter.
. Never start the engine by pushing or
pulling the vehicle.
. Avoid racing the engine.
. Never turn the ignition switch to the
“OFF” position while the vehicle is moving.
. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel
the engine running rough (misfiring, back-
firing or incomplete combustion), have
Periodic inspections Driving in foreign countries Driving tips for AWD models
S08AE S08AF S08AG
To keep your vehicle in the best condition When planning to use your vehicle in
at all times, always have the recom- another country:
WARNING
mended maintenance services listed in . Confirm the availability of the correct . Always maintain a safe driving
the maintenance schedule in the “War- fuel. Refer to “Fuel requirements” F7-3. speed according to the road and
ranty and Maintenance Booklet” per- . Comply with all regulations and require- weather conditions in order to
formed at the specified time or mileage ments of each country. avoid having an accident on a
intervals. sharp turn, during sudden brak-
ing or under other similar condi-
tions.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence be-
cause you are driving an All-
Wheel Drive vehicle could easily
lead to a serious accident.
. When replacing or installing
tire(s), all four tires must be the
same for the following items.
(a) Size
(b) Speed symbol
(c) Load index
(d) Circumference
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degrees of wear
For items (a) to (c), you must
obey the specification that is
printed on the tire inflation pres- conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.
sure label. The tire inflation pres- There is little difference in handling, how-
sure label is located on the dri- ever, during extremely sharp turns or
ver’s door pillar. sudden braking. Therefore, when driving
If all the four tires are not the down a slope or turning corners, be sure to
same for items (a) to (h), serious reduce your speed and maintain an ample
mechanical damage could be distance from other vehicles.
caused to the drivetrain of the . Always check the cold tire pressure
car, and affect the followings. before starting to drive. The recommended
tire pressure is provided on the tire inflation
– Ride
pressure label, which is located under the
– Handling door latch on the driver’s side.
– Braking . Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle
– Speedometer/Odometer cali- All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine under hard-driving conditions such as
bration power to all four wheels. AWD models steep hills or dusty roads will necessitate
provide better traction when driving on more frequent replacement of the follow-
– Clearance between the body slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and ing items than that specified in the “War- 8
and tires when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. By ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
It also may be dangerous and shifting power between the front and rear – Engine oil
lead to loss of vehicle control, wheels, SUBARU AWD can also provide – Brake fluid
and it can lead to an accident. added traction during acceleration and – Rear differential gear oil
added engine braking force during decel-
– Manual transmission oil (MT mod-
eration.
CAUTION els)
Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle – Continuously variable transmission
If you use a temporary spare tire to may handle differently than an ordinary fluid (CVT models)
replace a flat tire, be sure to use the two wheel drive vehicle and it contains – Front differential gear oil (CVT
original temporary spare tire stored some features unique to AWD. For safety models)
in the vehicle. Using other sizes may purposes as well as to avoid damaging the . Never attempt to drive through pools
result in severe mechanical damage AWD system, you should keep the follow- and puddles, or roads flooded with water.
to the drive train of your vehicle. ing tips in mind. Water entering the engine air intake or the
. An AWD model is better able to climb exhaust pipe or water splashing onto
steeper roads under snowy or slippery electrical parts may damage your vehicle
– CONTINUED –
and may cause it to stall. Off road driving your SUBARU while operating it off-
. There are some precautions that you S08AH road and not using common sense
must observe when towing your vehicle. precautions such as those listed
For detailed information, refer to “Towing” WARNING here is not eligible for warranty
F9-13. coverage.
. Always maintain a safe driving
speed according to the road and Because of the AWD feature and higher
weather conditions in order to ground clearance, you can drive your
avoid having an accident on a SUBARU on ordinary roads or off-road.
sharp turn, during sudden brak- But please keep in mind that an AWD
ing or under other similar condi- SUBARU is a passenger car and is neither
tions. a conventional off-road vehicle nor an all-
. Always use the utmost care in terrain vehicle. If you do take your
driving – overconfidence be- SUBARU off-road, certain common sense
cause you are driving an All- precautions such as those in the following
Wheel Drive model could easily list should be taken.
lead to a serious accident.
& Before driving
S08AH09
. Make certain that you and all of your
CAUTION
passengers are wearing seatbelts.
Frequent driving of an AWD model . Carry some emergency equipment,
under hard-driving conditions such such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,
as rough roads or off roads will wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or
necessitate more frequent replace- citizens band radio.
ment of the following items than that . Secure all cargo carried inside the
specified in the maintenance sche- vehicle and make certain that it is not piled
dule described in the “Warranty and higher than the seatbacks. During sudden
Maintenance Booklet”. stops or jolts, unsecured cargo could be
. Engine oil thrown around in the vehicle and cause
injury. Do not pile heavy loads on the roof.
. Brake fluid Those loads raise the vehicle’s center of
Remember that damage done to gravity and make it more prone to tip over.
. Never equip your vehicle with tires stops. This could create a fire hazard. mode” F7-28.
larger than those specified in this manual.
Precautions when driving under espe-
cially dangerous situations:
& After driving
& During driving S08AH11
. Always check your brakes for effective-
S08AH10 . If driving through water, such as when
General precautions: crossing shallow streams, first check the ness immediately after driving in sand,
. Drive carefully. Do not take unneces- depth of the water and the bottom of the mud or water. Do this by driving slowly and
sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or stream bed for firmness and ensure that stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat that
over rough terrain. the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly process several times to dry out the brake
. Slow down and employ extra caution at and cross the stream without stopping. discs and brake pads.
all times. When driving off-road, you will The water should be shallow enough that it . After driving through tall grass, mud,
not have the benefit of marked traffic does not reach the vehicle’s undercar- rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there is
lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and riage. Water entering the engine air intake no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones, sand,
the like. or the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto etc. adhering to or trapped on the under-
. Do not drive across steep slopes. electrical parts may damage your vehicle body. Clear off any such matter from the
Instead, drive either straight up or straight and may cause it to stall. Never attempt to underbody. If the vehicle is used with these
down the slopes. A vehicle can much more drive through rushing water; regardless of materials trapped or adhering to the
easily tip over sideways than it can end its depth, it can wash away the ground underbody, a mechanical breakdown or 8
over end. Avoid driving straight up or down from under your tires, resulting in possible fire could occur.
slopes that are too steep. loss of traction and even vehicle rollover. . Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-
. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe- . If you must rock the vehicle to free it road driving. Suspension components are
cially at higher speeds. from sand or mud, depress the accelerator particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they
. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the pedal slightly and move the shift lever/ need to be washed thoroughly.
steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the select lever back and forth between “1”/“D”
wheel and injure your hands. Instead, and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the
drive with your fingers and thumbs on the engine. For the best possible traction,
outside of the rim. avoid spinning the wheels when trying to
. Do not drive or park over or near free the vehicle.
flammable materials such as dry grass or . When the road surface is extremely
fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The slippery, you can obtain better traction by
exhaust system is very hot while the starting the vehicle with the transmission in
engine is running and right after the engine 2nd than 1st (both for MT and CVT). For
CVT models, refer to “Selection of manual
! Maintenance the piping between the reservoir tank and snow or ice from your shoes because that
S08AI0105 washer nozzles by operating the washer could make the pedals slippery and driving
Carry some emergency equipment, such for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if dangerous.
as a window scraper, a bag of sand, flares, the concentration of the fluid remaining in
a small shovel and jumper cables. the piping is too low for the outside While warming up the vehicle before
temperature, it may freeze and block the driving, check that the accelerator pedal,
Check the battery and cables. Cold tem- brake pedal, and all other controls operate
peratures reduce battery capacity. The nozzles.
smoothly.
battery must be in good condition to
provide enough power for cold winter CAUTION Clear away ice and snow that has accu-
starts. . Adjust the washer fluid concen- mulated under the fenders to avoid making
tration appropriately for the out- steering difficult. During severe winter
It normally takes longer to start the engine driving, stop when and where it is safe to
in very cold weather conditions. Use an side temperature. If the concen-
tration is inappropriate, sprayed do so and check under the fenders
engine oil of a proper grade and viscosity periodically.
for cold weather. Using heavy summer oil washer fluid may freeze on the
will make it harder to start the engine. windshield and obstruct your ! Parking in cold weather
S08AI0102
Keep the door locks from freezing by view, and the fluid may freeze in
squirting them with deicer or glycerin. the reservoir tank. WARNING
. State or local regulations on
Forcing a frozen door open may damage volatile organic compounds may Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
or separate the rubber weather strips restrict the use of methanol, a gases under your vehicle. Keep
around the door. If the door is frozen, use common windshield washer anti- snow clear of the exhaust pipe and
hot water to melt the ice, and afterwards freeze additive. Washer fluids from around your vehicle if you park
thoroughly wipe the water away. containing non-methanol anti- the vehicle in snow with the engine
freeze agents should be used running.
Use a windshield washer fluid that con-
tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use only if they provide cold weather
engine antifreeze or other substitutes protection without damaging
because they may damage the paint of your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades
CAUTION 2. Use tire stops under the tires to prevent vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly
the vehicle from moving. leading to loss of vehicle control.
. Do not use the parking brake An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en-
when parking for long periods in ! Refueling in cold weather
S08AI0103 hances your vehicle’s braking perfor-
cold weather since it could freeze To help prevent moisture from forming in mance on snowy and icy roads. For
in that position. the fuel system and the risk of its freezing, information on braking on slippery sur-
. When the vehicle is parked in use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel faces, refer to “ABS (Anti-lock Brake
snow or when it snows, raise the tank is recommended during cold weather. System)” F7-36 and “Vehicle Dynamics
wiper blades off the glass to Use only additives that are specifically Control system” F7-39.
prevent damage to them. designed for this purpose. When an anti-
. When the vehicle has been left freeze additive is used, its effect lasts WARNING
parked after use on roads heavily longer if the tank is refilled whenever the
fuel level reaches half empty. For models with cruise control:
covered with snow, or has been
left parked during a snowstorm, If your SUBARU is not going to be used for Do not use the cruise control on
icing may develop on the brake an extended period, it is best to have the slippery roads such as snowy or icy
system, which could cause poor fuel tank filled to capacity. roads. This may cause loss of vehi-
braking action. Check for snow or cle control. 8
ice buildup on the suspension, & Driving on snowy and icy
disc brakes and brake hoses roads
underneath the vehicle. If there To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid
S08AI02 CAUTION
is caked snow or ice, remove it, sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high- Avoid prolonged continuous driving
being careful not to damage the speed driving, and sharp turning when in snowstorms. Snow will enter the
disc brakes and brake hoses and driving on snowy or icy roads. engine’s intake system and may
ABS harness. Always maintain ample distance between hinder the airflow, which could re-
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you sult in engine shutdown or even
When parking for long periods in cold to avoid the need for sudden braking. breakdown.
weather, you should observe the following
To supplement the foot brake, use the
tips.
engine brake effectively to control the
1. For MT models, place the shift lever in vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear
the “1” or “R” position. For CVT models, when necessary.)
place the select lever in the “P” position.
Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha-
– CONTINUED –
! Wiper operation when snowing wiper from working effectively. If snow is ver’s door pillar.
S08AI0201
Before driving in cold weather, make sure stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to If all the four tires are not the
the wiper blade rubbers are not frozen to a safe place, then remove it. If you stop the same for items (a) to (h), serious
the windshield or rear window. vehicle at road side, use the hazard mechanical damage could be
warning flasher to alert other drivers. Refer caused to the drivetrain of the
If the wiper blade rubbers are frozen to the to “Hazard warning flasher” F3-8. car, and affect the followings.
windshield or rear window, perform the
following procedure. & Corrosion protection – Ride
. To thaw the windshield wiper blade Refer to “Corrosion protection” F10-4.
S08AI03 – Handling
rubbers, use the defroster with the airflow – Braking
selection in “ ” and the temperature set & Snow tires – Speedometer/Odometer cali-
for maximum warmth until the wiper blade S08AI04
bration
rubbers are completely thawed. Refer to
“Climate control” F4-1. WARNING – Clearance between the body
. If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper and tires
. When replacing or installing
deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the tire(s), all four tires must be the It also may be dangerous and
windshield wiper blade rubbers. Refer to same for the following items. lead to loss of vehicle control,
“Defogger and deicer” F3-91. and it can lead to an accident.
(a) Size
. To thaw the rear wiper blade rubbers, . Do not use a combination of
use the rear window defogger. Refer to (b) Speed symbol radial, belted bias or bias tires
“Defogger and deicer” F3-91. (c) Load index since it may cause dangerous
(d) Circumference handling characteristics and lead
When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts to an accident.
to stick on the surface of the windshield (e) Construction
despite wiper operation, use the defroster (f) Manufacturer Your vehicle is equipped with “all season
with the airflow selection in “ ” and the (g) Brand (tread pattern) tires” as original equipment, which are
temperature set for maximum warmth. designed to provide an adequate measure
After the windshield gets warmed enough (h) Degrees of wear
of traction, handling and braking perfor-
to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away For items (a) to (c), you must mance in year-round driving. In winter, it
using the windshield washer. Refer to obey the specification that is may be possible to enhance performance
“Windshield washer” F3-80. printed on the tire inflation pres- through use of tires designed specifically
sure label. The tire inflation pres- for winter driving conditions.
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the sure label is located on the dri-
When you choose to install winter tires on Follow the device manufacturer’s in- models).
your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire structions, especially regarding max-
size and type. You must install four winter imum vehicle speed. If your vehicle is a CVT model, for
tires that are of the same size, construc- information about holding the transmission
To help avoid damage to your vehicle, in the 2nd position, refer to “Selection of
tion, brand and load range and you should drive slowly, readjust or remove the
never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires manual mode” F7-28.
device if it is contacting your vehicle,
since this may result in dangerous hand- and do not spin your wheels. Damage
ling characteristics. When you choose a caused to your vehicle by use of a
tire, make sure that there is enough traction device is not covered under
clearance between the tire and vehicle warranty.
body.
Make certain that any traction device
Remember to drive with care at all times you use is an SAE class S device, and
regardless of the type of tires on your use it on the front wheels only. Always
vehicle. use the utmost care when driving with a
traction device. Overconfidence be-
& Tire chains cause you are using a traction device
S08AI05
could easily lead to a serious accident. 8
CAUTION
Tire chains cannot be used on your & Rocking the vehicle
S08AI06
vehicle because of the lack of clear- If you must rock the vehicle to free it from
ance between the tires and vehicle snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel-
body. erator pedal slightly and move the shift
lever/select lever back and forth between
“1”/“D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the
NOTE engine. For the best possible traction,
When tire chains cannot be used, use of avoid spinning the wheels when trying to
another type of traction device (such as free the vehicle.
spring chains) may be acceptable if use When the road surface is extremely
on your vehicle is recommended by the slippery, you can obtain better traction by
device manufacturer, taking into ac- starting the vehicle with the transmission in
count tire size and road conditions. 2nd than 1st (both for MT and CVT
. When you carry something inside Do not carry spray cans, containers
WARNING the vehicle, secure it whenever with flammable or corrosive liquids
you can to prevent it from being or any other dangerous items inside
. Never allow passengers to ride the vehicle.
on a folded rear seatback in the thrown around inside the vehicle
cargo area. Doing so may result during sudden stops, sharp turns
or in an accident.
in serious injury. NOTE
. Never stack luggage or other . Do not pile heavy loads on the For better fuel economy, do not carry
cargo higher than the top of the roof. These loads raise the vehi- unneeded cargo.
seatback because it could tumble cle’s center of gravity and make it
forward and injure passengers in more prone to tip over.
& Vehicle capacity weight
the event of a sudden stop or . Secure lengthy items properly to S08AJ01
& GVWR and GAWR (Gross Ve- assembly) plus the vehicle capacity
hicle Weight Rating and weight.
Gross Axle Weight Rating) In addition, the total weight applied to each
S08AJ02
axle (GAW) must never exceed the
GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be
adjusted by relocating luggage inside the
vehicle.
Even if the total weight of your luggage is
lower than the vehicle capacity weight,
either front or rear GAW may exceed the
GAWR, depending on the distribution of
the luggage.
Vehicle placard When possible, the load should be evenly
The load capacity of your vehicle is distributed throughout the vehicle.
determined by weight, not by available If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you
cargo space. The maximum load you can Certification label should confirm that GVW and front and 8
carry in your vehicle is shown on the rear GAWs are within the GVWR and
vehicle placard attached to the driver’s The certification label attached to the
bottom of driver’s side door pillar shows GAWR by putting your vehicle on a vehicle
side door pillar. It includes the total weight scale, found at a commercial weighing
of the driver and all passengers and their GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating). station.
belongings, any optional equipment such
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier, The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must Do not use replacement tires with a lower
etc., and the tongue load of a trailer. never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the load range than the originals because they
combined total of weight of the vehicle, may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita-
fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any tions. Replacement tires with a higher load
optional equipment and trailer tongue range than the originals do not increase
load. Therefore, the GVW changes de- the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
pending on the situation. The GVWR
equals Curb Weight (actual weight of your
vehicle – including standard equipment,
fluids, emergency tools and spare tire
– CONTINUED –
& Roof rail does not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg). & Roof tent
S08AJ04 S08AJ14
Overloading may cause damage
to the vehicle.
. For cargo carrying purposes, the
roof rails must be used together
with the crossbars and any ap-
propriate carrying attachment
that may be needed. The roof
rails must never be used alone
to carry cargo. Otherwise, da-
mage to the roof or paint, or a
dangerous road hazard due to
loss of cargo could result.
1) Crossbar
Cargo can be carried on the roof after NOTE WARNING
securing the crossbars to the roof rails and Remember that the vehicle’s center of
installing an appropriate carrying attach- gravity is altered with the weight of the Adding weight to the vehicle’s roof
ment. When installing crossbars and a load on the roof, thus affecting driving can adversely affect handling, brak-
carrying attachment, follow the manufac- characteristics. ing, and rollover resistance. The
turer’s instructions. The roof rail system is Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard vehicle must never be driven with a
designed to carry loads (cargo, crossbars cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind total roof rail load in excess of 176
and carrying attachment) of no more than effects will be increased. lbs (80 kg).
150 lbs (68 kg). Be sure not to exceed
your vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR.
CAUTION
CAUTION . The roof rail load limit for sta-
. When using a carrying attach- tionary vehicles (700 lbs (317 kg))
ment, make sure that the total applies only when the vehicle is
carrying load of the cargo, cross- parked and the load is evenly
bars and carrying attachment distributed left/right and front/
rear and the roof crossbars and
roof tent are tightly secured to ! When the vehicle is parked on level
the vehicle. If these conditions ground
S08AJ1402
are not met, the load limit will be
lower.
. The maximum load limit of the
roof crossbars must be obtained
from the manufacturer or retailer
of the roof rack. When driving the
vehicle, the maximum roof rail
load is 176 lbs (80 kg) or the
crossbar load limit (whichever is
lower).
A: Roof rails
B: Roof crossbars
C: Roof tent
B + C < 176 lbs (80 kg) A: Roof rails
B: Roof crossbars
C: Roof tent
D: Occupants in the roof tent
– CONTINUED –
The total weight on the roof rails – Trailer hitch (dealer option) safety hazard.
including the roof crossbars, roof tent, S08AK . Although towing regulations for
and all occupants and contents in the roof trailer or caravan vehicles vary
tent – must not exceed either the vehicle’s WARNING by state/region, all regulations
roof rail load limit (700 lbs (317 kg)), evenly agree that specifications such
distributed, or the load limit of the roof . Never exceed the maximum
weight specified for the trailer as the maximum gross trailer
crossbars, whichever is lower. weight must not exceed the les-
hitch. Exceeding the maximum
Load limit of the roof rail (A). weight could cause an accident ser of the following:
B + C + D < 700 lbs (317 kg) resulting in serious personal in- – Maximum gross trailer weight
juries. Permissible trailer weight – Maximum gross tongue
Exceeding this load limit could cause
changes depending on the situa- weight
damage to the vehicle or racking system.
tion. For possible recommenda- – GVWR
The vehicle must never be driven with
tions and limitations, refer to
occupants in the roof tent. Before the – GAWR
“Trailer towing” F8-18.
vehicle is driven, occupants and cargo
. Trailer brakes are required when . Failure to comply with the proce-
must be removed from the roof tent and
the towing load exceeds 1,000 lbs dures set forth will not only
the roof rail load must be restored to within
(453 kg). Be sure your trailer has compromise your safety, but will
the roof rail load limit of 176 lbs (80 kg).
safety chains and that each chain also negate your insurance cov-
Refer to the user manual that accompa-
will hold the trailer’s maximum erage and/or may violate the state
nied the roof tent for important safety
gross weight. Towing trailers road and traffic acts and regula-
information and instructions on the proper
without safety chains could cre- tions.
installation and use of the tent.
ate a traffic safety hazard if the . Use only the ball mount supplied
trailer separates from the hitch with this hitch. Use the hitch only
due to coupling damage or hitch as a weight carrying hitch. Do not
ball damage. use with any type of weight dis-
. Be sure to check the hitch pin and tributing hitch.
safety pin for positive locking . The standard bumper beam must
placement before towing a trailer. be installed after you remove the
If the ball mount comes off the trailer hitch. Consult a SUBARU
hitch receiver, the trailer could dealer for purchase of a standard
get loose and create a traffic bumper beam if you do not have
– CONTINUED –
maximum gross weight. The chains should 9. Confirm proper function of the hitch Trailer towing
cross under the trailer tongue to prevent wire harness by individually activating the S08AL
the tongue from dropping onto the ground brake, stop and turn signal lights on the
Your vehicle is designed and intended to
in case it should disconnect from the hitch trailer.
be used primarily as a passenger-carrying
ball. Allow sufficient slack in the chains
vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional
taking tight turn situations into account; NOTE loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain,
however, be careful not to let them drag on
Always disconnect the trailer wire har- brakes, tires and suspension and has an
the ground.
ness before launching or retrieving a adverse effect on fuel economy.
WARNING watercraft. If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety
and satisfaction depend upon proper use
Do not connect safety chains to any & If not towing a trailer of correct equipment and cautious opera-
S08AK02
part of the vehicle other than the . Remove the ball mount from the hitch tion of your vehicle.
safety chain hooks. receiver tube and insert the receiver cover Drive carefully when towing a trailer, and
onto the hitch receiver tube. always consider the following conditions.
. Place the dust cap over the four-pin . Road conditions
connector of the hitch wire harness to . Weather conditions
protect against possible damage. . Vehicle load weight
. Occasionally lubricate terminals of the . Trailer load weight
four-pin connector using terminal grease.
Seek the advice of your SUBARU dealer to
assist you in purchasing a hitch and other
necessary towing equipment appropriate
for your vehicle. Do not use towing equip-
ment other than genuine SUBARU towing
equipment. In addition, be sure to follow
the instructions for proper installation and
1) Hitch harness connector
use provided by the trailer or caravan’s
manufacturer.
8. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black SUBARU assumes no responsibility for
four-pin wire connector to the towing injuries or vehicle damage that result from
trailer’s wire harness. trailer towing equipment, or from any
errors or omissions in the instructions & Maximum load limits ! Total trailer weight
accompanying such equipment or for your S08AL02 S08AL0201
– CONTINUED –
Certification label
GVWR of your vehicle that is given by
SUBARU is shown on the certification Gross Axle Weight
label located at the bottom of driver’s side The total weight applied to each axle Tongue load 8
door pillar of your vehicle. (GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from 8
Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear to 11 percent of the total trailer weight and
GAWs can be adjusted by relocating does not exceed the maximum value of
passengers and luggage inside the vehi- 150 lbs (68 kg).
cle. The front and rear GAWR of your
vehicle that is given by SUBARU are also
shown on the certification label located at
the bottom of driver’s side door pillar.
To check both GVWR and GAWR and to
confirm that the total weight and weight
distribution are within safe driving limits,
you should have your vehicle and trailer
weighed at a commercial weighing station.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
– CONTINUED –
WARNING
Never drill the frame or under-body
of your vehicle to install a commer-
1) Jack F: Front cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger-
2) Bathroom scale ous exhaust gas, water or mud may
The tongue load can be adjusted by proper
The tongue load can be weighed with a distribution of the load in the trailer. Never enter the passenger compartment
bathroom scale as shown in the illustration load the trailer with more weight in the through the drilled hole. Exhaust
above. When weighing the tongue load, be back than in the front; approximately 60 gas contains carbon monoxide, a
sure to position the towing coupler at the percent of the trailer load should be in the colorless and odorless gas which is
height at which it would be during actual front and approximately 40 percent in the dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
towing, using a jack as shown. rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly as Also, drilling the frame or under-
possible on both the left and right sides. body of your vehicle could cause
deterioration of strength of your
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to vehicle and cause corrosion around
prevent a change in weight distribution the drilled hole.
while driving.
WARNING CAUTION
If the trailer is loaded with more . Do not modify the vehicle ex-
weight in the back of trailer’s axle haust system, brake system, or
than in the front, the load is taken off other systems when installing a
the rear axle of the towing vehicle. hitch or other trailer towing
! Outside mirrors Connection of trailer lights to your vehicle’s In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire
S08AL0403
electrical system requires modifications to when towing a trailer, ask a commercial
the vehicle’s lighting circuit to increase its road service representative or profes-
capacity and accommodate wiring sional to repair the flat tire.
changes. To ensure the trailer lights are
connected properly, please consult your If you carry a regular size spare tire in your
SUBARU dealer. Check for proper opera- vehicle or trailer as a precaution against
tion of the turn signals and the brake lights getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare tire
each time you connect a trailer to your is firmly secured.
vehicle.
& Trailer towing tips
! Tires S08AL05
S08AL0405
CAUTION
WARNING
. For models equipped with the
After hitching a trailer to your vehicle, Never tow a trailer when the tempor- BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and
check that the standard outside mirrors ary spare tire is used. The temporary RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
provide a good rearward field of view spare tire is not designed to sustain driving support systems, when
without significant blind spots. If significant the towing load. Use of the tempor- towing a trailer, press the BSD/
blind spots occur with the vehicle’s stan- ary spare tire when towing can result RCTA OFF switch to deactivate
dard outside mirrors, use towing mirrors in failure of the spare tire and/or less the system. The system may not
that conform with Federal, state/province stability of the vehicle. operate properly due to the
and/or other applicable regulations. blocked radar waves. For details
Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle about the BSD/RCTA OFF switch,
! Trailer lights are properly inflated. Refer to “Tires” F12-
S08AL0404 refer to “BSD/RCTA OFF switch”
8. F7-69.
CAUTION
Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and . For models equipped with the
Direct splicing or other improper proper inflation pressure should be in Reverse Automatic Braking
connection of trailer lights may accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s (RAB) system:
damage your vehicle’s electrical specifications. Also check federal, state, we recommend that you consult
system and cause a malfunction of province and/or other applicable regula- your SUBARU dealer to deacti-
your vehicle’s lighting system. tions. vate the system when towing a
trailer. ! Before starting out on a trip the vehicle’s turn signal lever is oper-
. Towing a trailer in high tempera-
S08AL0501
. Check the towing regulations for trailer ated.
tures, or on long or steep grades, or caravan vehicles that vary by state/ – The safety chains are connected
may cause the vehicle to over- region. Failure to comply with the proce- properly.
heat. Refer to “Engine overheat- dures set forth will not only compromise – All cargo in the trailer is secured
ing” F9-12. your safety, but will also negate your safely in position.
. When towing a trailer, steering, insurance coverage and/or may violate – The outside mirrors provide a good
stability, stopping distance and the state road and traffic acts and regula- rearward field of view without a sig-
braking performance will be dif- tions. nificant blind spot.
ferent when compared to normal . Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to- . Sufficient time should be taken to learn
operation. For safety’s sake, you hitch mounting are in good condition. If any the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination
should employ extra caution problems are apparent, do not tow the before starting out on a trip. In an area free
when towing a trailer and you trailer. of traffic, practice turning, stopping and
should never drive at excessive . Check that the vehicle rests horizon- backing up.
speeds. You should also keep the tally with the trailer attached. If the vehicle ! Driving with a trailer
S08AL0502
following tips in mind: is tipped sharply up at the front and down . You should allow for considerably more
. The braking power of the parking at the rear, check the total trailer weight, stopping distance when towing a trailer.
8
brake may not be sufficient when GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then Avoid sudden braking because it may
stronger braking power is confirm that the load and its distribution are result in skidding or jackknifing and loss
needed (e.g., when parking on a acceptable. of control.
steep slope while towing a trai- . Check that the tire rating and pressures . Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accel-
ler). are correct. erations. If your vehicle has a manual
. Check that the vehicle and trailer are transmission, always start out in first gear
If your vehicle is equipped with SI-DRIVE, connected properly. Confirm that: and release the clutch at moderate engine
and when towing a trailer on an uphill – The trailer tongue is connected revolution.
slope, do not drive in the Intelligent (I) properly to the hitch ball. . Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and
mode. It is recommend that you drive in the – The trailer lights connector is con- rapid lane changes.
Sport (S) mode. nected properly and trailer’s brake . Slow down before turning. Make a
However, it is possible to tow a trailer in lights illuminate when the vehicle’s longer than normal turning radius because
any mode of the SI-DRIVE on a downhill brake pedal is pressed, and that the the trailer wheels will be closer than the
slope. trailer’s turn signal lights flash when vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In a
– CONTINUED –
tight turn, the trailer could hit your vehicle. 3. Turn the wheel in the opposite direc-
. Crosswinds will adversely affect the tion.
handling of your vehicle and trailer, caus- 4. Steer the vehicle around to be in line
ing sway. Crosswinds can be due to with the trailer, then straighten the steering
weather conditions or the passing of large again.
trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly
grip the steering wheel and promptly begin . If the ABS warning light illuminates
decelerating your vehicle at a gradual while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing
pace. the trailer and have repairs performed
immediately by your nearest SUBARU
. When passing other vehicles, consider-
dealer.
able distance is required because of the
added weight and length caused by ! Driving on grades
S08AL0503
attaching the trailer to your vehicle. . Before going down a steep hill, slow
. Reversing the vehicle with a trailer can down and shift into lower gear (if neces-
be difficult and requires experience. Never sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the
accelerate or steer rapidly, and grip the engine braking effect and prevent over-
bottom of the steering wheel with one heating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not
hand. make sudden downshifts.
. When driving uphill in hot weather, the
air conditioner may turn off automatically
to protect the engine from overheating.
. When driving uphill in hot weather, pay
attention to the following indicators be-
cause the engine and transmission are
relatively prone to overheating.
: Coolant temperature high warning light
To reverse around a corner, perform the
following procedure. : AT OIL TEMP warning light
1. Reverse slowly and steer in the oppo- (CVT models)
site direction to the way you want to turn. If the coolant temperature high warning
2. Once the trailer begins to swing light and/or the AT OIL TEMP warning light
around, straighten the steering wheel. illuminates, immediately turn off the air
conditioner and stop the vehicle in the blocks absorb the load.
nearest safe location. For further instruc- 4. Apply the regular brakes and then
tions and additional information, refer to apply the parking brake; slowly release
the following sections. the regular brakes.
– “If you park your vehicle in case of 5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (MT
an emergency” F9-2 models) or “P” position (CVT models)
– “Engine overheating” F9-12 and shut off the engine.
– “Coolant temperature low indicator
light/Coolant temperature high warn-
ing light” F3-16
– “AT OIL TEMP warning light (CVT
models)” F3-18
. For CVT models, avoid using the
accelerator pedal to stay stationary on an
uphill slope instead of using the parking
brake or foot brake. That may cause the 8
transmission fluid to overheat.
! Parking on a grade
S08AL0504
Always block the wheels under both
vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply
the parking brake firmly. You should not
park on a hill or slope. If parking on a hill or
slope cannot be avoided, you should take
the following steps:
1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal
down.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks
under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
release the regular brakes slowly until the
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
In case of emergency
If you park your vehicle in case of Towing ................................................................... 9-13
S09
an emergency....................................................... 9-2 Towing hooks and tie-down hooks/holes............... 9-13
Temporary spare tire .............................................. 9-2 Using a flat-bed truck ........................................... 9-16
Maintenance tools................................................... 9-3 Towing with all wheels on the ground ................... 9-16
Tool locations ........................................................ 9-3 Access key fob – if access key fob does not
Using the jack........................................................ 9-4 operate properly ................................................ 9-17
Flat tires................................................................... 9-5 Locking and unlocking ......................................... 9-18
Changing a flat tire ................................................ 9-5 Switching power status ........................................ 9-18
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) Starting engine ..................................................... 9-18
(U.S.-spec. models) .............................................. 9-8 Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be
Jump starting ........................................................ 9-10 opened................................................................ 9-19
How to jump start ................................................. 9-10 Moonroof (if equipped) – if the moonroof
Engine overheating............................................... 9-12 does not close ................................................... 9-20
If steam is coming from the engine If your vehicle is involved in an accident........... 9-20
compartment ...................................................... 9-12 Automatic door locking/unlocking operation
If no steam is coming from the engine when involved in an accident............................. 9-20
compartment ...................................................... 9-12
9
Flat tires
S09AC
WARNING
– CONTINUED –
CAUTION
Do not hit and bend the disc rotor 6. Take out the tool bucket and turn the
backing plate when removing and 4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear attaching bolt counterclockwise, then take
installing the tire. A bent backing of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire. the spare tire out.
plate may scrape against the disc
5. Take out the jack, jack handle and
rotor and cause noise while the
wheel nut wrench.
NOTE
vehicle is in motion. If the spare tire provided in your vehicle
The tools and the spare tire are stored
under the cargo area. Refer to “Mainte- is a temporary spare tire, carefully read
“Temporary spare tire” F9-2 and
NOTE nance tools” F9-3.
strictly follow the instructions.
Contact a SUBARU dealer when jacking NOTE
up the vehicle using a garage jack.
Make sure that the jack is well lubri-
1. Park on a hard, level surface, when- cated before using it.
ever possible, then stop the engine.
2. Apply the parking brake securely and
shift the shift lever in reverse (MT models)
or the select lever to the “P” (Park) position
(CVT models).
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher and
unload all occupants and luggage from the
7. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack
nut wrench but do not remove the nuts. head engages firmly into the jack-up point.
Jack-up points 9. Insert the jack handle into the jack- 11. Before putting the spare tire on, clean
8. Place the jack under the side sill at the screw, and turn the handle until the tire the mounting surface of the wheel and hub
front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle with a cloth.
tire. higher than necessary.
– CONTINUED –
12. Put on the spare tire. Replace the For the wheel nut tightening torque, refer 16. Store the jack, jack handle and wheel
wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand. to “Tires” F12-8. Never use your foot on nut wrench in their storage locations.
the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension
WARNING on the wrench because you may exceed
the specified torque. Have the wheel nut WARNING
Do not use oil or grease on the wheel torque checked at the nearest automotive
studs or nuts when the spare tire is Never place a tire or tire changing
service facility. tools in the passenger compartment
installed. This could cause the nuts
to become loose and lead to an after changing wheels. In a sudden
accident. stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike occupants and cause
injury. Store the tire and all tools in
13. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise
the proper place.
to lower the vehicle.
1) Support holder
indicated by sending a signal from a pressure, a tire may have signifi- cleaned off.
sensor that is installed in each wheel when cant damage and a fast leak that If the light illuminates steadily
tire pressure is severely low. causes the tire to lose air rapidly. after blinking for approximately
The tire pressure monitoring system will If you have a flat tire, replace it one minute, promptly contact a
activate only when the vehicle is driven. with a spare tire as soon as SUBARU dealer to have the sys-
Also, this system may not react immedi- possible. tem inspected.
ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for . When a spare tire is mounted or a
example, a blow-out caused running over wheel rim is replaced without the
a sharp object). original pressure sensor/trans-
mitter being transferred, the low
WARNING tire pressure warning light will
. If the low tire pressure warning illuminate steadily after blinking
light illuminates while driving, for approximately one minute.
never brake suddenly. Instead, This indicates the TPMS is unable
perform the following procedure. to monitor all four road wheels.
Contact your SUBARU dealer as
(1) Keep driving straight ahead soon as possible for tire and
while gradually reducing sensor replacement and/or sys-
speed. tem resetting.
(2) Slowly pull off the road to a
9
. When a tire is repaired with liquid
safe place. Otherwise an acci- sealant, the tire pressure warning
dent involving serious vehicle valve and transmitter may not
damage and serious personal operate properly. If a liquid sea-
injury could occur. lant is used, contact your nearest
(3) Check the pressure for all four SUBARU dealer or other qualified
tires and adjust the pressure service shop as soon as possi-
to the COLD tire pressure ble. Make sure to replace the tire
shown on the vehicle placard pressure warning valve and
on the door pillar on the transmitter when replacing the
driver’s side. tire. You may reuse the wheel if
If this light still illuminates while there is no damage to it and if the
driving after adjusting the tire sealant residue is properly
Jump starting protectors, and remove metal & How to jump start
S09AD01
S09AD objects such as rings, bands or
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12
other metal jewelry.
WARNING volts and the negative terminal is
. Be sure the jumper cables and grounded.
. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID. clamps on them do not have 2. If the booster battery is in another
Do not let it come in contact with loose or missing insulation. vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.
the eyes, skin, clothing or the Do not jump start unless cables 3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and
vehicle. in suitable condition are avail- accessories.
If battery fluid gets on you, thor- able. 4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in
oughly flush the exposed area . A running engine can be danger- the sequence illustrated.
with water immediately. Get med- ous. Keep your fingers, hands,
ical help if the fluid has entered clothing, hair and tools away
your eyes. from the cooling fan, belts and
If battery fluid is accidentally any other moving engine parts.
swallowed, immediately drink a Removing rings, watches and
large amount of milk or water, ties is advisable.
and obtain immediate medical . Jump starting is dangerous if it
help. done incorrectly. If you are un-
Keep everyone including chil- sure about the proper procedure
dren away from the battery. for jump starting, consult a com-
petent mechanic.
. The gas generated by a battery
explodes if a flame or spark is When your vehicle does not start due to a
brought near it. Do not smoke or run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle
light a match while jump starting. may be jump started by connecting your
. Never attempt jump starting if the battery to another battery (called the
discharged battery is frozen. It booster battery) with jumper cables.
could cause the battery to burst
or explode.
. Whenever working on or around a
battery, always wear suitable eye
A) Booster battery
B) Strut mounting nut
Engine overheating & If no steam is coming from the If you remove the radiator cap from a hot
S09AE engine compartment radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the
S09AE02 radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-
WARNING 1. Keep the engine running at idling clockwise slowly without pressing down
speed. until it stops. Release the pressure from
Never attempt to remove the radiator 2. Open the engine hood to ventilate the the radiator. After the pressure has been
cap until the engine has been shut engine compartment. Refer to “Engine fully released, remove the cap by pressing
off and has fully cooled down. When hood” F11-5. down and turning it.
the engine is hot, the coolant is Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If
under pressure. Removing the cap the fan is not turning, immediately turn off
while the engine is still hot could the engine and contact an authorized
release a spray of boiling hot cool- SUBARU dealer for repair.
ant, which could burn you very 3. After the coolant temperature high
seriously. warning light that has blinked or illumi-
nated in RED turns off, turn off the engine.
For details about the warning light, refer to
CAUTION “Coolant temperature low indicator light/
Coolant temperature high warning light”
If the engine overheats, the engine F3-16.
speed or the vehicle speed may be 4. After the engine has fully cooled down,
reduced. Stop the vehicle in a safe check the coolant level in the reserve tank.
place immediately. If the coolant level is below the “LOW”
mark, add coolant up to the “FULL” mark.
& If steam is coming from the NOTE
engine compartment For details about how to check the
S09AE01
. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/ coolant level or how to add coolant,
“OFF” position and get everyone away refer to “Engine coolant” F11-11.
from the vehicle until it cools down.
5. If there is no coolant in the reserve
. Contact an authorized SUBARU deal- tank, add coolant to the reserve tank. Then
er. remove the radiator cap and fill the radiator
with coolant.
Towing & Towing hooks and tie-down with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not
S09AF hooks/holes scratch the bumper. Insert the flat-head
S09AF01 screwdriver into the cutout of the cover and
If towing is necessary, it is best done by The towing hook should be used only in an pry open the cover.
your SUBARU dealer or a commercial emergency.
towing service. Observe the following
procedures for safety. CAUTION
Use only the specified towing hooks
and tie-down hooks/holes. Never
use suspension parts or other parts
of the body for towing or tie-down
purposes.
– CONTINUED –
CAUTION
To prevent deformation to the bum-
per and the towing hook, do not
apply excessive load to the towing
hook.
4. Tighten the towing hook securely using 3. Screw the towing hook into the thread
the jack handle. hole until its thread can no longer be seen.
After towing, remove the towing hook from
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
WARNING
. Do not use the towing hook
except when towing your vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the 2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver
towing hook mounted on the with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not
vehicle could interfere with prop- scratch the bumper. Pry off the cover on
er operation of the SRS airbag the rear bumper using a screwdriver, and
system in a frontal collision. 4. Tighten the towing hook securely using
you will find a threaded hole for attaching the jack handle.
the towing hook.
After towing, remove the towing hook from ! Front tie-down hooks ! Rear tie-down holes
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket. S09AF0106 S09AF0107
WARNING
. Do not use the towing hook
except when towing your vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with prop-
er operation of the fuel pump
shut off function when the vehi-
cle is struck from behind. The front tie-down hooks are located
between each of the front tires and the
front bumper.
CAUTION
To prevent deformation to the bum- 9
per and the towing hook, do not
apply excessive load to the towing
hook.
plugs. After using the rear tie-down holes, 2. Pull up the parking brake lever firmly. & Towing with all wheels on the
return the plugs to their original places. 3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier ground
properly with safety chains. Each safety S09AF03
WARNING
This is the best way to transport your
vehicle. Use the following procedures to . Never turn the ignition switch to
ensure safe transportation. the “LOCK”/“OFF” position while
1. Shift the select lever into the “P” the vehicle is being towed be-
position for CVT models. Shift the shift cause the steering wheel and the
lever into the “1st” position for MT models. direction of the wheels will be
In case of emergency/Access key fob – if access key fob does not operate properly 9-17
locked. will not work while towing. Doing Access key fob – if access key
. Remember that the brake booster so could overheat the brake. fob does not operate properly
and power steering do not func- . Drive carefully and do not make S09AP
tion when the engine is not run- an impact on the towing rope by
ning. Because the engine is suddenly starting. CAUTION
turned off, it will take greater . Use a specific towing rope for
effort to operate the brake pedal towing. If wire ropes and metal Keep metallic objects, magnetic
and steering wheel. chains are needed to be used for sources and signal transmitters
towing, wrap the contact portion away from the area between the
of the bumper with cloth to pro- access key fob and the push-button
CAUTION tect it from damage. ignition switch. They may interfere
with the communication between
. If transmission failure occurs, the access key fob and the push-
transport your vehicle on a flat- button ignition switch.
bed truck.
. Sometime damaged vehicles can- The following functions may be inoperable
not be towed because of their because of strong radio signals in the
damaged condition. In that case, surrounding area or a low battery condition
use a flat-bed truck for transpor- of the access key fob.
tation.
9
. Locking/unlocking doors (including the
. For CVT models, the traveling rear gate)
speed must be limited to less . Switching power status
than 20 mph (32 km/h) and the . Starting engine
traveling distance to less than 31
miles (50 km). For greater speeds In such cases, perform the following
and distances, transport your procedure. When the battery of the access
vehicle on a flat-bed truck. key fob is discharged, replace it with a new
. Use a flat-bed truck if there are one. Refer to “Replacing battery of access
long distance downgrades or key fob” F11-46.
steep slopes. However, do not
apply the brake pedal for a long
time because the engine braking
– CONTINUED –
9-18 In case of emergency/Access key fob – if access key fob does not operate properly
& Locking and unlocking & Switching power status . When the keyless access with push-
S09AP01 S09AP02 button start system is deactivated:
1. Apply the parking brake. “ACC”
2. Shift the shift lever to neutral (MT . Under other conditions: “ON”
models) or the select lever to the “P”
5. When the keyless access with push-
(Park) position (CVT models).
button start system is deactivated, press
3. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models) the push-button ignition switch with the
or the brake pedal (CVT models). clutch pedal (MT models) or the brake
pedal (CVT models) released. The status
of the push-button ignition switch then
changes to “ON”.
NOTE
If the power does not switch even
1) Release button
though the above procedure was fol-
2) Emergency key
lowed precisely, contact your SUBARU
While pressing the release button of the dealer.
access key fob, take out the emergency
key. & Starting engine
S09AP03
Lock or unlock the driver’s door with the 1. Apply the parking brake.
emergency key in the procedure described 4. Hold the access key fob with the 2. Shift the shift lever to neutral (MT
in “Locking and unlocking from the out- buttons facing you, and touch the push- models) or the select lever to the “P”
side” F2-21. button ignition switch with it. (Park) position (CVT models).
NOTE When the communication between the 3. Depress the brake pedal.
access key fob and the vehicle is com- 4. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models).
After locking or unlocking, be sure to
pleted, a chime (ding) will sound. At the
attach the emergency key back to the
same time, the status of the push-button
access key fob.
ignition switch changes to either of the
following.
Moonroof (if equipped) – if the If your vehicle is involved in Models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
moonroof does not close an accident
S09AJ S09AR
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
or “ACC” position.
If the moonroof does not close, we
recommend that you have the system
CAUTION 2. Restart the engine.
checked by a SUBARU dealer.
If your vehicle is involved in an Models with “keyless access with
accident, be sure to inspect the push-button start system”:
ground under the vehicle before 1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
restarting the engine. If you find that the “ACC” or “OFF” position.
fuel has leaked on the ground, do 2. Restart the engine.
not try to restart the engine. The fuel
system has been damaged and is in
need of repair. Immediately contact & Automatic door locking/un-
the nearest automotive service facil- locking operation when in-
ity. We recommend that you consult volved in an accident
your SUBARU dealer. S09AR03
When the automatic door locking/unlock-
Your vehicle has a fuel pump shut off ing function is ON, all the doors will be
system. When the vehicle sustains an locked automatically while driving. For
impact in an accident, etc., the fuel pump further details, refer to “Automatic door
shut off system stops supplying the fuel in locking/unlocking” F2-23.
order to minimize fuel leakage. However, When the vehicle sustains a strong impact
depending on the impact conditions at the which may trigger the airbags to deploy,
time of collision, the fuel pump shut-off the door locks may be unlocked automa-
system may not operate. tically to enable emergency escape. Gen-
Perform the following procedures to restart erally, an impact sustained from a rear end
the engine after the system is activated. collision does not trigger the airbags to
deploy. However if the impact is strong
enough to deploy the airbags, it can also
trigger the unlocking function.
Under such circumstance, the automatic
NOTE
Depending on the severity of the im-
pact, the emergency unlocking may not
function.
CAUTION
If the following occur, there may be a
malfunction in the system.
Have the system inspected by a
SUBARU dealer.
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Appearance care
Exterior care.......................................................... 10-2 Cleaning the interior............................................. 10-5
S10
Washing ............................................................... 10-2 Seat fabric ............................................................ 10-5
Waxing and polishing............................................ 10-3 Leather seat materials .......................................... 10-6
Cleaning alloy wheels ........................................... 10-4 Synthetic leather upholstery ................................. 10-6
Corrosion protection ............................................ 10-4 Seatbelt ................................................................ 10-6
Most common causes of corrosion ....................... 10-4 Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument
To help prevent corrosion ..................................... 10-5 panel, console panel, and switches.................... 10-6
Monitor................................................................. 10-7
10
Exterior care the cover surface may be da- to scratch the camera lens. Do not use a
S10AA maged. washing brush directly on the camera
& Washing . Since your vehicle is equipped lens. The image quality of the rear view
S10AA01
with a rear wiper, automatic car- camera may deteriorate.
CAUTION wash brushes could become The best way to preserve your vehicle’s
tangled around it, damaging the beauty is frequent washing. Wash the
. When washing the vehicle, the wiper arm and other compo- vehicle at least once a month to avoid
brakes may get wet. As a result, nents. Ask the automatic car- contamination by road grime.
the brake stopping distance will wash operator not to let the
be longer. To dry the brakes, drive brushes touch the wiper arm or Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
the vehicle at a safe speed while to fix the wiper arm on the rear of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash the
lightly depressing the brake ped- window glass with adhesive tape vehicle with hot water and in direct sun-
al to heat up the brakes. before operating the machine. light.
. Do not wash the engine compart- . For models with a rod-type roof Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree sap,
ment and area adjacent to it. If antenna, remove the antenna rod and bird droppings should be washed off
water enters the engine air intake before washing your car at a car by using a light detergent, as required. If
or electrical parts, it will cause wash. If the antenna rod remains you use a light detergent, make certain
engine trouble or a malfunction attached, it may scratch the roof. that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use
of electrical equipment. When reinstalling the removed strong soap or chemical detergents. All
. When washing inner fenders, un- antenna rod, be sure to fully cleaning agents should be promptly
derbody, bumpers and protrud- tighten it. flushed from the surface and not allowed
ing objects such as exhaust to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly
pipes and exhaust finishers, be with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the
careful to prevent injuries from NOTE remaining water off with a chamois or soft
contacting sharp ends. . When having your vehicle washed in cloth. Wear rubber gloves and use a hand
an automatic car wash, make sure brush when washing down underbody,
. Do not use any organic solvents
beforehand that the car wash is of inner fenders and suspension to effec-
when washing the surface of the
suitable type. tively remove mud and dirt off.
bulb assembly cover. However, if
a detergent with organic solvents . The rear view camera lens has a hard
is used to wash the cover sur- coating to help prevent scratches.
face, completely rinse off the However, when washing the vehicle or
detergent with water. Otherwise, cleaning the camera lens, be careful not
! Washing the underbody . Be careful not to flush the engine mended that a coat of wax be applied at
Chemicals, salts and gravel used for
S10AA0101
bottom for a long time. It may least once a month, or whenever the
deicing road surfaces are extremely cor- cause damage of some electrical surface no longer repels water.
rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un- parts.
If the appearance of the paint has dimin-
derbody components, such as the exhaust ished to the point where the luster or tone
system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, ! Using a warm water washer cannot be restored, lightly polish the sur-
S10AA0102
floor pan and fenders, and suspension. . Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm) face with a fine-grained compound. Never
Thoroughly flush the underbody and inside or more between the washer nozzle and polish just the affected area, but include
of the fenders with lukewarm or cold water the vehicle. the surrounding area as well. Always
at frequent intervals to reduce the harmful . Do not wash the same area continu- polish in only one direction. A No. 2000
effects of such agents. ously. grain compound is recommended. Never
. If a stain will not come out easily, wash use a coarse-grained compound. Coarse-
Mud and sand adhering to the underbody
by hand. Some warm water washers are of grained compounds have a smaller grain-
components may accelerate their corro-
the high temperature, high pressure type, size number and could damage the paint.
sion.
and they can damage or deform the resin After polishing with a compound, coat with
After driving off-road or on muddy or sandy wax to restore the original luster. Frequent
roads, wash the mud and sand off the parts such as moldings, or cause water to
leak into the vehicle. polishing with a compound or an incorrect
underbody. Carefully flush the suspension polishing technique will result in removing
and axle parts, as they are particularly the paint layer and exposing the under-
prone to mud and sand buildup. Do not use & Waxing and polishing coat. When in doubt, it is always best to
S10AA02
a sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud. Always wash and dry the vehicle before contact your SUBARU dealer or an auto
waxing and polishing. paint specialist.
10
CAUTION Use a good quality polish and wax and
. Be careful not to damage brake apply them according to the manufac- CAUTION
hoses, sensor harnesses, and turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when
the painted surface is cool. Do not use any agents with organic
other parts when washing sus- solvents on the surface of the bulb
pension components. Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim, assembly cover. However, if a polish
as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of or wax with organic solvents is
wax on a painted surface leads to loss of applied to the cover surface, com-
the original luster and also quickens the pletely wipe off the polish or wax.
deterioration of the surface. It is recom- Otherwise, the cover surface may be
– CONTINUED –
. Dampness in certain parts of the of maintenance and treatment if you need Cleaning the interior
vehicle remains for a long time, even assistance. S10AC
though other parts of the vehicle may be
Repair chips and scratches in the paint as Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
dry.
soon as you find them. control panel, audio equipment, instru-
. High temperatures will cause corrosion ment panel, center console, combination
to parts of the vehicle which cannot dry Check the interior of the vehicle for water meter panel, and switches. (Do not use
quickly due to lack of proper ventilation. and dirt accumulation under the floor mats organic solvents.)
because that could cause corrosion. Oc-
& To help prevent corrosion casionally check under the mats to make CAUTION
S10AB02
Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent sure the area is dry.
corrosion of the body and suspension Keep your garage dry. Do not park your Do not use sharp instruments or
components. Also, wash the vehicle vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated gar- window cleaner containing abra-
promptly after driving on any of the age. In such a garage, corrosion can be sives to clean the inner surface of
following surfaces. caused by dampness. If you wash the the rear window. They may damage
vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle into the conductors printed on the win-
. Roads that have been salted to prevent
the garage when wet or covered with dow.
them from freezing in winter
snow, that can cause dampness.
. Mud, sand, or gravel
. Coastal roads If your vehicle is operated in cold weather & Seat fabric
and/or in areas where road salts and other S10AC01
After the winter has ended, it is recom- corrosive materials are used, the door Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a
mended that the underbody be given a hinges and locks, rear gate lock, and hood vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the
very thorough washing. fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum 10
latch should be inspected and lubricated
periodically. cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it.
Before the beginning of winter, check the Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly wrung
condition of underbody components, such cloth and dry the seat fabric thoroughly. If
as the exhaust system, fuel and brake the fabric is still dirty, wipe using a solution
lines, brake cables, suspension, steering of mild soap and lukewarm water then dry
system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of thoroughly.
them are found to be rusted, they should
be given an appropriate rust prevention If the stain does not come out, try a
treatment or should be replaced. Contact commercially-available fabric cleaner.
your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind Use the cleaner on a hidden place and
– CONTINUED –
make sure it does not affect the fabric covered, or the windows shaded, to pre- & Seatbelt
adversely. Use the cleaner according to its vent fading or shrinkage. S10AC09
For details about how to clean the seatbelt,
instructions. Minor surface blemishes or bald patches refer to “Seatbelt maintenance” F1-20.
may be treated with a commercial leather
CAUTION spray lacquer. You will discover that each & Climate control panel, audio
leather seat section will develop soft folds
When cleaning the seat, do not use
or wrinkles, which is characteristic of
panel, instrument panel, con-
benzine, paint thinner, or any similar
genuine leather. sole panel, and switches
materials. Doing so could damage S10AC04
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
the surface and cause the color to control panel, audio equipment, instru-
deteriorate. & Synthetic leather upholstery
S10AC03 ment panel, center console, combination
The synthetic leather material used on the
meter panel, and switches.
SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap
& Leather seat materials or detergent and water, after first vacuum- CAUTION
S10AC02 ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the
The leather used by SUBARU is a high
soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe . Do not use organic solvents such
quality natural product which will retain its
off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial as paint thinners or fuel, or
distinctive appearance and feel for many
foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic strong cleaning agents that con-
years with proper care.
leather materials may be used when tain those solvents. Doing so
Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the necessary. could damage the surface and
surface can cause the material to become
cause the color to deteriorate.
brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular CAUTION
cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber . Do not use chemical solvents that
cloth should be performed monthly, taking Strong cleaning agents such as contain silicone on the vehicle
care not to soak the leather or allow water solvents, paint thinners, window audio system, electrical compo-
to penetrate the stitched seams. cleaner or fuel must never be used nents of the air-conditioner or
A mild detergent suitable for cleaning on leather or synthetic interior ma- any switches. If silicone adheres
woolen fabrics may be used to remove terials. Doing so could damage the to these parts, it may cause
difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry surface and cause the color to damage to electrical compo-
cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If deteriorate. nents.
your SUBARU is to be parked for a long
time in bright sunlight, it is recommended
that the seats and head restraints be
& Monitor
S10AC05
To clean the audio/navigation/multi-func-
tion display monitor, wipe it with a silicone
cloth or with a soft cloth. If the monitor is
extremely dirty, clean it with a soft cloth
moistened with neutral detergent then
carefully wipe off any remaining detergent.
CAUTION
. Do not spray neutral detergent
directly onto the monitor. Doing
so could damage the monitor’s
components.
. Do not wipe the monitor with a
hard cloth. Doing so could
scratch the monitor.
. Do not use cleaning fluid that
contains thinner, fuel, or any
other volatile substance. Such
cleaning fluid could erase the 10
lettering on the switches at the
bottom of the monitor.
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Tire replacement ................................................. 11-27 Front turn signal light ......................................... 11-40
Wheel replacement ............................................. 11-28 Parking light ....................................................... 11-40
Alloy wheels ........................................................ 11-28 Front fog light (if equipped) ................................ 11-40
Windshield washer fluid ..................................... 11-29 Rear combination lights...................................... 11-40
Adding the windshield washer fluid..................... 11-29 Backup light ....................................................... 11-42
Windshield washer fluid ...................................... 11-29 License plate light .............................................. 11-43
Replacement of wiper blades ............................ 11-30 Map light ............................................................ 11-43
Windshield wiper blade assembly........................ 11-31 Vanity mirror light (if equipped)........................... 11-43
Windshield wiper blade rubber ............................ 11-32 Dome light and cargo area light .......................... 11-43
Rear window wiper blade assembly..................... 11-33 Other bulbs ........................................................ 11-44
Rear window wiper blade rubber ......................... 11-34 Adjusting headlight aim (models with LED
headlights) ...................................................... 11-44
Battery ................................................................. 11-35
Replacing key battery .........................................11-45
Fuses ................................................................... 11-36
Safety precautions.............................................. 11-45
Installation of accessories ................................. 11-38 Replacing battery of access key fob ................... 11-46
Replacing bulbs .................................................. 11-38 Replacing transmitter battery .............................. 11-47
Headlights (models with LED headlights) ............ 11-38
Headlights (models with halogen headlights)....... 11-39
erative. NEVER use a circuit tes- & Before checking or servicing operation indicator on the
ter for this wiring. If your SRS in the engine compartment switch is turned off. Then take
airbag or seatbelt pretensioner S11AB01 the access key fob out from
needs service, consult your near- WARNING the vehicle.
est SUBARU dealer. – Models without push-button
. Check the inside of the engine . Always stop the engine and apply start system:
compartment to see if there are the parking brake firmly to pre- Always remove the key from
any cloths and tools left. If they vent the vehicle from moving. the ignition switch.
are left inside, they may be a . Always let the engine cool down. . Before performing any servicing
cause of malfunction and fire. Engine parts become very hot on a vehicle equipped with a
when the engine is running and remote engine start system (a
remain hot for some time after the dealer option), temporarily place
NOTE engine has stopped. the remote engine start system in
SUBARU does not endorse the use of . Do not spill engine oil, engine service mode to prevent it from
non-SUBARU approved flushing sys- coolant, brake fluid or any other unexpectedly starting the engine.
tems and strongly advises against fluid on hot engine components.
performing these services on a This may cause a fire.
SUBARU vehicle. Non-SUBARU ap-
proved flushing systems use chemi- . When the ignition switch is in the
cals and/or solvents which have not “ON” position, the cooling fan
been tested or approved by SUBARU. may operate suddenly even when
SUBARU warranties do not cover any the engine is stopped. If your
part of the vehicle which is damaged by body or clothes come into con-
adding or applying chemicals and/or tact with a rotating fan, that could
solvents other than those approved or result in serious injury. To avoid
recommended by SUBARU. risk of injury, perform the follow-
ing precautions.
– Models with push-button start
system:
Always turn the push-button
ignition switch to the “OFF”
position and confirm that the
& When checking or servicing . Do not touch the oil filter until the Engine hood
in the engine compartment engine has cooled down comple- S11AC
S11AB03 tely. Doing so may result in a burn
or other injury. Note that the oil CAUTION
filter becomes very hot when the
engine is running and remains . Be extremely careful not to catch
hot for some time after the engine fingers or other objects when
has stopped. closing the engine hood.
. Do not push the hood forcibly to
close it. It could deform the metal.
& When checking or servicing . Be extremely careful opening the
in the engine compartment engine hood when the wind is
while the engine is running strong. The engine hood could
S11AB02
close suddenly, possibly causing
WARNING injuries from slamming.
. Do not install accessories other
CAUTION A running engine can be dangerous. than genuine SUBARU parts to
Keep your fingers, hands, clothing, the engine hood. If the engine
. Do not contact the drive belt hair and tools away from the cooling hood becomes too heavy, the
cover while checking the compo- fan, drive belt and any other moving stay may not be able to support
nents in the engine compartment. engine parts. Removing rings, holding it open.
Doing so may cause your hand to watches and ties is advisable.
slip off the cover and result in an . Check that the end of the hood
stay is inserted into the slot. If it is
unexpected injury.
not inserted properly, the hood
11
may drop and cause injury.
– CONTINUED –
WARNING
Always check that the hood is
properly locked before you start
driving. If it is not, it might fly open
while the vehicle is moving and
block your view, which may cause
an accident and serious bodily in-
jury.
11
Engine oil . When the engine is new and within the & Locations of the oil level
S11AE
break-in period gauge, oil filler cap and oil
. When the engine oil is of lower quality filter
CAUTION . When the incorrect oil viscosity is used S11AE06
CAUTION judged by the lowest of the two levels. If . After adding or changing the engine
the oil level is below the low level mark, oil, warm up the engine and stop it on a
If the level gauge cannot be pulled add oil so that the full level is reached. level surface, then start the engine after
out easily, twist the level gauge right a lapse of 1 minute or more. Confirm
and left, then gently pull it out. that the warning light has turned off
CAUTION after the engine has started. Refer to
Otherwise, you may be injured acci-
dentally straining yourself. . Be careful not to touch the engine “Engine low oil level warning light” F3-
oil filter when removing the oil 18.
2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean, filler cap. Doing so may result in a
and insert it again. burn, a pinched finger, or may
& Changing the oil and oil filter
S11AE02
3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly cause some other injury. Change the oil and oil filter according to
inserted until it stops. . Use only engine oil with the the maintenance schedule in the “War-
recommended grade and vis- ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
cosity. The engine oil and oil filter must be
changed more frequently than listed in
. Be careful not to spill engine oil the maintenance schedule when driving
when adding it. If oil touches the on dusty roads, when short trips are
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad frequently made, or when driving in ex-
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If tremely cold weather.
engine oil gets on the exhaust
pipe, be sure to wipe it off. NOTE
. Changing the engine oil and oil filter
To add engine oil, remove the engine oil should be performed by a well-trained
filler cap and slowly pour engine oil
through the filler neck. After pouring oil
expert. Contact your SUBARU dealer 11
for changing the engine oil and oil filter.
into the engine, you must use the level Fully trained mechanics are on standby
1) Full level gauge to confirm that the oil level is
2) Low level at a SUBARU dealer to utilize the
correct. special tools, spare parts and recom-
3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp
qt) from low level to full level NOTE mended oil for this work, and also, used
oils are properly disposed of.
4. Pull out the oil level gauge again. . To prevent overfilling the engine oil,
5. Check the oil levels on both sides of the do not add any additional oil above the
level gauge. The engine oil level must be upper level when the engine is cold.
– CONTINUED –
. If performing oil replacement your- Warranty and Maintenance booklet. Cooling system
self, observe the local regulations and S11AF
dispose of waste oil properly. NOTE & Safety precautions
Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity S11AF04
NOTE
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects CAUTION
fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity . Vehicles are filled at the factory
provide better fuel economy. However, with SUBARU SUPER COOLANT
in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is that does not require the first
required to properly lubricate the en- change for 11 years/137,500
gine. miles (11 years/220,000 km). This
coolant should not be mixed with
& Synthetic oil any other brand or type of cool-
S11AE05
You should use synthetic engine oil that ant during this period. Mixing
meets the same requirements given for with a different coolant will re-
conventional engine oil. When using syn- duce the life of the coolant.
thetic oil, you must use oil of the same Should it be necessary to top up
classification, viscosity and grade shown the coolant for any reason, use
in this Owner’s Manual. Refer to “Engine only SUBARU SUPER COOLANT.
oil” F12-4. Also, you must follow the oil If SUBARU SUPER COOLANT is
and filter changing intervals shown in the diluted with another brand or
type, the maintenance interval is system. It is recommended that the cooling Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.
shortened to that of the mixing system and connections be checked for 1. Check the coolant level on the outside
coolant. leaks, damage, or looseness. of the reservoir while the engine is cool.
. Do not splash the engine coolant 2. If the level is close to or lower than the
over painted parts. The alcohol & Engine coolant “LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the
S11AF02
contained in the engine coolant “FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is
! Checking the coolant level
may damage the paint surface. S11AF0201 empty, remove the radiator cap and refill
coolant up to just below the filler neck as
WARNING shown in the following illustration.
& Cooling fan, hose and con- Never attempt to remove the radiator
nections cap until the engine has been shut
S11AF03
Your vehicle employs an electric cooling off and has cooled down completely.
fan which is thermostatically controlled to Since the coolant is under pressure,
operate when the engine coolant reaches you may suffer serious burns from a
a specific temperature. spray of boiling hot coolant when
the cap is removed.
If the radiator cooling fan does not operate
even when the coolant temperature high
warning light blinks or illuminates in RED,
the cooling fan circuit may be defective.
Refer to “Coolant temperature low indica-
tor light/Coolant temperature high warning
light” F3-16. 1) Fill up to this level
11
Check the fuse and replace it if necessary.
Refer to “Fuses” F11-36 and “Fuse panel
located in the engine compartment” F12-
12.
If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling
system checked by your SUBARU dealer.
If frequent addition of coolant is necessary, 1) “FULL” level mark
there may be a leak in the engine cooling 2) “LOW” level mark
– CONTINUED –
& Replacing the air cleaner ele- cleaner case (rear) into the slits on the air
ment cleaner case (front).
S11AG01
Replace the air cleaner element according 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.
to the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Under NOTE
extremely dusty conditions, replace it Install the air cleaner element so that
more frequently. It is recommended that the surface with “UPR” printed on it
you always use genuine SUBARU parts. faces upward.
1) Clips
It may be difficult to replace the spark It is unnecessary to check the deflection of It is not necessary to check the transmis-
plugs. It is recommended that you have the the drive belt periodically because your sion oil level. Check that there are no
spark plugs replaced by your SUBARU engine is equipped with an automatic belt cracks, damage or leakage. However, the
dealer. tension adjuster. However, replacement of oil inspection should be performed accord-
the belt should be done according to the ing to the maintenance schedule in the
The spark plugs should be replaced maintenance schedule in the “Warranty “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
according to the maintenance schedule and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult your Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.
in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book- SUBARU dealer for replacement.
let”.
If the drive belt is loose, cracked or worn, & Recommended grade and
CAUTION contact your SUBARU dealer. viscosity
S11AJ02
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
Make sure the cables are replaced in oils and additives. Never use different
the correct order. brands together. For details, refer to
“Manual transmission, front differential
and rear differential gear oil” F12-6.
& Recommended spark plugs
S11AH01
For the recommended spark plugs, refer to
“Electrical system” F12-8.
Alcohol contained in the brake reservoir is used for both the brake and Clutch fluid (MT models)
fluid may damage them. clutch systems and has chambers for each S11AP
. Be careful not to spill brake fluid system. & Checking the fluid level
S11AP01
when adding it. If brake fluid If the fluid level is below “MIN”, add the
touches the exhaust pipe, it may recommended brake fluid to “MAX”. Use WARNING
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or only brake fluid from a sealed container.
a fire. If brake fluid gets on the Never let clutch fluid contact your
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it eyes because clutch fluid can be
& Recommended brake fluid harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid
off. S11AO02
Refer to “Fluids” F12-7. gets in your eyes, immediately flush
them thoroughly with clean water.
CAUTION For safety, when performing this
work, wearing eye protection is
Never use different brands of brake
advisable.
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if
they are the same brand. CAUTION
. Clutch fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moist-
ure can cause improper clutch
operation.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
1) “MAX” level line refilling, there may be a leak. If
2) “MIN” level line you suspect a problem, have the
A) The brake fluid level must be checked in vehicle checked at your SUBARU
this area. dealer.
Check the fluid level monthly. . When clutch fluid is added, be
Check the fluid level on the outside of the careful not to allow any dirt into
reservoir. Be sure to check the fluid level the tank.
for the brake system at the shaded area in . Never splash the clutch fluid over
the illustration. For MT models, this painted surfaces or rubber parts.
Alcohol contained in the clutch Check the fluid level monthly. Brake booster
fluid may damage them. Check the fluid level on the outside of the S11AQ
. Be careful not to spill clutch fluid reservoir. Because this reservoir is used If the brake booster does not operate as
when adding it. If clutch fluid for both the brake and clutch systems and described in the following, have it checked
touches the exhaust pipe, it may has chambers for each system, be sure to by your SUBARU dealer.
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or check the fluid level for the clutch system
1. With the ignition switch in the “LOCK”/
a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the at the shaded area in the illustration. If
“OFF” position, depress the brake pedal
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it the fluid level is below “MIN”, add the
several times, applying the same pedal
off. recommended clutch fluid to “MAX”.
force each time. The distance the pedal
. The fluid level for the clutch Use only clutch fluid from a sealed contain- travels should not vary.
system must be checked at the er.
2. With the brake pedal depressed, start
inboard side of the reservoir. It the engine. The pedal should move slightly
cannot be checked at the out- & Recommended clutch fluid down to the floor.
S11AP02
board side of the reservoir. Refer to “Fluids” F12-7. 3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop
the engine and keep the pedal depressed
CAUTION for 30 seconds. The pedal height should
Never use different brands of clutch not change.
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing 4. Start the engine again and run for
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if approximately one minute then turn it off.
they are the same brand. Depress the brake pedal several times to
check the brake booster. The brake
booster operates properly if the pedal
stroke decreases with each depression. 11
Brake pedal If the free play is not within proper Clutch pedal (MT models)
S11AR
specification, contact your SUBARU deal- S11AS
er.
Check the brake pedal free play and Check the clutch pedal free play according
reserve distance according to the main- & Checking the brake pedal re- to the maintenance schedule in the “War-
tenance schedule in the “Warranty and serve distance ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Maintenance Booklet”. S11AR02
& Checking the clutch pedal Hill start assist system Replacement of brake pad
free play S11BF and lining
S11AS02
Ensure that the Hill start assist system S11AT
– CONTINUED –
CAUTION brake to cool down. Repeat this proce- Parking brake stroke
dure. S11AU
If you continue to drive despite the 5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the
scraping noise from the audible parking brake stroke is out of the specified
brake pad wear indicator, it will range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut
result in the need for costly brake located on the parking brake lever.
rotor repair or replacement.
Parking brake stroke:
& Breaking-in of new brake 7 – 8 notches / 45 lbf (200 N, 20.4 kgf)
pads and linings
S11AT01
When replacing the brake pad or lining,
use only genuine SUBARU parts. After WARNING
replacement, the new parts must be A safe location and situation should
broken in as follows. be selected for break-in driving. Check the parking brake stroke according
! Brake pad and lining to the maintenance schedule in the “War-
S11AT0101
While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40 mph ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. When
(50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake pedal
CAUTION the parking brake is properly adjusted,
lightly. Repeat this five or more times. Pulling the parking brake lever too braking power is fully applied by pulling the
! Parking brake lining forcefully may cause the rear wheels lever up 7 to 8 notches gently but firmly
S11AT0102
to lock. To avoid this, be certain to (approximately 45 lbf [200 N, 20.4 kgf]). If
1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of approxi- the parking brake lever stroke is not within
pull the lever up slowly and gently.
mately 22 mph (35 km/h). the specified range, have the brake sys-
2. With the parking brake release button tem checked and adjusted at your
pushed in, pull the parking brake lever SUBARU dealer.
SLOWLY and GENTLY (pulling with a
force of approximately 33.7 lbf [150 N,
15.3 kgf]).
3. Drive the vehicle for approximately 220
yards (200 meters) in this condition.
4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking
Tires and wheels ! Winter (snow) tires the garage and the temperature outside.
S11AV
S11AV0103
Winter tires are best suited for driving on By way of example, the following table
& Types of tires snow-covered and icy roads. However shows the required tire pressures that
S11AV01
winter tires do not perform as well as correspond to various outside tempera-
You should be familiar with type of tires
summer tires and all season tires on roads tures when the temperature in the garage
present on your vehicle.
other than snow-covered and icy roads. is 608F (15.68C).
! All season tires Example:
S11AV0101
All season tires are designed to provide an & Tire pressure monitoring Ti r e s i z e : P 2 2 5 / 6 0 R 1 7 9 8 H a n d
adequate measure of traction, handling system (TPMS) (if equipped) 225/55R18 98H
and braking performance in year-round S11AV02 Standard tire pressures:
driving including snowy and icy road The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with a warning message by Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)
conditions. However all season tires do Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
not offer as much traction performance as sending a signal from a sensor that is
winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow installed in each wheel when tire pressure Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)
or on icy roads. is severely low. The tire pressure monitor-
ing system will activate only when the Adjusted pressure
All season tires are identified by “ALL Outside [psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)]
vehicle is driven. Also, this system may not temperature
SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on Front Rear
react immediately to a sudden drop in tire
the tire sidewall.
pressure (for example, a blow-out caused 308F (−18C) 36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4)
! Summer tires by running over a sharp object).
S11AV0102
108F (−128C) 38 37
Summer tires are high-speed capability If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm (265, 2.65) (255, 2.55)
tires best suited for highway driving under garage and will then drive the vehicle in −108F (−238C) 41 (280, 2.8) 39 (270, 2.7)
dry conditions. cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire
Summer tires are inadequate for driving on pressures may cause the low tire pressure If the low tire pressure warning light 11
slippery roads such as on snow-covered or warning light to illuminate. To avoid this illuminates when you drive the vehicle in
icy roads. problem when adjusting the tire pressures cold outside air after adjusting the tire
If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered in a warm garage, inflate the tires to pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the
or icy roads, we strongly recommend the pressures higher than those shown on tire pressures using the method described
use of winter (snow) tires. the tire inflation pressure label. Specifi- above. Then, increase the vehicle speed
When installing winter tires, be sure to cally, inflate them by an extra 1 psi (6.9 to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to
replace all four tires. kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm2) for every difference of see that the low tire pressure warning light
108F (5.68C) between the temperature in turns off a few minutes later. If the low tire
– CONTINUED –
pressure warning light does not turn off, When a tire is replaced, adjustments are as soon as possible.
the tire pressure monitoring system may necessary to ensure continued normal When a spare tire is mounted or a
not be functioning normally. In this event, operation of the tire pressure monitoring wheel rim is replaced without the
go to a SUBARU dealer to have the system. As with wheel replacement, there- original pressure sensor/transmitter
system inspected as soon as possible. fore, you should have the work performed being transferred, the low tire pres-
by a SUBARU dealer. sure warning light will illuminate
While the vehicle is driven, friction be-
tween tires and the road surface causes steadily after blinking for approxi-
WARNING mately one minute. This indicates
the tires to warm up. After illumination of
the low tire pressure warning light, any If the low tire pressure warning light the TPMS is unable to monitor all
increase in the tire pressures caused by an does not illuminate briefly after the four road wheels. Contact your
increase in the outside air temperature or ignition switch is turned ON or the SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
by an increase in the temperature in the light illuminates steadily after blink- for tire and sensor replacement and/
tires can cause the low tire pressure ing for approximately one minute, or system resetting. If the light
warning light to turn off. you should have your Tire Pressure illuminates steadily after blinking
Monitoring System checked at a for approximately one minute,
To register newly fitted TPMS valves on promptly contact a SUBARU dealer
SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
the replacement wheels (when switching to have the system inspected.
ble.
to snow tires, for example), drive for
several minutes at a speed of 25 mph (40 If this light illuminates while driving,
km/h) or higher. never brake suddenly and keep
driving straight ahead while gradu-
& Tire inspection
S11AV03
It may not be possible to install TPMS ally reducing speed. Then slowly Check on a daily basis that the tires
valves on certain wheels that are on the pull off the road to a safe place. are free from serious damage,
market. Therefore, if you change the Otherwise an accident involving
wheels (for example, a switch to snow
nails, and stones. At the same time,
serious vehicle damage and serious
tires), use wheels that have the same part personal injury could occur.
check the tires for abnormal wear.
number as the standard-equipment
If this light still illuminates while Contact your SUBARU dealer im-
wheels. Without four operational TPMS mediately if you find any problem.
driving after adjusting the tire pres-
valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS
sure, a tire may have significant
will not fully function and the warning light
damage and a fast leak that causes
NOTE
on the combination meter will illuminate . When the wheels and tires
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
steadily after blinking for approximately strike curbs or are subjected to
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
one minute.
harsh treatment as when the & Tire pressures and wear on the door pillar on the driver’s
S11AV04
vehicle is driven on a rough Maintaining the correct tire pres- side.
surface, they can suffer damage sures helps to maximize the tires’ Driving even a short distance
that cannot be seen with the service lives and is essential for warms up the tires and increases
naked eye. This type of damage good running performance. Check the tire pressures. Also, the tire
does not become evident until and, if necessary, adjust the pres- pressures are affected by the out-
time has passed. Try not to drive sure of each tire and the spare (if side temperature. It is best to check
over curbs, potholes or on other equipped) at least once a month tire pressure outdoors before driv-
rough surfaces. If doing so is and before any long journey. ing the vehicle.
unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s
speed down to a walking pace or When a tire becomes warm, the air
less, and approach the curbs as inside it expands, causing the tire
squarely as possible. Also, make pressure to increase. Be careful not
sure the tires are not pressed to mistakenly release air from a
against the curb when you park warm tire to reduce its pressure.
the vehicle.
. If you feel unusual vibration NOTE
while driving or find it difficult to . The air pressure in a tire
steer the vehicle in a straight line, increases by approximately 4.3
one of the tires and/or wheels psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm2) when the
may be damaged. Drive slowly to tire becomes warm. 11
Tire inflation pressure label . The tires are considered cold
the nearest authorized SUBARU
dealer and have the vehicle in- Check the tire pressures when the when the vehicle has been
spected. tires are cold. Use a pressure parked for at least three hours
gauge to adjust the tire pressures or has been driven less than one
to the values shown on the tire mile (1.6 km).
inflation pressure label. The tire
inflation pressure label is located
– CONTINUED –
vehicle control could lead to Contact your SUBARU dealer & Wear indicators
S11AV06
an accident. if you notice abnormal tire
wear.
& Wheel balance
S11AV05 NOTE
Each wheel was correctly balanced
when your vehicle was new, but the The suspension system is de-
wheels will become unbalanced as signed to hold each wheel at a
the tires become worn during use. certain alignment (relative to the
Wheel imbalance causes the steer- other wheels and to the road) for
ing wheel to vibrate slightly at optimum straight-line stability
certain vehicle speeds and detracts and cornering performance.
from the vehicle’s straight-line sta- 1) New tread
bility. It can also cause steering and 2) Worn tread
suspension system problems and
3) Tread wear indicator
abnormal tire wear. If you suspect
that the wheels are not correctly Each tire incorporates a tread wear
balanced, have them checked and indicator, which becomes visible
adjusted by your SUBARU dealer. when the depth of the tread grooves
Also have them adjusted after tire decreases to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A
repairs and after tire rotation. tire must be replaced when the 11
tread wear indicator appears as a
CAUTION solid band across the tread.
Loss of correct wheel align- WARNING
ment causes the tires to wear
on one side and reduces the When a tire’s tread wear indi-
vehicle’s running stability. cator becomes visible, the tire
– CONTINUED –
is worn beyond the acceptable & Rotational direction of tires & Tire rotation
S11AV11 S11AV07
limit and must be replaced
immediately. With a tire in this
condition, driving at high
speeds in wet weather can
cause the vehicle to hydro-
plane. The resulting loss of
vehicle control can lead to an
accident.
NOTE
For safety, inspect tire tread
regularly and replace the tires Example of rotational direction Vehicles equipped with 4 non-
before their tread wear indicators marked on the sidewall unidirectional tires
become visible. 1) Front 1) Front
If the tires have specific rotational
direction, refer to the arrow marked
on the side wall.
The arrow should be pointing for-
ward direction when the wheels are
fitted.
miles (1,000 km), check the wheel struction, and size. You are advised to
nuts again and retighten any nut replace the tires with new ones that are
identical to those fitted as standard equip-
that has become loose. ment.
For handling alloy wheels, refer to “Alloy For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU
wheels” F11-28. recommends replacing all four tires at the
same time.
& Tire replacement
S11AV08
The wheels and tires are important and WARNING
integral parts of your vehicle’s design; they
cannot be changed arbitrarily. The tires . When replacing or installing
fitted as standard equipment are optimally tire(s), all four tires must be the
matched to the characteristics of the same for the following items.
Vehicles equipped with unidir- vehicle and were selected to give the best (a) Size
ectional tires possible combination of running perfor- (b) Speed symbol
1) Front mance, ride comfort, and service life. It is
(c) Load index
essential for every tire to have a size and
Tire wear varies from wheel to construction matching those shown on the (d) Circumference
wheel. Move the tires to the posi- tire inflation pressure label and to have a (e) Construction
tions shown in the illustration each speed symbol and load index matching (f) Manufacturer
time they are rotated. For the tire those shown on the tire inflation pressure
label. (g) Brand (tread pattern)
rotation schedule, refer to the “War-
(h) Degrees of wear
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Using tires of a non-specified size detracts 11
from controllability, ride comfort, braking For items (a) to (c), you must
Replace any damaged or unevenly performance, speedometer accuracy and obey the specification that is
worn tires at the time of rotation. odometer accuracy. It also creates incor- printed on the tire inflation pres-
After tire rotation, adjust the tires rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro- sure label. The tire inflation pres-
priately changes the vehicle’s ground sure label is located on the dri-
pressures and make sure the wheel ver’s door pillar.
nuts are correctly tightened. clearance.
If all the four tires are not the
All four tires must be the same in terms of same for items (a) to (h), serious
After driving approximately 600 manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con-
– CONTINUED –
Windshield washer fluid When there is only a small amount of & Windshield washer fluid
S11AX
washer fluid remaining, the windshield S11AX02
Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield
washer fluid warning light will illuminate. washer fluid is unavailable use clean
When this occurs, refill the washer fluid. water.
In areas where water freezes in winter, use
& Adding the windshield an anti-freeze type windshield washer
washer fluid fluid.
S11AX01
If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
CAUTION a different concentration from the one
Never use engine coolant as washer used previously, purge the old fluid from
fluid because it could cause paint the piping between the reservoir tank and
damage. washer nozzles by operating the washer
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
the concentration of the fluid remaining in
Windshield washer fluid warning light the piping is too low for the outside
(type A) temperature, it may freeze and block the
nozzles.
CAUTION
. Adjust the washer fluid concen-
tration appropriately for the out-
side temperature. If the concen-
tration is inappropriate, sprayed 11
washer fluid may freeze on the
windshield and obstruct your
view, and the fluid may freeze in
Remove the washer tank filler cap, then the reservoir tank.
add windshield washer fluid.
. State or local regulations on
Windshield washer fluid warning light
volatile organic compounds may
(type B) restrict the use of methanol, a
common windshield washer anti-
– CONTINUED –
freeze additive. Washer fluids Replacement of wiper blades carefully return the wiper arms on
containing non-methanol anti- S11AZ the windshield by hand. You
freeze agents should be used Grease, wax, insects, or other material on should not return the wiper arms
only if they provide cold weather the windshield or the wiper blade results in to the windshield only by the
protection without damaging jerky wiper operation and streaking on the return spring. Otherwise, the wi-
your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades glass. If you cannot remove the streaks per arms may be deformed and/or
or washer system. after operating the windshield washer or if the windshield surface may be
the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer scratched.
surface of the windshield (or rear window) . When you are going to raise the
and the wiper blades using a sponge or passenger-side wiper arm, first
soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild- raise the driver-side wiper arm.
abrasive cleaner. After cleaning, rinse the Otherwise, the passenger-side
windshield and wiper blades with clean wiper assembly and driver-side
water. The windshield is clean if beads do wiper assembly will touch each
not form when you rinse the windshield other, possibly resulting in
with water. scratches.
. Return the passenger-side wiper
CAUTION arm to its original position before
returning the driver-side wiper
. Do not clean the wiper blades
arm to its original position. Other-
with gasoline or a solvent, such
wise, the passenger-side wiper
as paint thinner or benzine. This
assembly and driver-side wiper
will cause deterioration of the
assembly will touch each other,
wiper blades.
possibly resulting in scratches.
. While removing the wiper blades
from the wiper arms, do not If you cannot eliminate the streaking even
return the wiper arms to the after following this method, replace the
original positions. Otherwise, wiper blades using the following proce-
the windshield surface may be dures.
scratched.
. When returning the raised wiper
arms to the original positions,
– CONTINUED –
4. Insert the wiper blade rubber into the 3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward
slit, then return to the tip of the position. you to remove it from the wiper arm.
5. Check that the wiper blade rubber is 4. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
fixed properly. If wiper blade rubbers are wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
not attached properly, they may scratch 5. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
the windshield. 2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun-
lower it in position.
terclockwise.
6. Attach the wiper blade.
NOTE
It may be difficult to perform the wiper 11
blade rubber replacement. We recom-
mend that you contact your SUBARU
dealer for wiper blade rubber replace-
ment if necessary.
– CONTINUED –
& Rear window wiper blade 2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of
rubber the plastic support.
S11AZ04
ends. If the rubber is not retained properly, Battery . To lessen the risk of sparks,
the wiper may scratch the rear window S11BA remove rings, metal watchbands,
glass. and other metal jewelry. Never
5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the WARNING allow metal tools to contact the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place. positive battery terminal and any-
. Before beginning work on or near thing connected to it WHILE you
6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
any battery, be sure to extinguish are at the same time in contact
lower it in position.
all cigarettes, matches, and light- with any other metallic portion of
ers. Never expose a battery to an the vehicle because a short cir-
open flame or electric sparks. cuit will result.
Batteries give off a gas which is
highly flammable and explosive. . Keep everyone including children
away from the battery.
. For safety, in case an explosion
does occur, wear eye protection . Charge the battery in a well-
or shield your eyes when working ventilated area.
near any battery. Never lean over . Battery posts, terminals and re-
a battery. lated accessories contain lead
. Do not let battery fluid contact and lead compounds, chemicals
eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be- known to the State of California
cause battery fluid is a corrosive to cause cancer and reproductive
acid. If battery fluid gets on your harm. Batteries also contain
skin or in your eyes, immediately other chemicals known to the
flush the area with water thor- State of California to cause can-
cer. Wash hands after handling.
oughly. Seek medical help imme- 11
diately if acid has entered the
eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
and seek medical attention im-
mediately.
– CONTINUED –
CAUTION Fuses
S11BB
Never use more than 10 amperes
when charging the battery because CAUTION
it will shorten battery life.
Never replace a fuse with one having
a higher rating or with material other
than a fuse because serious damage
or a fire could result.
1) Spare fuses 4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.
The other one (main fuse box) is housed in 5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,
1) Good replace it with a spare fuse of the same
the engine compartment. Also, the spare
2) Blown rating.
fuses are stored in the fuse box cover.
If any lights, accessories or other electrical 6. If the same fuse blows again, this
controls do not operate, inspect the corre- indicates that its system has a problem.
sponding fuse. If a fuse has blown, replace Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.
it.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position and turn off all electrical
accessories. 11
2. Remove the cover.
3. Determine which fuse may be blown.
Look at the back side of each fuse box
cover and refer to “Fuses and circuits”
F12-10.
The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse
box in the engine compartment.
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could LED headlight warning light (type B)
result in a fire. For the specified The LED headlight warning light illumi-
wattage of each bulb, refer to “Bulb nates if the LED headlights malfunction.
chart” F12-14. Have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE
For models with type B combination
meter, if SRH is malfunctioning, the
SRH OFF indicator light appears on the
combination meter when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position. It
indicates that SRH has been deacti-
vated. Contact a SUBARU dealer for an
inspection.
CAUTION
Halogen headlight bulbs become
very hot while in use. If you touch
the bulb surface with bare hands or
greasy gloves, fingerprints or
grease on the bulb surface will
develop into hot spots, causing the
bulb to break. If there are finger
prints or grease on the bulb surface,
wipe them away with a soft cloth Right-hand side
moistened with alcohol. 1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on
the air intake duct, then remove the air
intake duct.
NOTE
. If headlight aiming is required, con-
sult your SUBARU dealer for proper
adjustment of the headlight aim.
. It may be difficult to replace the
bulbs. Have the bulbs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary. 11
Perform the following steps to replace the
bulbs. Left-hand side
2. Use a screwdriver to remove the
secured clip of the washer tank. To make
it easy to access the bulb, turn the neck of
the washer fluid filler pipe as illustrated.
– CONTINUED –
3. Slide the rear combination light as- 1) Tail light 1) Guide pins
sembly rearward and remove it from the 2) Rear side marker light 2) Catches
vehicle. 3) Rear turn signal light 3) Clips
4. Remove the bulb socket from the rear 7. Put the rear combination light assem-
combination light assembly by turning it bly into place while aligning the 2 guide
counterclockwise. pins and catches with the guide holes and
5. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and clips on the vehicle.
replace it with a new one.
6. Set the bulb socket into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks. 11
– CONTINUED –
8. Tighten the upper and lower screws. 2. For left side light, turn the bulb socket
9. Reinstall the covers. 1. Insert a flat-head screwdriver into the clockwise and remove it.
light cover or rear gate light (if equipped) For right side light, turn the bulb socket
as shown in the illustration, then pry it off counterclockwise and remove it.
the rear gate trim.
4. Install the bulb socket by turning it & Vanity mirror light (if
clockwise. equipped)
5. Install the light cover on the rear gate. S11BE34
CAUTION
& License plate light
S11BE07 Replacing the bulb could cause
burns since the bulb may be very
hot. Have the bulb replaced by your
SUBARU dealer.
CAUTION 11
Replacing the bulb could cause
burns since the bulb may be very
hot. Have the bulb replaced by your Dome light
SUBARU dealer.
– CONTINUED –
& Other bulbs 1. Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of
S11BE29 gasoline and the area around the headlight
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
is not deformed.
Have the bulbs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary. 2. Park the vehicle on level ground.
3. Sit in the driver’s seat.
4. Bounce the vehicle several times.
2. Turn the bolt A clockwise or counter- Replacing key battery swallow them.
clockwise to adjust it. S11BK . There is a danger of an explosion
Remember the direction of the rotation and The access key fob/transmitter battery if the battery is incorrectly re-
number of rotations. may be discharged under the following placed. Replace only with the
conditions. same or equivalent type of the
. The operation of the keyless access battery.
function is unstable. . Batteries should not be exposed
. The operating distance of the remote to excessive heat such as bright
keyless entry system is unstable. sunlight, fire or the like.
. The transmitter does not operate prop-
erly when used within the standard dis- NOTE
tance.
. Replace only with the same or
Replace the battery with a new one. equivalent type of battery recom-
mended by the manufacturer.
& Safety precautions . Dispose of used batteries according
S11BK04 to local laws.
3. Turn bolt B the same number of turns CAUTION . Mount the battery in the correct
and in the same direction as step 2. orientation to prevent fluid leakage.
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on Be careful not to bend the terminals. It
NOTE or in the access key fob/transmit- may result in a malfunction.
ter when replacing battery. . It is recommended that the battery
. If the headlight aim cannot be ad-
. Before replacing the battery, re- be replaced by a SUBARU dealer.
justed, contact your SUBARU dealer. 11
move any static electricity. . Use a new battery.
. To inspect of the headlight aim
. After replacing the battery, confirm
position, consult a SUBARU dealer. . Be careful not to touch or damage that the transmitter functions properly.
the printed circuit board in the
access key fob/transmitter when
replacing the battery.
. Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any re-
moved parts; children could
– CONTINUED –
CAUTION
When removing or reinstalling the
access key fob cover, make sure that
the plastic part does not come off or
become misaligned.
2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl 4. Insert a new battery with its positive (+)
tape or a cloth, and insert it in the gap to side facing upward as shown in the figure.
remove the cover.
1) Release button
2) Emergency key
2. Remove the transmitter case from the 1) Negative (−) side facing up
key head. 4. Replace the old battery with a new
battery making sure to install the new
1. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl battery with the negative (−) side facing up.
tape or a cloth. Open the key head using a 5. Put together the transmitter case by
flat-head screwdriver. fitting the hooks on the case.
6. Reinstall the transmitter case in the
key head.
7. Refit the removed half of the key head.
11
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Specifications
Specifications........................................................ 12-2 Temporary spare tires ........................................... 12-9
S12
Dimensions........................................................... 12-2 Brake disc ............................................................ 12-9
Engine .................................................................. 12-3 Fuses and circuits .............................................. 12-10
Fuel ...................................................................... 12-3 Fuse panel located in the passenger
Engine oil ............................................................. 12-4 compartment ................................................... 12-10
Manual transmission, front differential and rear Fuse panel located in the engine compartment ... 12-12
differential gear oil .............................................. 12-6 Bulb chart............................................................ 12-14
Fluids ................................................................... 12-7 Safety precautions.............................................. 12-14
Engine coolant...................................................... 12-7 Bulb chart .......................................................... 12-15
Electrical system .................................................. 12-8 Vehicle identification .......................................... 12-18
Tires ..................................................................... 12-8
12
12-2 Specifications/Specifications
Specifications
S12AA
& Dimensions
S12AA01
in (mm)
Item
Overall length 178.5 (4,485)
Models with rear gate light 71.7 (1,820)
Overall width
Models without rear gate light 71.0 (1,800)
Overall height 63.6 (1,615)
Wheel base 104.9 (2,665)
Front 61.0 (1,550)
Tread
Rear 61.2 (1,555)
Ground clearance*1 8.7 (220)
Specifications/Specifications 12-3
& Engine
S12AA02
Engine model FB20 (2.0 L, DOHC, non-turbo) FB25 (2.5 L, DOHC, non-turbo)
Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder,
4 stroke direct injection gasoline engine 4-stroke direct injection gasoline engine
Displacement cu-in (cc) 122 (1,995) 152 (2,498)
Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.31 6 3.54 (84.0 6 90.0) 3.70 6 3.54 (94.0 6 90.0)
Compression ratio 12.5 : 1 12.0 : 1
Firing order 1–3–2–4 1–3–2–4
& Fuel
S12AA08
12
– CONTINUED –
12-4 Specifications/Specifications
NOTE
The procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommended
that you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.
! Approved engine oil
S12AA1201
Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further details, please contact your SUBARU dealer.
If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described on the next page.
Specifications/Specifications 12-5
NOTE
Each quantity indicated here is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the
temperature and other factors.
– CONTINUED –
12-6 Specifications/Specifications
& Manual transmission, front differential and rear differential gear oil
S12AA13
Oil Manual transmission oil Front differential gear Rear differential gear oil Rear differential gear oil (MT models)
oil (CVT models) (CVT models)
. SUBARU Extra . SUBARU Extra MT*3
Oil grade MT*3 API classification GL-5
. API classification . API classification GL-5
GL-5 (75W-90)*4 (75W-90)
. 75W-90*
. 90
SAE viscosity
No. and ap- —
plicable tem-
perature
*: Recommended
Oil capacity*1 3.5 US qt (3.3 liters, 2.9 1.4 US qt (1.3 liters, 1.1 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)
Imp qt) Imp qt)
Remarks*2 “Manual transmission “Front differential gear oil (CVT models) and rear differential gear oil” F11-15
oil” F11-14
*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.
*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
*3: The vehicle is filled at the factory with this type of oil.
*4: You may use this type of manual transmission oil. However, using this type of oil will detract from driveability and fuel efficiency.
Specifications/Specifications 12-7
& Fluids
S12AA10
Brake fluid FMVSS No. 116, DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake — “Brake fluid” F11-15
fluid
FMVSS No. 116, DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake “Clutch fluid (MT models)” F11-
Clutch fluid (MT models) fluid — 16
The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to “Cooling system” F11-10.
12
– CONTINUED –
12-8 Specifications/Specifications
& Tires
S12AA05
*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel nuts
by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible. For the wheel nut tightening procedure,
refer to “Changing a flat tire” F9-5.
Specifications/Specifications 12-9
12
Fuse Fuse
Circuit
panel rating
23 10 A DRL
24 7.5 A A/C ACC (DCDC)
25 7.5 A UNIT +B (DCDC)
26 10 A BACK UP
27 10 A A/C +B
28 20 A TRAIL R.FOG
29 7.5 A AUDIO ACC (DCDC)
30 7.5 A BACKUP (DCDC)
31 7.5 A SMT (DCDC)
32 7.5 A ILLUMI
33 7.5 A KEY SW A
34 Empty
35 7.5 A ILUMI (DCDC)
36 7.5 A KEY SW B
37 7.5 A STOP
38 7.5 A EYE SIGHT
12
– CONTINUED –
Fuse Fuse
Circuit
panel rating
23 10 A E/G2
24 Empty
25 Empty
26 20 A O2 HTR
27 15 A E/G1
28 Empty
29 30 A BACKUP
30 25 A R. DEF
31 20 A AUDIO
32 30 A VDC SOL
33 25 A MAIN FAN
34 25 A SUB FAN
35 10 A DEICER
36 15 A F. FOG
37 15 A BLOWER
38 15 A BLOWER
39 Empty
40 30 A F. WIPER
12
41 15 A F. WASH
42 15 A R. WIPER
43 Empty
44 Empty
Bulb chart
S12AC
& Safety precautions
S12AC03
WARNING
Bulbs may become very hot while
illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,
turn off the lights and wait until the
bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is
a risk of sustaining a burn injury.
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire.
12
NOTE
Lights indicated by letters are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.
– CONTINUED –
12
13
sure to which this tire may be material used in the plies (both
inflated. For example, “300 kPa sidewall and tread area) of this tire.
(44 PSI) MAX. PRESS”
For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2
! Maximum load rating STEEL + 2 POLYESTER SIDE-
S13AB010302
The load rating at the maximum WALL 2 POLYESTER”
permissible weight load for this tire. ! Uniform Tire Quality Grad-
For example, “MAX. LOAD 580 kg ing (UTQG)
(1279 LBS) @ 300 kPa (44 PSI) S13AB010305
For details, refer to “Uniform tire
MAX. PRESS.” quality grading standards” F13-14. The vehicle placard is attached to
WARNING
the driver’s side door pillar.
& Recommended tire inflation Example:
Maximum load rating applies pressure
S13AB02
only to the tire, not to the ! Recommended cold tire in-
vehicle. Putting a load rated flation pressure
tire on any vehicle does not S13AB0201
! Construction type
S13AB010303
Applicable construction of this tire.
For example, “TUBELESS STEEL
The vehicle placard shows original adjust the tire pressures to the steel wires, wrapped or reinforced
tire size, recommended cold tire specific values. Driving even a short by ply cords and that is shaped to fit
inflation pressure on each tire at distance warms up the tires and the rim.
maximum loaded vehicle weight, increases the tire pressures. Also, . Bead separation
seating capacity and loading infor- the tire pressures are affected by A breakdown of the bond between
mation. the outside temperature. It is best to components in the bead.
! Adverse safety conse- check tire pressure outdoors before . Bias ply tire
quences of under-inflation driving the vehicle. When a tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply
S13AB0203 becomes warm, the air inside it cords that extend to the beads are
Driving at high speeds with exces-
expands, causing the tire pressure laid at alternate angles substantially
sively low tire pressures can cause
to increase. Be careful not to mis- less than 90 degrees to the center-
the tires to flex severely and to
takenly release air from a warm tire line of the tread.
rapidly become hot. A sharp in-
to reduce its pressure. . Carcass
crease in temperature could cause
tread separation, and failure of the The tire structure, except tread and
& Glossary of tire terminology sidewall rubber which, when in-
tire(s). Possible resulting loss of . Accessory weight
S13AB03
tread and bead. entially around a tire. to the end of this section) and
. Sidewall separation . Tread separation dividing by 2.
The parting of the rubber compound Pulling away of the tread from the . Wheel-holding fixture
from the cord material in the side- tire carcass. The fixture used to hold the wheel
wall. . Treadwear indicators (TWI) and tire assembly securely during
. Snow tire The projections within the principal testing.
A tire that attains a traction index grooves designed to give a visual
equal to or greater than 110, com- indication of the degrees of wear of
pared to the ASTM E1136-93 Stan- the tread.
dard Reference Test Tire, when . Vehicle capacity weight
using the snow traction test as The rated cargo and luggage load
described in ASTM F-1805-00, plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the
Standard Test Method for Single vehicle’s designated seating capa-
Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight city.
Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered . Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Surfaces, and which is marked with Load on an individual tire that is
an Alpine Symbol “ ” on at least determined by distributing to each
one sidewall. axle its share of the maximum
. Test rim loaded vehicle weight and dividing
The rim on which a tire is fitted for by two.
testing, and it may be any rim listed . Vehicle normal load on the tire
as appropriate for use with that tire. Load on an individual tire that is
. Tread determined by distributing to each
That portion of a tire that comes into axle its share of the curb weight,
contact with the road. accessory weight, and normal oc-
. Tread rib cupant weight (distributed in accor-
A tread section running circumfer- dance with Table 1 that is appended
Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Designated seating Vehicle normal load, Occupant distribution in a
capacity, number of number of occupants normally loaded vehicle
occupants
2 through 4 2 2 in front.
5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second
seat.
2 in front, 1 in second
11 through 15 5 seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
2 in front, 2 in second
16 through 22 7 seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
13
– CONTINUED –
& Tire care – maintenance and rotation. After tire rotation, adjust axle’s GAWR are shown on the
safety practices the tire pressures and make sure vehicle certification label located at
S13AB04
. Check on a daily basis that the the wheel nuts are correctly tigh- the bottom of driver’s side door
tires are free from serious damage, tened. For information about the pillar.
nails, and stones. At the same time, tightening torque and tightening The GVWR and front and rear
check the tires for abnormal wear. sequence for the wheel nuts, refer GAWRs are determined by not only
. Inspect the tire tread regularly to “Flat tires” F9-5. the maximum load rating of tires but
and replace the tires before their also loaded capacities of the vehi-
tread wear indicators become visi- & Determining compatibility of cle’s suspension, axles and other
ble. When a tire’s tread wear in- tire and vehicle load capaci- parts of the body.
dicator becomes visible, the tire is ties
S13AB06 Therefore, this means that the
worn beyond the acceptable limit The sum of four tires’ maximum vehicle cannot necessarily be
and must be replaced immediately. load ratings must exceed the max- loaded up to the tire’s maximum
With a tire in this condition, driving imum loaded vehicle weight load rating on the tire sidewall.
at even low speeds in wet weather (“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the
can cause the vehicle to hydro- maximum load ratings of two front & Adverse safety conse-
plane. Possible resulting loss of tires and of two rear tires must quences of overloading on
vehicle control can lead to an exceed each axle’s maximum handling and stopping and on
accident. loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original tires
S13AB07
. To maximize the life of each tire equipment tires are designed to Overloading could affect vehicle
and ensure that the tires wear fulfill those conditions. handling, stopping distance, and
uniformly, it is best to rotate the The maximum loaded vehicle vehicle and tire performance in the
tires every 6,000 miles (10,000 km). weight is referred to Gross Vehicle following ways. This could lead to
For information about the tire rota- Weight Rating (GVWR). And each an accident and possibly result in
tion order, refer to “Tire rotation” axle’s maximum loaded capacity is severe personal injury.
F11-26. Replace any damaged or referred to Gross Axle Weight Rat- . Vehicle stability will deteriorate.
unevenly worn tires at the time of ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each . Heavy and/or high-mounted
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Vehicle load limit – how to determine 13-11
loads could increase the risk of luggage load capacity. For exam- Vehicle load limit – how to
rollover. ple, if the “XXX” amount equals determine
. Stopping distance will increase. 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 S13BU
. Brakes could overheat and fail. lb passengers in your vehicle, the The load capacity of your vehicle is
. Suspension, bearings, axles and amount of available cargo and determined by weight, not by avail-
other body parts could break or luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. able cargo space. The load limit of
experience accelerated wear that (1400 − 750 (5 6 150) = 650 lbs.) your vehicle is shown on the vehicle
will shorten vehicle life. 5. Determine the combined weight placard attached to the driver’s side
. Tires could fail. of luggage and cargo being loaded door pillar. Locate the statement
. Tread separation could occur. on the vehicle. That weight may not “The combined weight of occupants
. Tire could separate from its rim. safely exceed the available cargo and cargo should never exceed
and luggage load capacity calcu- XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your
& Steps for Determining Cor- lated in Step 4.
rect Load Limit vehicle’s placard.
S13AB08 6. If your vehicle will be towing a The vehicle placard also shows
1. Locate the statement “The com- trailer, load from your trailer will be seating capacity of your vehicle.
bined weight of occupants and transferred to your vehicle. Consult The total load capacity includes the
cargo should never exceed XXX this manual to determine how this total weight of driver and all pas-
kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s reduces the available cargo and sengers and their belongings, any
placard. luggage load capacity of your ve- cargo, any optional equipment such
2. Determine the combined weight hicle. as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike
of the driver and passengers that carrier, etc., and the tongue load of
will be riding in your vehicle. a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity
3. Subtract the combined weight of can be calculated by the following
the driver and passengers from method. 13
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total
available amount of cargo and weight of occupants + total weight
– CONTINUED –
13-12 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Vehicle load limit – how to determine
of optional equipment + tongue load indicated on the vehicle placard further 84 lbs (38 kg) of cargo can
of a trailer (if applicable)) with the statement “The combined be carried.
weight of occupants and cargo
For information about vehicle load- Example 1B
should never exceed 900 lbs or
ing, refer to “Loading your vehicle”
408 kg”.
F8-12.
For example, if the vehicle has one
& Calculating total and load occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)
capacities varying seating plus cargo weighing 662 lbs (300
configurations kg).
S13BU01
Calculate the available load capa- 1. Calculate the total weight.
city as shown in the following
examples:
Example 1A
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Vehicle load limit – how to determine 13-13
13-14 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Uniform tire quality grading standards
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Uniform tire quality grading standards 13-15
All passenger car tires must con- under controlled conditions on spe- excessive temperature can lead to
form to Federal Safety Require- cified government test surfaces of sudden tire failure.
ments in addition to these grades. asphalt and concrete. The grade C corresponds to a level
A tire marked C may have poor of performance which all passenger
& TREADWEAR traction performance. car tires must meet under the
S13AC02
The treadwear grade is a compara- Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
tive rating based on the wear rate of WARNING dards No. 109.
the tire when tested under con- The traction grade assigned to Grades B and A represent higher
trolled conditions on a specified this tire is based on straight- levels of performance on the la-
government test course. ahead braking traction tests, boratory test wheel than the mini-
For example, a tire graded 150 and does not include accelera- mum required by law.
would wear one and one-half (1- tion, cornering, hydroplaning,
1/2) times as well on the govern- WARNING
or peak traction characteris-
ment course as a tire graded 100. tics. The temperature grade for this
The relative performance of tires tire is established for a tire that
depends upon the actual conditions is properly inflated and not
of their use, however, and may & TEMPERATURE A, B, C
S13AC04 overloaded. Excessive speed,
depart significantly from the norm The temperature grades are A (the underinflation, or excessive
due to variations in driving habits, highest), B, and C, representing the loading, either separately or
service practices and differences in tire’s resistance to the generation of in combination, can cause
road characteristics and climate. heat and its ability to dissipate heat heat buildup and possible tire
when tested under controlled con- failure.
& TRACTION AA, A, B, C ditions on a specified indoor labora-
S13AC03
The traction grades, from highest to tory test wheel. 13
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those Sustained high temperature can
grades represent the tire’s ability to cause the material of the tire to
stop on wet pavement as measured degenerate and reduce tire life, and
13-16 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.)
Reporting safety defects also obtain other information about How to contact Transport
(U.S.A.) motor vehicle safety from http:// Canada in order to report a
S13AH www.safercar.gov. safety concern relating to the
If you believe that your vehicle has a vehicle (Canada)
defect which could cause a crash or S13CF
Index
14
14-2 Index
Index 14-3
Breaking-in of new brake pads ................................... 11-20 Fluid level (brake fluid).......................................... 11-15
BSD/RCTA................................................................ 7-62 Fluid level (clutch fluid) ......................................... 11-16
Approach indicator light/warning buzzer.................... 7-66 Fluid level (washer fluid) ....................................... 11-29
OFF indicator ................................................ 3-34, 7-68 Oil level (engine oil)................................................ 11-8
OFF switch ........................................................... 7-69 Child restraint systems................................................ 1-25
Warning indicator........................................... 3-34, 7-68 Installation of a booster seat.................................... 1-34
Warning volume..................................................... 7-67 Installation with ALR/ELR seatbelt ............................ 1-30
Bulb Lower and top tether anchorages ............................. 1-35
Chart.................................................................. 12-14 Top tether anchorages ............................................ 1-38
Replacement ........................................................ 11-38 Child safety ................................................................... 5
Locks.................................................................... 2-28
C Chime
Cargo area Key........................................................................ 3-5
Cover ................................................................... 6-14 Light ..................................................................... 3-68
Light............................................................. 6-3, 11-43 Seatbelt ................................................................ 3-13
Tie-down hooks ..................................................... 6-16 Cigarette lighter .......................................................... 6-9
Catalytic converter ....................................................... 8-3 Cleaning
Center console ............................................................ 6-6 Alloy wheels .......................................................... 10-4
Changing Interior .................................................................. 10-5
Coolant................................................................ 11-12 Ventilation grille...................................................... 4-11
Flat tire................................................................... 9-5 Climate control system................................................. 4-2
Oil and oil filter ...................................................... 11-9 Automatic ............................................................... 4-6
Charge warning light .................................................. 3-17 Manual................................................................... 4-7
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator Clock ....................................................... 3-48, 3-52, 3-66
light....................................................................... 3-15 Clutch
Checking Fluid ................................................................... 11-16
Brake pedal free play ............................................ 11-18 Pedal .................................................................. 11-18
Brake pedal reserve distance ................................. 11-18 Coat hook ................................................................. 6-13
Clutch function ..................................................... 11-18 Combination meter display (color LCD)......................... 3-35
Clutch pedal free play ........................................... 11-19 Compass.......................................................... 3-82, 3-83
Coolant level ........................................................ 11-11
14-4 Index
Index 14-5
F Gauge................................................................... 3-10
Flat tires ..................................................................... 9-5 Requirements ................................................. 7-3, 12-3
Floor mat .................................................................. 6-12 Fuses ..................................................................... 11-36
Fluid......................................................................... 12-7 Fuses and circuits .................................................... 12-10
Fluid level
Brake .................................................................. 11-15 G
Clutch.................................................................. 11-16 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) .............................. 8-13
Continuously variable transmission ......................... 11-15 Glove box................................................................... 6-6
Fog light GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) .......................... 8-13
Bulb .................................................................... 11-40
Indicator light......................................................... 3-32 H
Switch .................................................................. 3-76 Hazard warning flasher .......................................... 3-8, 9-2
Front Headlight
Differential gear oil ....................................... 11-15, 12-6 Beam leveler ......................................................... 3-76
Fog light indicator light ........................................... 3-32 Bulb replacing...................................................... 11-38
Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators .... 3-15 Bulb wattage........................................................ 12-14
Seatbelt pretensioners............................................ 1-21 Control switch ........................................................ 3-68
Turn signal light .................................................... 11-40 Flasher ................................................................. 3-71
View Monitor ......................................................... 6-16 Indicator light ......................................................... 3-32
Front seats.................................................................. 1-5 Welcome lighting function........................................ 3-70
Forward and backward adjustment ............................ 1-5 Heated Steering Wheel system .................................... 3-93
Head restraints ........................................................ 1-8 High beam
Manual seat ............................................................ 1-5 Assist function ....................................................... 3-72
Power seat.............................................................. 1-6 Assist indicator light................................................ 3-31
Reclining the seatback ............................................. 1-5 Indicator light ......................................................... 3-31
Seat heater ........................................................... 1-10 High/low beam change (dimmer).................................. 3-71
Seat height adjustment............................................. 1-5 Hill descent control ..................................................... 7-44
Fuel ........................................................................... 7-3 Indicator ....................................................... 3-34, 7-45
Consumption indicator ............................................ 3-38 Hill start assist ................................................. 7-49, 11-19
Economy hints......................................................... 8-2 OFF indicator light .................................................. 3-22
Filler lid and cap ...................................................... 7-5 Warning light ......................................................... 3-22
14-6 Index
HomeLink® ................................................................ 3-83 Hill start assist OFF ....................................... 3-22, 7-52
Hook Immobilizer ............................................................ 3-29
Cargo tie-down ...................................................... 6-16 Intelligent (I) mode ........................................ 3-30, 7-32
Coat ..................................................................... 6-13 Malfunction ............................................................ 3-15
Shopping bag........................................................ 6-14 RAB OFF .............................................................. 3-34
Towing and tie-down .............................................. 9-13 Security................................................................. 3-29
Horn......................................................................... 3-94 Select lever/Gear position ....................................... 3-30
Hose and connections ............................................... 11-11 SI-DRIVE .............................................................. 3-30
Sport (S) mode ............................................. 3-30, 7-32
I Steering Responsive Headlight OFF ......................... 3-32
Icy road surface warning indicator................................ 3-34 Turn signal ............................................................ 3-31
Ignition switch ............................................................. 3-4 Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF ................................ 3-24
Light....................................................................... 3-5 Vehicle Dynamics Control operation ......................... 3-23
Illumination brightness control ..................................... 3-12 X-MODE ...................................................... 3-33, 3-48
Immobilizer ............................................................... 2-15 Inside mirror .............................................................. 3-82
Indicator light (security indicator light)....................... 3-29 Interior lights............................................................... 6-2
Indicator light
Auto Start Stop.............................................. 3-33, 7-57 J
Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected ................ 3-33, 7-61 Jack-up point .............................................................. 9-5
Auto Start Stop OFF ...................................... 3-32, 7-60 Jump starting ............................................................. 9-10
BSD/RCTA approach ............................................. 7-66
BSD/RCTA OFF .................................... 3-34, 3-37, 7-68 K
Coolant temperature low......................................... 3-16 Key............................................................................ 2-2
Cruise control........................................................ 3-31 Number plate .......................................................... 2-2
Cruise control set................................................... 3-31 Reminder chime...................................................... 3-5
Front fog light ........................................................ 3-32 Replacement ......................................................... 2-15
Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF........... 3-15 Keyless access with push-button start system ................ 2-2
Headlight .............................................................. 3-32 Disabling keyless access functions........................... 2-12
High beam ............................................................ 3-31 Warning chimes and warning indicator...................... 3-24
High beam assist ................................................... 3-31 When access key fob does not operate properly........ 9-17
Hill descent control ........................................ 3-34, 7-45 Keyless entry system.................................................. 2-17
Index 14-7
L M
Lane Change Assist (LCA).......................................... 7-63 Maintenance
Lap belt pretensioner ................................................. 1-22 Precautions ........................................................... 11-3
Leather seat materials ................................................ 10-6 Schedule............................................................... 11-3
LED headlight warning light ........................................ 3-32 Seatbelt ................................................................ 1-20
LED headlights ......................................................... 11-38 Tools...................................................................... 9-3
License plate light ..................................................... 11-43 Malfunction indicator light (check engine warning light) ... 3-15
Light Manual
Backup ................................................................ 11-42 Climate control operation ......................................... 4-7
Cargo area ................................................... 6-3, 11-43 Seat ...................................................................... 1-5
Control switch ....................................................... 3-68 Transmission ......................................................... 7-23
Daytime running .................................................... 3-74 Transmission oil ................................................... 11-14
Dome ........................................................... 6-2, 11-43 Manual mode............................................................. 7-28
Front fog..................................................... 3-76, 11-40 Map light ........................................................... 6-2, 11-43
Front side marker .................................................. 3-69 Maximum load limits ................................................... 8-19
Ignition switch ......................................................... 3-5 Meters and gauges...................................................... 3-8
License plate........................................................ 11-43 Mirror defogger .......................................................... 3-91
Map ............................................................. 6-2, 11-43 Mirrors ...................................................................... 3-82
Parking................................................................ 11-40 Moonroof.......................................................... 2-32, 9-20
Rear combination.................................................. 11-40 Multi-function display (black and white) ......................... 3-43
Rear gate ............................................................... 6-3 Multi-function display (color LCD) ................................. 3-49
Rear side marker light ........................................... 11-40
Tail...................................................................... 11-40 N
Turn signal.................................................. 3-77, 11-40 New vehicle break-in driving ......................................... 8-2
Vanity mirror.................................................. 6-5, 11-43
Loading your vehicle .................................................. 8-12 O
Low fuel warning light................................................. 3-21 Odometer ................................................................... 3-9
Low tire pressure warning light .................................... 3-18 Off road driving ........................................................... 8-6
Lower and top tether anchorage .................................. 1-35 Oil filter ..................................................................... 11-9
14-8 Index
Index 14-9
Front differential gear oil ......................................... 12-6 Rear side marker light........................................... 11-40
Rear differential gear oil ......................................... 12-6 Rear turn signal light ............................................ 11-40
Spark plugs........................................................... 12-8 Tail light .............................................................. 11-40
Refueling .................................................................... 7-5 Vanity mirror light ................................................. 11-43
Remote control mirror switch....................................... 3-90 Rocking the vehicle .................................................... 8-11
Remote engine start system........................................ 7-16 Roof
Remote keyless entry system...................................... 2-17 Antenna (for Rod type) ............................................ 5-2
Replacement Antenna (for Shark fin type)...................................... 5-2
Access key fob battery ................................. 2-14, 11-46 Rails ..................................................................... 8-14
Air cleaner element ............................................... 11-13 Tent ...................................................................... 8-14
Brake pad and lining ............................................. 11-19
Cabin air filter........................................................ 4-12 S
Lost transmitters (remote keyless entry Safety
system) .............................................................. 2-20 Precautions when driving ............................................ 4
Remote keyless entry transmitter battery ................. 11-47 Symbol ..................................................................... 3
Tire ..................................................................... 11-27 Warnings................................................................... 2
Wheel.................................................................. 11-28 Seat
Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-30 Fabric ................................................................... 10-5
Replacing bulbs .............................................. 11-38, 12-14 Heater................................................................... 1-10
Backup light ......................................................... 11-42 Seatbelt ................................................................ 4, 1-12
Cargo area light.................................................... 11-43 Fastening .............................................................. 1-14
Dome light ........................................................... 11-43 Maintenance .......................................................... 1-20
Front fog light ....................................................... 11-40 Pretensioners ........................................................ 1-21
Front turn signal light ............................................ 11-40 Safety tips ............................................................. 1-12
Halogen headlight ................................................. 11-39 Warning light and chime.......................................... 3-13
Headlight ............................................................. 11-38 Security
LED headlight ...................................................... 11-38 Alarm system......................................................... 2-25
License plate light ................................................. 11-43 Immobilizer ............................................................ 2-15
Map light ............................................................. 11-43 Indicator light ......................................................... 3-29
Parking light ......................................................... 11-40 Select lever
Rear combination light........................................... 11-40 Position indicator.................................................... 3-30
14-10 Index
Index 14-11
Tires and wheels ...................................................... 11-21 OFF switch ............................................................ 7-40
Tools .......................................................................... 9-3 Operation indicator light .......................................... 3-23
Top tether anchorages........................................ 1-35, 1-38 System ................................................................. 7-39
Towing...................................................................... 9-13 Warning light ......................................................... 3-23
All wheels on the ground ........................................ 9-16 Ventilator.................................................................... 4-2
Flat-bed truck ........................................................ 9-16
Hooks................................................................... 9-13 W
Weight.................................................................. 8-19 Warning and indicator lights......................................... 3-12
Trailer Warning chimes
Connecting ........................................................... 8-17 Keyless access with push-button start system ........... 3-24
Hitch ............................................................ 8-16, 8-22 Seatbelt ................................................................ 3-13
Towing tips............................................................ 8-24 Warning indicator
Trailer towing ............................................................ 8-18 Access key ............................................................ 3-24
Trip meter ................................................................... 3-9 BSD/RCTA ................................................... 3-34, 7-68
Turn signal Icy road surface ..................................................... 3-34
Indicator lights ....................................................... 3-31 Keyless access with push-button start system ........... 3-24
Lever.................................................................... 3-77 RAB ............................................................ 3-34, 7-81
Warning light
U ABS...................................................................... 3-20
USB power supply ....................................................... 6-9 All-Wheel Drive ...................................................... 3-22
AT OIL TEMP ........................................................ 3-18
V Auto Start Stop ............................................. 3-32, 7-59
Valet mode................................................................ 2-27 Automatic headlight beam leveler............................. 3-32
Vanity mirror...................................................... 6-5, 11-43 Brake system......................................................... 3-20
Light............................................................. 6-5, 11-43 Charge.................................................................. 3-17
Vehicle CHECK ENGINE.................................................... 3-15
Capacity weight ..................................................... 8-12 Coolant temperature high ........................................ 3-16
Identification........................................................ 12-18 Door open ............................................................. 3-22
Symbols .................................................................... 4 Engine low oil level................................................. 3-18
Vehicle Dynamics Control Hill start assist .............................................. 3-22, 7-52
OFF indicator light ................................................. 3-24 LED headlight ........................................................ 3-32
14-12 Index
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Right Page
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
(2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
(1,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Right Page
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
(2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
(1,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Right Page
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
(2,1)